Manual de Cruze 2011

2011 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M
In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Performance and
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Keys, Doors and Windows . . . 2-1
Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1
Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2
Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Warning Lights, Gauges, and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-33
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
2011 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1
Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-16
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-25
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-32
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-37
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-44
Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-50
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . . 11-6
Maintenance Records . . . . . . . . 11-9
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-13
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1
Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2011
Black plate (3,1)
Introduction
The names, logos, emblems,

slogans, vehicle model names, and
vehicle body designs appearing in
this manual including, but not limited
to, GM, the GM logo, CHEVROLET,
the CHEVROLET Emblem, and
CRUZE are trademarks and/or
service marks of General Motors
LLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,
or licensors.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 20883227 C Third Printing
This manual describes features that

may or may not be on your specific
vehicle either because they are
options that you did not purchase or
due to changes subsequent to the
printing of this owner manual.
Please refer to the purchase
documentation relating to your
specific vehicle to confirm each of
the features found on your vehicle.
For vehicles first sold in Canada,
substitute the name General
Motors of Canada Limited for
Chevrolet Motor Division wherever
it appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle for
quick reference.
iii
Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propritaires Canadiens
A French language copy of this
manual can be obtained from your
dealer or from:
On peut obtenir un exemplaire de
ce guide en franais auprs du
concessionnaire ou l'adresse
suivante:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
1-800-551-4123
Numro de poste 6438 de
langue franaise
www.helminc.com
2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.
iv
Black plate (4,1)
Introduction
Using this Manual

To quickly locate information
about the vehicle, use the Index in
the back of the manual. It is an
alphabetical list of what is in the
manual and the page number
where it can be found.
Danger, Warnings, and

Cautions
Warning messages found on vehicle
labels and in this manual describe
hazards and what to do to avoid or
reduce them.
{ WARNING
These mean there is something
that could hurt you or other
people.
Notice: This means there is
something that could result in
property or vehicle damage.
This would not be covered by
the vehicle's warranty.
The vehicle has components and

labels that use symbols instead of
text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or
information relating to a specific
component, control, message,
gauge, or indicator.
M : This symbol is shown when

you need to see your owner manual
for additional instructions or
information.
* : This symbol is shown when
you need to see a service manual
for additional instructions or
information.
Danger indicates a hazard with a

high level of risk which will result
in serious injury or death.
Warning or Caution indicates a
hazard that could result in injury or
death.
Symbols
A circle with a slash through it is a

safety symbol which means Do
Not, Do not do this, or Do not let
this happen.
Black plate (5,1)
Introduction
Vehicle Symbol Chart
Here are some additional symbols
that may be found on the vehicle
and what they mean. For more
information on the symbol, refer to
the Index.
9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning
! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)
% : Audio Steering Wheel Controls
or OnStar
$:
Brake System Warning Light
" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control
B : Engine Coolant Temperature
O : Exterior Lamps
# : Fog Lamps
. : Fuel Gauge
+ : Fuses
3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer
j : LATCH System Child

Restraints
* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure
} : Power
/ : Remote Vehicle Start
> : Safety Belt Reminders
7 : Tire Pressure Monitor
d : Traction Control
M : Windshield Washer Fluid
vi
Black plate (6,1)
Introduction
2 NOTES
In Brief
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . 1-2
Initial Drive Information

Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . 1-9
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Sensing System for Passenger
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Steering Wheel
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-13
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Vehicle Features
Radio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portable Audio Devices . . . . . .
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . .
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-15
1-16
1-16
1-16
1-17
1-17
1-18
1-18
1-18
1-1
Performance and Maintenance

Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-19
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-20
Driving for Better Fuel
Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
1-2
In Brief
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview
Black plate (2,1)
In Brief
G. Steering Wheel Controls on
page 52.
P.
Front Fog Lamps on page 64

(If Equipped).
H. Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 53.
Q. Cruise Control on page 935.
Instrument Panel Illumination

Control on page 65.
I.
A. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 61.
B. Air Vents on page 86.

C. Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 62.
Turn and LaneChange Lever.
See Turn and Lane-Change
Signals on page 64.
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Buttons. See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 523.
D. Instrument Cluster on page 58.
E. Horn on page 53.
F.
1-3
Driver Information Center (DIC)

on page 523.
J.
Infotainment on page 71.
R. Steering Wheel Adjustment on

page 52.
Satellite Radio on page 713 (If

Equipped).
S. Driver Airbag. See Where Are

the Airbags? on page 328.
Infotainment Display Screen.
T.
K. Instrument Panel Storage on

page 41.
L.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on

page 1038.
Light Sensor. See Automatic

Headlamp System on page 63.
Ignition Switch. See Ignition

Positions on page 916.
U. Driver Knee Airbag. See Where

Are the Airbags? on page 328.
V.
Power Door Locks on page 27.
M. Passenger Airbag. See Where

Are the Airbags? on page 328.
W. Hazard Warning Flashers on

page 64.
N. Hood Release. See Hood on

page 104.
X. Shift Lever. See Automatic

Transmission on page 925 or
Manual Transmission on
page 928.
O. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out

of View). See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 513.
1-4
Y.
In Brief
Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 932.
StabiliTrak System on
page 933.
Z.
Climate Control Systems on

page 81 (If Equipped).
Automatic Climate Control
System on page 83 (If
Equipped).
Heated Front Seats on page 37
(If Equipped).
AA. Passenger Airbag Status

Indicator on page 512.
AB. Passenger Knee Airbag. See
Where Are the Airbags? on
page 328.
Initial Drive
Information
This section provides a brief
overview about some of the
important features that may or may
not be on your specific vehicle.
For more detailed information, refer
to each of the features which can be
found later in this owner manual.
Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) System
The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter will work up to 20 m
(65 ft) away from the vehicle.
RKE Transmitter with Remote

Start Shown
Press the key release button to
extend the key blade. The key can
be used for the ignition and all
locks.
Press K to unlock the driver door or
all doors.
Press
Q to lock all doors.
Lock and unlock feedback can

be personalized. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 533.
In Brief
Press and hold
the trunk.
V briefly to open
Press and hold

the vehicle.
7 briefly to locate
Press and hold 7 for at least

two seconds to sound the panic
alarm.
Press 7 again to cancel the panic
alarm.
See Keys on page 22 and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) System
Operation on page 23.
Remote Vehicle Start

For vehicles with this feature, the
engine can be started from outside
of the vehicle.
1-5
Starting the Vehicle
Canceling a Remote Start
1. Aim the Remote Keyless Entry

transmitter at the vehicle.
To cancel a remote start, do one of

the following:
2. Press
Q.
3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash, or for
about 2 seconds if the vehicle is
not in view.
When the vehicle starts, the parking
lamps will turn on and remain on as
long as the engine is running. The
doors will be locked and the climate
control system may come on.
The engine will continue to run for
10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a
10-minute time extension. Remote
start can be extended only once.
Aim the RKE transmitter at

the vehicle and press and
hold / until the parking lamps
turn off.
Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.
Turn the vehicle on and then off.
See Remote Vehicle Start on

page 25.
1-6
In Brief
Door Locks
Safety Locks
See Safety Locks on page 28.
To lock or unlock the vehicle from

outside, use the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) transmitter or the key.
From inside the vehicle, use the
power door lock switch.
The rear door safety locks prevent

passengers from opening the rear
doors from inside the vehicle.
Seat Adjustment
Manual Front Seats
See Door Locks on page 27.
Power Door Locks
Press o { to activate the safety

locks on the rear doors. The LED
light (A) comes on when activated.
The power door lock switch is on
the instrument panel.
K:
Q:
Press to unlock the doors.

Press to lock the doors.
See Power Door Locks on page 27.
The rear door power windows are

also disabled.
Press o { again to deactivate the
lockout switch.
If the LED light flashes, the feature
may not be working properly.
To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front of
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the handle.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
In Brief
Seat Height Adjuster
Seat Cushion Tilt Feature
Reclining Seatbacks
If available, move the lever up or

down to manually raise or lower
the seat.

down to raise or lower the front of
the seat cushion.
To recline the seatback:
See Seat Adjustment on page 33.
1-7
1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, then release
the lever to lock the seatback in
place.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked.
1-8
In Brief
To return the seatback to an upright

position:
Power Driver Seat
Rear Seats
The rear seatbacks can be folded.
1. Lift the lever fully without

applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback
returns to the upright position.
For detailed instructions, see Rear

Seats on page 38.
Heated Seats

See Reclining Seatbacks on
page 35.
To adjust a power driver seat,

if equipped:
.
Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
Raise or lower the front part of

the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
Raise or lower the entire seat by

moving the rear of the control up
or down.
See Power Seat Adjustment on

page 34.
On vehicles with heated front

seats, the controls are on the
center console. The engine must be
running to operate the heated seats.
Press L or M to heat the driver or
passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
In Brief
Press the control once for the
highest setting. With each press
of the control, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
and then the off setting. Three lights
indicate the highest setting and one
light the lowest.
Safety Belts
1-9
Sensing System for

Passenger Airbag
See Heated Front Seats on

page 37 for more information.
United States
Head Restraint
Adjustment
Do not drive until the head restraints
for all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
To achieve a comfortable seating
position, change the seatback
recline angle as little as necessary
while keeping the seat and the
head restraint height in the proper
position.
For more information see Head
Restraints on page 32 and Seat
Adjustment on page 33.
Refer to the following sections for

important information on how to use
safety belts properly:
.
Safety Belts on page 310.
How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 313.
Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 319.
Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) on
page 347.
Canada
The passenger sensing system will
turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and the passenger
knee airbag under certain
conditions. The driver airbags,
seatmounted side impact airbags,
and roofrail airbags are not affected
by the passenger sensing system.
See Passenger Sensing System on
1-10
In Brief
The passenger airbag status

indicator will be visible on the
instrument panel when the vehicle
is started. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 512.
2. Move the control to adjust the

mirror.
Mirror Adjustment
See Power Mirrors on page 212.
Exterior
If the vehicle has heated mirrors,

see Heated Mirrors on page 213.
3. Turn the selector switch to

the O position to deselect the
mirror.
Interior
Adjust the inside rearview mirror by
moving it up and down or side to
side. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare
from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime
use and pull it for nighttime use.
See Manual Rearview Mirror on
page 213.
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare of lights from behind the
vehicle. The dimming feature and
indicator light come on each time
the vehicle is started.
See Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror on page 213.
Controls for the outside power

mirrors are on the driver door.
L (left) or R (right) to choose
the driver or passenger mirror.
Vehicles with a manual mirror

adjustment have controls next to
each mirror.
See Manual Mirrors on page 212.
Black plate (11,1)
In Brief
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
Interior Lighting
1-11
Reading Lamps
Dome Lamps
The reading lamps are located in

the overhead console.
# / $ : Press the button near

each lamp to turn it on or off.
To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.
The dome lamp controls are located

in the headliner.
2. Move the steering wheel up

or down.
(:
3. Pull or push the steering wheel

closer or away from you.
H : Press to turn the lamps on

automatically when a door is
opened.
4. Push the lever (A) up to lock the

steering wheel in place.
Do not adjust the steering wheel
while driving.
Press to turn the lamps off,

even when a door is open.
' : Press to turn on the dome

lamps.
1-12
In Brief

Control
This feature controls the brightness

of the instrument panel controls and
infotainment display screen. The
thumbwheel is located to the left
of the steering column on the
instrument panel.
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down and hold, to brighten or
dim the instrument panel controls
and infotainment display screen.
Exterior Lighting
The exterior lamps control is located

on the instrument panel to the
outboard side of the steering
column.
O:
Briefly turn to this position to

turn the automatic light control off
or on again.
AUTO: Turns the headlamps on
automatically at normal brightness,
together with the parking lamps,
taillamps, license plate lamps, side
marker lamps, and instrument panel
lights.
; : Turns on the parking lamps,

taillamps, license plate lamps, side
marker lamps, and instrument panel
lights.
5 : Turns on the headlamps,
parking lamps, taillamps, license
plate lamps, side marker lamps, and
instrument panel lights. A warning
chime sounds if the driver door is
opened when the ignition switch is
off and the headlamps are on.
# : For vehicles with fog lamps,
press to turn the lamps on or off.
For more information, see:
.
Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 61.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 62.
Front Fog Lamps on page 64.
In Brief
Windshield Wiper/Washer
9 : Turns the windshield

wipers off.
1-13
Vehicles Without Air Conditioning
3 : Single wipe, briefly move the

wiper lever down. Several wipes,
hold the wiper lever down.
Windshield Washer
With the ignition in ACC/
ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, move
the windshield wiper lever to select
the wiper speed.
2: Fast wipes.
1: Slow wipes.
Pull the windshield wiper lever

toward you to spray windshield
washer fluid and activate the wipers.
The wipers will continue until the
lever is released or the maximum
wash time is reached.
See Windshield Wiper/Washer on
page 53.
A. Temperature Control
Climate Controls
C. Floor Air Mode
The heating, cooling, defrosting,

and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with these systems.
3 : Turn the band up for more

frequent wipes or down for less
frequent wipes.
B. Bi-level Air Mode

D. Vent Air Mode
E. Fan Control
F.
Driver and Passenger Heated

Seats (If Equipped)
G. Rear Window Defogger

H. Defog
I.
Defrost
1-14
In Brief
Vehicles With Air Conditioning
I.
Defog
J.
Air Conditioning
K. Defrost
Automatic Climate Control System
F.

Seats (If Equipped)
G. Power
H. Recirculation
I.
MODE (Air Delivery Mode)
J.
AQS (Air Quality Sensor)
K. Air Conditioning
See Climate Control Systems on
page 81 or Automatic Climate
Control System on page 83
(If Equipped).
Transmission
Driver Shift Control (DSC)
C. Floor Air Mode

D. Vent Air Mode
E. Fan Control
B. Rear Window Defogger
F.
C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

Seats (If Equipped)

H. Recirculation
D. Defrost
E. Fan Control

allows you to shift an automatic
transmission similar to a manual
transmission. To use the DSC
feature:
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) to the left into the
(+) or () manual position.
In Brief
2. Press the shift lever forward (+)
to upshift or rearward () to
downshift. An M and the current
gear will be displayed in the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
Vehicle Features
See Manual Mode on page 927.
on and off. Turn to increase or

decrease the volume.
UpShift Light
Radio(s)
O : Press to turn the system
BAND: Press to choose between
FM, AM, or XM, if equipped.
MENU: Turn to select radio
stations. Press to select a menu.
g:
Press to seek the previous

station or track.
If the vehicle has a manual

transmission, it will have an up-shift
light that indicates when to shift to
the next higher gear for the best fuel
economy.
See Manual Transmission on
page 928.
l : Press to seek the next station

or track.
Buttons 1 to 6: Press to save and
select favorite stations.
INFO: Press to show available
information about the current station
or track.
For more information about these
and other radio features, see
1-15
Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can be
stored in the favorite lists in any
order. Up to six stations can be
stored in each favorite page and the
number of available favorite pages
can be set.
To store the station to a position in
the list, press the corresponding
numeric button 1 to 6 until a beep
is heard.
For more information, see Storing a
Station as a Favorite in AM-FM
Radio on page 711.
Setting the Clock

Adjusting the Time
1. Press the CONFIG button and
select Time Settings.
2. Select Set Time.
3. Turn the MENU knob to adjust
the highlighted number.
4. Press the MENU knob to select
the next number.
1-16
In Brief
5. To save the time and return to

the Time Settings menu, press
the BACK button at any time or
press the MENU knob after
adjusting the minutes.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format
2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
the 12 hour or 24 hour display
format.
See Clock on page 55.
Satellite Radio
Vehicles with an XM Satellite
Radio tuner and a valid XM Satellite
Radio subscription can receive XM
programming.
XM Satellite Radio Service
Portable Audio Devices
XM is a satellite radio service based

in the 48 contiguous United States
and 10 Canadian provinces. XM
Satellite Radio has a wide variety of
programming and commercial-free
music, coast to coast, and in
digital-quality sound. A fee is
required to receive the XM service.
Some vehicles have a 3.5 mm

(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USB
port located in the center console.
External devices such as iPods,
laptop computers, MP3 players, CD
changers, and USB storage devices
may be connected, depending on
the audio system.
For more information refer to:
For more information, see Auxiliary

Devices on page 719.
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
For more information, see Satellite

Radio on page 713.
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth system allows users
with a Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
to make and receive hands-free
calls using the vehicle audio
system, microphone, and controls.
The Bluetooth-enabled cell phone
must be paired with the in-vehicle
Bluetooth system before it can be
used in the vehicle. Not all phones
will support all functions.
In Brief
See Bluetooth (Overview) on
page 722 or Bluetooth
(Infotainment Controls) on
page 724 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 728.
Steering Wheel Controls
$ / i : Press to silence the

vehicle speakers only. Press again
to turn the sound on. For vehicles
with OnStar or Bluetooth systems,
press to reject an incoming call,
or to end a current call.
1-17
Cruise Control
_ SRC ^ :
Turn _ or ^ to select a
radio band or audio source.
Turn _ or ^ to select the next or

previous favorite radio station, CD,
or MP3 track.
Press SRC to change between
radio and CD or DVD.
For vehicles with audio steering

wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
b / g : Press to interact with the

available Bluetooth, OnStar,
or navigation system.
+ x : Press + to increase
or to decrease the volume.
5 : Press to turn the cruise control

system on and off.
For more information, see Steering

Wheel Controls on page 52.
RES/+ : Move the thumbwheel up

to resume a previously set speed or
to accelerate.
SET/ : Move the thumbwheel
down to set a speed or to make the
vehicle decelerate.
1-18
In Brief
*:
Press to disengage cruise

control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
See Cruise Control on page 935.
Navigation System
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, there is a separate
navigation system manual that
includes information on the radio,
audio players, and navigation
system.
The navigation system provides
detailed maps of most major
freeways and roads. After a
destination has been set, the
system provides turn-by-turn
instructions for reaching the
destination. In addition, the system
can help locate a variety of points
of interest (POIs), such as banks,
airports, restaurants, and more.
See the navigation system manual
for more information.
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
The DIC display is located in the
center of the instrument panel
cluster. It shows the status of many
vehicle systems. The controls for
the DIC are located on the turn
signal lever.
C. MENU: Press to get to the

Trip/Fuel Menu and the Vehicle
Information Menu. This button is
also used to return to or exit the
last screen displayed on
the DIC.
For more information, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on
page 523.
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear
the menu item when it is
displayed.
B.
w x: Use the thumbwheel to

scroll through the items in
each menu.
There is one accessory power

outlet located on the center floor
console and one on the rear of the
center floor console. These outlets
are powered when the key is in
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,
or until the driver door is opened
within 10 minutes of turning off the
vehicle. See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 920.
See Power Outlets on page 55.
In Brief
Performance and
Maintenance
Traction Control
System (TCS)
The traction control system limits
wheel spin. The system is on when
the vehicle is started.
.
To turn off traction control, press

and release g located on the
console. i illuminates and
the appropriate DIC message
displays. See Vehicle Messages
(Canada Base Level) on
page 526 or Vehicle Messages
(Canada Uplevel and United
States) on page 527.
Press and release g again to
turn traction control back on.
For more information, see Traction

Control System (TCS) on
page 932.
1-19
StabiliTrak System
Tire Pressure Monitor
The StabiliTrak system assists with

directional control of the vehicle
in difficult driving conditions. The
system is on when the vehicle is
started.
This vehicle may have a Tire

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
To turn off both Traction Control

and StabiliTrak, press and hold
g until g and i illuminate and
the appropriate DIC message
displays. See Vehicle Messages
(Canada Base Level) on
page 526 or Vehicle Messages
(Canada Uplevel and United
States) on page 527.
Press g again to turn on both
systems.
For more information, see

StabiliTrak System on page 933.
The TPMS warning light alerts you

to a significant loss in pressure of
one of the vehicle's tires. If the
warning light comes on, stop as
soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 911. The warning
light will remain on until the tire
pressure is corrected.
1-20
In Brief
During cooler conditions, the low tire

pressure warning light may appear
when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off. This may be an early
indicator that the tire pressures are
getting low and the tires need to be
inflated to the proper pressure.
The TPMS does not replace normal
monthly tire maintenance. It is the
drivers responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressures.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System
on page 1048.
Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit
This vehicle may come with a jack
and spare tire or a tire sealant and
compressor kit. The kit can be used
to temporarily seal small punctures
in the tread area of the tire.
See Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit on page 1062 for complete
operating information.
If the vehicle came with a jack and

spare tire, see If a Tire Goes Flat on
page 1060.
Engine Oil Life System

The engine oil life system calculates
engine oil life based on vehicle
use and displays the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON DIC message
or Code 82 DIC message when it is
necessary to change the engine oil
and filter.
Remember, the Oil Life display
must be reset after each oil change.
It will not reset itself. Also, be
careful not to reset the Oil Life
display accidentally at any time
other than when the oil has just
been changed. It cannot be reset
accurately until the next oil change.
To reset the engine oil life system
press the SET button while the Oil
Life display is active.
Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Using the DIC MENU button
and thumbwheel, scroll until
you reach REMAINING OIL
LIFE on the DIC (oil can symbol
with % sign for Canada).
2. Press the SET button to
reset the oil life at 100%. When
prompted, use the thumbwheel
to highlight YES or NO. Press
the SET/CLEAR button to
confirm.
Be careful not to reset the oil life
other than after the oil is changed.
It cannot be reset accurately.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 1012.
In Brief
Driving for Better Fuel

Economy
Driving habits can affect fuel
mileage. Here are some driving
tips to get the best fuel economy
possible.
Combine several trips into a

single trip.
Replace the vehicle's tires with

the same TPC Spec number
molded into the tire's sidewall
near the size.
Follow recommended scheduled

maintenance.
Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.
Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.
Roadside Assistance
Program
Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.
U.S.: 1-800-243-8872
When road and weather

conditions are appropriate,
use cruise control.
Canada: 1-800-268-6800
Always follow posted speed

limits or drive more slowly
when conditions require.
Keep vehicle tires properly

inflated.
TTY Users: 1-888-889-2438

As the owner of a new Chevrolet,
you are automatically enrolled in the
Roadside Assistance program.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 136 for more information.
1-21
Roadside Assistance and OnStar

If you have an active OnStar
subscription, press the Q button
and the current GPS location will
be sent to an OnStar advisor who
will assess your problem, contact
Roadside Assistance, and relay
your exact location to get the help
you need.
Online Owner Center
The Online Owner Center is a
complimentary service that includes
online service reminders, vehicle
maintenance tips, online owner
manual, special privileges,
and more.
Sign up today at:
www.chevyownercenter.com
(U.S.) or www.gm.ca (Canada).
1-22
Black plate (22,1)
In Brief
OnStar
How OnStar Service Works
Q : Push this blue button to

connect to a specially trained
OnStar Advisor to verify your
account information and to
answer questions.
For vehicles with an active OnStar
subscription, OnStar uses several
innovative technologies and live
Advisors to provide a wide range
of safety, security, navigation,
diagnostics, and calling services.
Automatic Crash Response
In a crash, builtin sensors
automatically alert an OnStar
Advisor who is immediately
connected to the vehicle to
see if you need help.
] : Push this red emergency

button to get priority help from
specially trained OnStar Emergency
Advisors.
X : Push this button for handsfree,
voiceactivated calling and to give
voice commands for HandsFree
Calling and TurnbyTurn
Navigation.
Automatic Crash Response,

Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,
Stolen Vehicle Assistance, Vehicle
Diagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,
Roadside Assistance, TurnbyTurn
Navigation, and HandsFree Calling
are available on most vehicles. Not
all OnStar services are available on
all vehicles. For more information,
see the OnStar Owner's Guide;
visit www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada); contact
OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(18884667827) or TTY
18772482080; or push
the Q button to speak with an
OnStar Advisor 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
For a full description of OnStar
services and system limitations,
see the OnStar Owner's Guide in
the glove box.
In Brief
OnStar service is subject to the
OnStar Terms and Conditions
included in the OnStar Glove
Box Kit.
OnStar service requires wireless
communication networks and the
Global Positioning System (GPS)
satellite network. Not all OnStar
services are available everywhere
or on all vehicles at all times.
OnStar service cannot work unless
the vehicle is in a place where
OnStar has an agreement with a
wireless service provider for service
in that area, and the wireless
service provider has coverage,
network capacity, reception, and
technology compatible with OnStar's
service. Service involving location
information about the vehicle
cannot work unless GPS signals
are available, unobstructed, and
compatible with the OnStar
hardware. The vehicle must have
a working electrical system and
adequate battery power for the
OnStar equipment to operate.
OnStar service may not work if the

OnStar equipment is not properly
installed or you have not maintained
it even if the vehicle is in good
working order and in compliance
with all government regulations.
If you try to add, connect, or modify
any equipment or software in the
vehicle, OnStar service may not
work. Other problems beyond
OnStar's control may prevent
service to you, such as hills, tall
buildings, tunnels, weather,
electrical system design and
architecture of the vehicle, damage
to important parts of the vehicle in a
crash, or wireless phone network
congestion or jamming.
See Radio Frequency Statement on
page 1316 for information
regarding Part 15 of the Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
rules and Industry Canada
Standards RSS-210/220/310.
1-23
OnStar Steering Wheel

Controls
This vehicle may have Talk/Mute
buttons that can be used to interact
with OnStar Hands-Free calling.
See Steering Wheel Controls on
On some vehicles, the Talk/Mute
buttons can be used to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner's
Guide for more information.
Your Responsibility
Increase the volume of the radio
if the OnStar Advisor cannot be
heard.
If the light next to the OnStar
buttons is red, the system may
not be functioning properly.
Push Q and request a vehicle
diagnostic. If the light appears clear
(no light appears), your OnStar
subscription has expired and all
services have been deactivated.
Push Q to confirm that the OnStar
equipment is active.
1-24
Black plate (24,1)
In Brief
2 NOTES
Keys, Doors and Windows
Keys, Doors and

Windows
Doors
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Vehicle Security
Keys and Locks

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . .
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . .
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . .
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-6
2-7
2-7
2-7
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Vehicle Alarm System . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-10
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
2-1
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-13
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Windows
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
2-2
Keys and Locks

Keys
{ WARNING
Leaving children in a vehicle with
the ignition key is dangerous for
many reasons. Children or others
could be badly injured or even
killed. They could operate the
power windows or other controls
or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the
keys in the ignition and children
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in
a vehicle with children.
The key that is part of the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
can be used for the ignition and
all locks.
Press the key release button on the

RKE transmitter to extend the key
blade. Press the button and the key
blade to retract the key.
See your dealer if a new key is
needed.
Notice: If the keys get locked in
the vehicle, it may have to be
damaged to get them out. Always
carry a spare key.
If you are locked out of the vehicle,
see Roadside Assistance Program
on page 136.

(RKE) System
Check the transmitter's battery.

See Battery Replacement later
in this section.

If the transmitter is still not

working correctly, see your
dealer or a qualified technician
for service.
If there is a decrease in the RKE

operating range:
.
Check the distance. The

transmitter may be too far
from the vehicle.
Check the location. Other
vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
2-3

(RKE) System Operation
The RKE transmitter will work up to
20 m (65 ft) away from the vehicle.
Other conditions can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See
System on page 23.
RKE Transmitter with Remote

Start Shown
The following may be available:
Q (Lock):
Press to lock all doors.
The turn signal indicators may

flash and/or the horn may sound
to indicate locking. See Locking
Feedback under Vehicle
2-4
If the driver door is open when Q is

pressed and Unlocked Door Anti
Lock Out is enabled through vehicle
personalization, all doors will lock
and then the driver door will unlock.
See Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
under Vehicle Personalization on
page 533.
Pressing Q may also arm the
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Alarm System on page 210.
K (Unlock): Press to unlock the

driver door or all doors. See Door
Unlock Options under Vehicle
The turn signal indicators may
flash and/or the horn may sound
to indicate unlocking. See Unlock
Feedback under Vehicle
Pressing K will disarm the
theft-deterrent system. See Vehicle
Alarm System on page 210.
V (Remote Trunk Release):

Press and hold briefly to open the
trunk.
7 (Vehicle Locator/Panic
Alarm): Press and hold briefly to
locate the vehicle. The exterior
lamps flash and the horn chirps.
Press and hold 7 for at least
two seconds to sound the panic
alarm. The horn sounds and the
turn signals flash for 30 seconds,
or until 7 is pressed again or the
key is placed in the ignition and
turned to ON/RUN.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
For
vehicles with this feature,

press Q and then press and
hold / to start the engine from
outside the vehicle using the RKE
transmitter. See Remote Vehicle
Start on page 25 for additional
information.
Programming Transmitters to
the Vehicle
Only RKE transmitters programmed
to this vehicle will work. If a
transmitter is lost or stolen, a
replacement can be purchased and
programmed through your dealer.
When the replacement transmitter is
programmed to this vehicle, all
remaining transmitters must also be
reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen
transmitters will no longer work
once the new transmitter is
programmed.
Battery Replacement
The battery is not rechargeable.
To replace the battery:
1. Extend the key blade and open
the battery cover on the back of
the transmitter by prying with a
finger.
2. Remove the used battery by
pushing on the battery and
sliding it toward the key blade.

3. Insert the new battery, positive
side facing up. Push the battery
down until it is held in place.
Replace with a CR2032 or
equivalent battery.
4. Snap the battery cover back on
to the transmitter.
Remote Vehicle Start

The vehicle may have this feature
that allows you to start the engine
from outside the vehicle.
/ (Remote Vehicle Start):
This
button will be on the RKE

transmitter if the vehicle has
remote start.
Vehicles with an automatic climate
control system will default to a
heating or cooling mode depending
on the outside temperature during a
remote start. A vehicle without
automatic climate control will default
to the last used heating or cooling

mode. Once the key is turned to
ON/RUN, the climate control system
will turn on at the setting the vehicle
was last set to. If the vehicle has
heated seats, they may come on
during a remote start. See Heated
Front Seats on page 37 for more
information.
Laws in some local communities
may restrict the use of remote
starters. For example, some laws
require a person using remote start
to have the vehicle in view. Check
local regulations for any
requirements.
There are other conditions which
can affect the performance of the
transmitter. See Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) System on page 23 for
additional information.
2-5

To start the engine using the remote
start feature:
1. Aim the Remote Keyless Entry
transmitter at the vehicle.
2. Press
Q.
3. Immediately after completing

Step 2, press and hold / until
the turn signal lamps flash, or for
about 2 seconds if the vehicle is
not in view.
When the engine starts, the
parking lamps will turn on and
remain on as long as the engine
is running. The doors will be
locked and the climate control
system may come on.
The engine will continue to run
for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps
for a 10-minute time extension.
Remote start can be extended
only once.
Insert the key and turn it to ON/RUN
before driving.
2-6
Black plate (6,1)
Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeat
Steps 1 through 3 while the engine
is still running. The remote start can
be extended once.
After this, the vehicle's ignition

switch must be turned to ON/RUN
and then back to LOCK/OFF using
the key, before the remote start
procedure can be used again.
When the remote start is extended,

the second 10 minutes will start
immediately.
Canceling a Remote Start
For example, if the engine has

been running for five minutes, and
10 minutes are added, the engine
will run for a total of 15 minutes.
A maximum of two remote starts,

or a single start with an extension,
are allowed between ignition cycles.
To cancel a remote start, do one of

the following:
Aim the RKE transmitter at

the vehicle and press and
hold / until the parking lamps
turn off.
flashers.
Turn the vehicle on and then off.
Conditions in Which Remote Start

Will Not Work
The remote vehicle start feature will
not operate if:
.
The key is in the ignition.
The hood is not closed.
The hazard warning flashers

are on.
The malfunction indicator lamp

is on.
The engine coolant temperature

is too high.
The oil pressure is low.
Two remote vehicle starts, or

a single remote start with an
extension, have already
been used.
The vehicle is not in P (Park).
Black plate (7,1)
Door Locks
{ WARNING
Unlocked doors can be
dangerous.
.
Passengers, especially
children, can easily open the
doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. The chance of being
thrown out of the vehicle in
a crash is increased if the
doors are not locked. So,
all passengers should wear
safety belts properly and
the doors should be locked
whenever the vehicle is
driven.
Young children who get into
unlocked vehicles may be
unable to get out. A child can
be overcome by extreme heat
and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from
heat stroke. Always lock the
vehicle whenever leaving it.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.
2-7
Power Door Locks
Outsiders can easily enter

through an unlocked door
when slowing or stopping the
vehicle. Lock the doors to
help prevent this from
happening.
To lock or unlock a door from

outside the vehicle, use the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
From inside the vehicle, use the
power door lock switch.
The doors can also be unlocked
from the inside by pulling the door
handle. Pulling the door handle
again unlatches the door.
The power door lock switch is on

the instrument panel.
Q (Lock): Press to lock the doors.

K (Unlock): Press to unlock the
doors.
2-8
Automatic Door Locks
Doors
Automatic Door Lock
Trunk
The doors are programmed to

automatically lock when the shift
lever is moved out of P (Park).
{ WARNING
The automatic door lock feature

cannot be disabled.
Automatic Door Unlock

The doors will automatically unlock
when the shift lever is moved into
P (Park).
See Vehicle Personalization on
page 533.
Safety Locks
The rear door safety locks prevent
passengers from opening the rear
doors from inside the vehicle.
Press o { to activate the safety

locks on the rear doors. The LED
The rear door power windows are
also disabled.
lockout switch.
Exhaust gases can enter the

vehicle if it is driven with the
liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with
any objects that pass through the
seal between the body and the
trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine
exhaust contains Carbon
Monoxide (CO) which cannot
be seen or smelled. It can cause
unconsciousness and even death.
If the vehicle must be driven with
the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:
.
Close all of the windows.
Fully open the air outlets on

or under the instrument
panel.
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
.
Adjust the Climate Control

system to a setting that
brings in only outside air
and set the fan speed to the
highest setting. See Climate
Control System in the Index.
If the vehicle has a power

liftgate, disable the power
liftgate function.
For more information about

carbon monoxide, see Engine
Exhaust on page 923.
Remote Trunk Release
To open the trunk from outside the

vehicle, press the V button on the
transmitter, or by pressing the
touchpad above the license plate
when the doors are unlocked.
Emergency Trunk Release

Handle
Notice: Do not use the
emergency trunk release handle
as a tie-down or anchor point
2-9
when securing items in the trunk

as it could damage the handle.
The emergency trunk release
handle is only intended to aid a
person trapped in a latched trunk,
enabling them to open the trunk
from the inside.
There is an emergency trunk

release handle located inside the
trunk on the trunk lid. The release
handle can be accessed by folding
the rear seatback. See Rear Seats
on page 38. Pull the release handle
to open the trunk from the inside.
2-10
Immobilizer Operation
Vehicle Security
Disarming the System
This vehicle has theft-deterrent

features; however, they do not
make it impossible to steal.
To disarm the system press

the RKE transmitter.
Vehicle Alarm System
If there is an attempt to open the

doors, trunk, or hood without first
pressing K on the transmitter, the
system alarm will be activated.
The exterior lamps will flash and
the horn will sound for about
30 seconds.
This vehicle has a theft alarm

system.
Arming the System

To arm the system, use the power
door lock switch or the RKE
transmitter to lock the vehicle while
exiting with the vehicle turned off.
The alarm arms after about
30 seconds after all the doors have
been closed.
Press Q again and the system arms
immediately.
The security light, located in the
center of the instrument panel, will
flash slowly.
K on
Turning off the System Alarm
To turn off the system alarm

press K on the RKE transmitter.
Immobilizer
This vehicle has a passive

theft-deterrent system.
The system does not have to be
manually armed or disarmed.
The vehicle is automatically
immobilized when the key is
removed from the ignition.
The system is automatically
disarmed when the vehicle is
started with the correct key. The
key uses a transponder that
matches an immobilizer control unit
in the vehicle and automatically
disarms the system. Only an
authorized key starts the vehicle.
The vehicle may not start if the key
is damaged.
Black plate (11,1)
The security light, located in the

instrument panel cluster, comes on
if there is a problem with arming or
disarming the theft-deterrent
system.
When trying to start the vehicle, the
security light comes on briefly when
the ignition is turned on.
If the engine does not start and the
security light stays on, there is a
problem with the system. Turn the
ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and

the key appears to be undamaged
or the light continues to stay on, try
another ignition key. If the engine
does not start with the other key, the
vehicle needs service. If the vehicle
does start, the first key may be
damaged. See your dealer who can
service the theft-deterrent system
and have a new key made.
Do not leave the key or device
that disarms or deactivates the
theft-deterrent system in the vehicle.
2-11
Exterior Mirrors
Convex Mirrors
{ WARNING
A convex mirror can make things,
like other vehicles, look farther
away than they really are. If you
cut too sharply into the right lane,
you could hit a vehicle on the
right. Check the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder before
changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex
shaped. A convex mirror's surface is
curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat.
2-12
Black plate (12,1)
Manual Mirrors
Power Mirrors
To adjust the mirror:

1. Turn the selector switch
to L (left) or R (right) to choose
the driver or passenger mirror.
2. Move the control to adjust the
mirror.
the O position to deselect the
mirror.
Vehicles with a manual mirror

adjustment have controls next to
each mirror.
Adjust the inside rearview mirror by
moving it up and down or side to
side. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare
from the headlamps behind you.
Push the tab forward for daytime
use and pull it for nighttime use.
Controls for the outside power

mirrors are located on the
driver door.
Folding Mirrors
Manual Foldaway Mirrors
The vehicle has manual folding
mirrors. These mirrors can be folded
inward to prevent damage when
going through an automatic car
wash. To fold, pull the mirror toward
the vehicle. Push the mirror outward
to return it to the original position.
Heated Mirrors
The vehicle may have heated
mirrors.
= (Rear Window Defogger):

Press to heat the outside rearview
mirrors. See Rear Window
Defogger under Automatic Climate
Control System on page 83 for
more information.
Interior Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror
Hold the mirror in the center to
move it for a clearer view of behind
your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to
avoid glare from the headlamps
behind you. Push the tab at the
bottom of the mirror forward for
daytime use and pull it for
nighttime use.
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
The vehicle may have an automatic
dimming inside rearview mirror.
Automatic dimming reduces the
glare from the headlamps of the
vehicle behind you. The dimming
feature and the indicator light come
on each time the vehicle is started.
2-13
Vehicles with OnStar have three

control buttons located at the
bottom of the mirror. See your
dealer for more information about
OnStar and how to subscribe to it.
See the OnStar Owner's Guide for
more information about the services
OnStar provides.
Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directly
on the mirror. Use a soft towel
dampened with water.
2-14
Black plate (14,1)
Power Windows
Windows
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Leaving children, helpless adults,

or pets in a vehicle with the
windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by
the extreme heat and suffer
permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a
child, a helpless adult, or a pet
alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or
hot weather.
Leaving children in a vehicle with

the keys is dangerous for many
reasons. Children or others could
be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power
windows or other controls or even
make the vehicle move. The
windows will function and they
could be seriously injured or killed
if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave keys in a
vehicle with children.
The vehicle aerodynamics are

designed to improve fuel economy
performance. This may result in a
pulsing sound when either rear
window is down and the front
windows are up. To reduce the
sound, open either a front window
or the sunroof (if equipped).
When there are children in the

rear seat use the window lockout
button to prevent unintentional
operation of the windows.

Express Window Operation
Your vehicle may have windows
with an express-up or down feature.
This feature allows the window to be
lowered or raised without holding
the switch. Passenger side and rear
windows only have express-down.
Pull a window switch up or push it
down all the way, release it, and
the window goes down or up
automatically. Stop the window by
pushing or pulling the switch.
On vehicles with power windows,
the switches are on the doors.
Push the switch down to open the
window. Pull the front of the switch
up to close it.
The switches work when the ignition
is in ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY,
or in Retained Accessory Power
(RAP). See Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) on page 920.
Obstacle Detection Feature

If equipped with express-up, and an
object is in the path of the window
when closing, the window will stop
at the obstruction and auto-reverse
to a preset factory position. Weather
conditions such as severe cold and/
or ice may also cause the window
to auto-reverse. The window will
return to normal operation once the
obstruction or condition is removed.
2-15
If conditions prevent the window

from closing and the window
continues to auto-reverse, it is
possible to close the window with
the ignition in ON/RUN by holding
the window switch in the partially or
fully pulled up position. Release of
the switch from the partially pulled
up position will cause the window to
stop. Release of the switch from the
fully pulled up position will activate
the express-up and related obstacle
detection features.
Programming the Power

Windows
If the battery on the vehicle has
been recharged or disconnected,
or is not working, you will need to
reprogram each front power window
for the express-up feature to work.
Before reprogramming, replace or
recharge the vehicle's battery.
2-16
Black plate (16,1)
To program each front window,

follow these steps:
Window Lockout
1. With the ignition in ACC/

ACCESSORY or ON/RUN,
or when Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) is active, close
all doors.
The rear door locks are also

disabled.
lockout switch.
2. Press and hold the power

window switch until the window
is fully open.

3. Pull the power window switch up

until the window is fully closed.
4. Continue holding the switch up
for approximately two seconds
after the window is completely
closed.
The window is now reprogrammed.
Repeat the process for the other
windows.
Press o { to activate the rear

window lockout switch. The LED
Overload Feature
The rear window lockout switch is
on the driver door. This feature
prevents the rear passenger
windows from operating, except
from the driver position.
If the windows are operated

repeatedly in short intervals, the
window operation is disabled for a
short time.
Sun Visors
Roof
Sunroof
2-17
To open or close the sunroof, press

the open or close sunroof switch (A)
to the first detent position.
To express open or close the
sunroof with the safety function
enabled, press the open or close
sunroof switch (A) to the second
detent position and release. To stop
the movement, press the switch
again.
To automatically tilt or close the
sunroof, press the tilt open or
close sunroof switch (B).
Pull the sun visor down to block

glare. Detach the sun visor from the
center mount to pivot to the side
window, or to extend along the rod,
if available.
On vehicles with a sunroof, the

switches are on the overhead
console.
The sunroof only operates when
the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY or in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
If an object is in the path of the

sunroof while it is closing, the
anti-pinch feature will detect the
object and stop the sunroof.
The sunroof glass panel cannot be
opened or closed if the vehicle has
an electrical failure.
2-18
Black plate (18,1)
Dirt and debris may collect on the

sunroof seal or in the track. This
could cause an issue with sunroof
operation, noise, or plugging within
the water drainage system.
Periodically open the sunroof and
remove any obstacles or loose
debris. Wipe the sunroof seal and
roof sealing area using a clean
cloth, mild soap, and water. Do not
remove grease from the sunroof.
Sunshade
To initialize the sunroof:
The sunshade is manually operated.

Close or open the sunshade by
sliding. When the sunroof is
opened, the sunshade is
always open.
1. Press the close sunroof switch

to the first detent position. Hold
the switch in this position for
10 seconds after the sunroof has
fully closed.
Safety Function
2. Press the open sunroof switch to

the first detent position. Release
the switch when the sunroof is
fully opened.
If the sunroof has any resistance

during automatic closing, it will
immediately stop and reverse.
To override the safety function,
press and hold the close sunroof
switch. The sunroof closes without
the safety function. To stop the
movement, release the switch.
Initializing the Sunroof
If the sunroof cannot be fully closed,
or the express open or close feature
does not function, the sunroof may
need to be initialized. This can
happen if the battery has been
disconnected or the sunroof has
been serviced.
3. Press the open sunroof switch to

the first detent position and hold
for 10 seconds. The sunroof will
automatically close. The switch
can be released when the
sunroof stops.
Seats and Restraints
Seats and
Restraints
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-24

Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Replacing Safety Belt System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Airbag System
Head Restraints
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . .
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . .
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-7
Rear Seats
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Safety Belts
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Use During
Pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . .
3-10
3-13
3-19
3-24
3-24
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-28
When Should an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Adding Equipment to the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-38
Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-39
Replacing Airbag System
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-39
3-1
Child Restraints
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraint Systems . . . . .
Where to Put the Restraint . . .
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing LATCH System
Parts After a Crash . . . . . . . . .
Securing Child Restraints
(Rear Seat) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
(Front Passenger Seat) . . . .
3-40
3-42
3-44
3-46
3-47
3-54
3-55
3-57
3-2
Black plate (2,1)
Head Restraints
The vehicle's front and rear seats
have adjustable head restraints in
the outboard seating positions.
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the

top of the restraint is at the same
height as the top of the occupant's
head. This position reduces the
chance of a neck injury in a crash.
The height of the head restraint can

be adjusted. Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. Try to move the head
restraint to make sure that it is
locked in place.
To lower the head restraint, press
the button, located on the top of
the seatback, and push the head
restraint down. Try to move the
head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is
locked in place.

The vehicle's rear seat may be
equipped with an adjustable
headrest in the center seating
position that can be adjusted the
same way as the head restraints.
The front seat outboard head
restraints and the center seat
rear headrest, if equipped, are
not designed to be removed.
If you are installing a child restraint
in the rear seat, see Securing a
Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 347.
3-3
Front Seats
Seat Adjustment
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front of
the seat.
2. Slide the seat to the desired
position and release the handle.
3. Try to move the seat back and
forth to be sure it is locked in
place.
3-4
Black plate (4,1)
Seat Height Adjuster
Seat Cushion Tilt Feature
Power Seat Adjustment

down to manually raise or lower
the seat.

down to raise or lower the front of
the seat cushion.
To adjust the power driver seat,

if equipped:
.
Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the control
forward or rearward.
Raise or lower the front part of

the seat cushion by moving the
front of the control up or down.
Raise or lower the entire seat by

moving the rear of the control up
or down.

To adjust the seatback, see
Reclining Seatbacks on page 35 for
more information.
Reclining Seatbacks
{ WARNING
You can lose control of the
vehicle if you try to adjust a
manual driver seat while the
vehicle is moving. The sudden
movement could startle and
confuse you, or make you push a
pedal when you do not want to.
Adjust the driver seat only when
the vehicle is not moving.
3-5
{ WARNING
If either seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the
seatbacks to be sure they are
locked.
To recline the seatback:

1. Lift the lever.
If necessary, move the safety
belt out of the way to access the
lever.
2. Move the seatback to the
desired position, then release
the lever to lock the seatback in
place.
3-6
Black plate (6,1)
To return the seatback to an upright

position:
1. Lift the lever fully without
applying pressure to the
seatback, and the seatback
returns to the upright position.
{ WARNING
Sitting in a reclined position when
the vehicle is in motion can be
dangerous. Even when buckled
up, the safety belts cannot do
their job when reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its
job because it will not be against
your body. Instead, it will be in
front of you. In a crash, you could
go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
The lap belt cannot do its job
either. In a crash, the belt could
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at
your pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the
vehicle is in motion, have the
seatback upright. Then sit well
back in the seat and wear the
safety belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if

the vehicle is moving.
Heated Front Seats
The passenger seat may take

longer to heat up.
{ WARNING
If you cannot feel temperature
change or pain to the skin, the
seat heater may cause burns
even at low temperatures. To
reduce the risk of burns, people
with such a condition should use
care when using the seat heater,
especially for long periods of
time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket, cushion,
cover, or similar item. This
may cause the seat heater to
overheat. An overheated seat
heater may cause a burn or may
damage the seat.
3-7
Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the
heated seats can be turned on
automatically during a remote
vehicle start. The heated seats will
be canceled when the ignition is
turned on. Press the control to use
the heated seats after the vehicle is
started.
On vehicles with heated front
seats, the controls are on the
center console. The engine must
be running to operate the heated
seats.
Press L or M to heat the driver
or passenger seat cushion and
seatback.
Press the control once for the
highest setting. With each press
of the control, the heated seat will
change to the next lower setting,
and then the off setting. Three lights
indicate the highest setting and one
light the lowest.
The heated seat indicator lights on

the control do not turn on during a
remote start.
The temperature performance of an
unoccupied seat may be reduced.
This is normal.
The heated seats will not turn on
during a remote start unless the
heated seat feature is enabled in
the vehicle personalization menu.
See Remote Vehicle Start on
page 25 and Remote Start
Auto Heat Seats under Vehicle
Personalization on page 533 for
more information.
3-8
Black plate (8,1)
Rear Seats
Either side of the rear seatback can
be folded.
To fold the rear seatbacks:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with
the safety belts still fastened may
cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the
safety belts and return them to
their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1. Unbuckle the rear safety belts
and place the front seatback in
the upright position.
2. Make sure the safety belt is in

the guide on top of the seatback.
3. Reach under the safety belt and
pull the lever to unlock the
seatback.
A tab near the seatback lever

raises when the seatback is
unlocked.
4. Fold the seatback forward.
Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the
other seatback, if desired.
Black plate (9,1)

To raise the seatback:
{ WARNING
A safety belt that is improperly
routed, not properly attached,
or twisted will not provide the
protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be
seriously injured. After raising the
rear seatback, always check to
be sure that the safety belts are
properly routed and attached,
and are not twisted.
1. Make sure the safety belt is in
the guide on the top of the
seatback.
2. Lift the seatback up and push it

rearward until it clicks into place.
Keep the safety belts clear of the
seatback and untwisted.
A tab near the seatback lever
retracts when the seatback is
locked in place.
The center rear safety belt
may lock when you raise the
seatback. If this happens, let
the belt go back all the way and
start again.
3-9
{ WARNING
If the seatback is not locked, it
could move forward in a sudden
stop or crash. That could cause
injury to the person sitting there.
Always pull forward on the top of
the seatback at the area of the
latch to be sure it is locked.
make sure it is locked into
position.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the
other seatback, if necessary.
Keep the seat in the upright locked
position when not in use.
3-10
Safety Belts
This section of the manual
describes how to use safety belts
properly. It also describes some
things not to do with safety belts.
{ WARNING
Do not let anyone ride where a
safety belt cannot be worn
properly. In a crash, if you or your
passenger(s) are not wearing
safety belts, the injuries can be
much worse. You can hit things
inside the vehicle harder or be
ejected from the vehicle. You
and your passenger(s) can be
seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be,
if you are buckled up. Always
fasten your safety belt, and check
that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
{ WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area, inside or outside
of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or
killed. Do not allow people to ride
in any area of your vehicle that is
not equipped with seats and
safety belts. Be sure everyone in
the vehicle is in a seat and using
a safety belt properly.
This vehicle has indicators as a
reminder to buckle the safety belts.
See Safety Belt Reminders on
page 510 for additional information.
In most states and in all Canadian

provinces, the law requires wearing
safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in
a crash. If you do have a crash,
you do not know if it will be a
serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some
crashes can be so serious that even
buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in
between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and
sometimes walk away. Without
safety belts they could have been
badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety
belts in vehicles, the facts are clear.
In most crashes buckling up does
matter ... a lot!
Black plate (11,1)
3-11
Why Safety Belts Work

When you ride in or on anything,
you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose

it is just a seat on wheels.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the

vehicle. The rider does not stop.
3-12
Black plate (12,1)
The person keeps going until

stopped by something. In a real
vehicle, it could be the windshield...
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down
as the vehicle does. You get more
time to stop. You stop over more
distance, and your strongest bones
take the forces. That is why safety
belts make such good sense.

Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle
after a crash if I am wearing a
safety belt?
A: You could be whether you are
wearing a safety belt or not. But
your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so
you can unbuckle and get out, is
much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety
belt, even if you are
upside down.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why
should I have to wear safety
belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental
systems only; so they work with
safety belts not instead of
them. Whether or not an airbag
is provided, all occupants still
have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That is true
not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other
collisions.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I

never drive far from home,
why should I wear safety
belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver,
but if you are in a crash even
one that is not your fault you
and your passenger(s) can be
hurt. Being a good driver does
not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as
bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within
40 km (25 mi) of home. And the
greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at
speeds of less than
65 km/h (40 mph).
Safety belts are for everyone.
3-13

Properly
This section is only for people of
adult size.
Be aware that there are special
things to know about safety belts
and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and
infants. If a child will be riding in
the vehicle, see Older Children on
page 340 or Infants and Young
Children on page 342. Follow those
rules for everyone's protection.
It is very important for all occupants
to buckle up. Statistics show that
unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are
wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up
can be thrown out of the vehicle in a
crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety
belts.
3-14
Black plate (14,1)
First, before you or your

passenger(s) wear a safety belt,
there is important information you
should know.
low and snug on the hips, just

touching the thighs. In a crash, this
applies force to the strong pelvic
bones and you would be less likely
to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force
on your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining forces.
Q: What is wrong with this?
The shoulder belt locks if there is a

sudden stop or crash.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose.
It will not give as much
protection this way.
Sit up straight and always keep your
feet on the floor in front of you. The
lap part of the belt should be worn
Black plate (15,1)
{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the

shoulder belt is too loose. In a
crash, you would move forward
too much, which could increase
injury. The shoulder belt should fit
snugly against your body.
3-15
{ WARNING
You can be seriously hurt if the
lap belt is too loose. In a crash,
you could slide under the lap
belt and apply force on your
abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The
lap belt should be worn low and
snug on the hips, just touching
the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will

not give nearly as much
protection this way.
3-16
Black plate (16,1)
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the

belt is buckled in the wrong place
like this. In a crash, the belt would
go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not
on the pelvic bones. This could
cause serious internal injuries.
Always buckle the belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong

buckle.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
Black plate (17,1)
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if the

belt goes over an armrest like
this. The belt would be much too
high. In a crash, you can slide
under the belt. The belt force
would then be applied on the
abdomen, not on the pelvic
bones, and that could cause
serious or fatal injuries. Be sure
the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under
the arm. It should be worn over
the shoulder at all times.
3-17
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured if
you wear the shoulder belt under
your arm. In a crash, your body
would move too far forward,
which would increase the chance
of head and neck injury. Also, the
belt would apply too much force
to the ribs, which are not as
strong as shoulder bones. You
could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the
chest.
3-18
Black plate (18,1)
A: The belt is behind the body.
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by
not wearing the lap-shoulder belt
properly. In a crash, you would
not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too
far forward increasing the chance
of head and neck injury. You
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The belt is twisted across

the body.
Black plate (19,1)
{ WARNING
You can be seriously injured by a
twisted belt. In a crash, you would
not have the full width of the belt
to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it
can work properly, or ask your
dealer to fix it.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in the vehicle
have a lap-shoulder belt.
The following instructions explain
how to wear a lap-shoulder belt
properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is
adjustable, so you can sit up
straight. To see how, see Seats
in the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull

the belt across you. Do not let it
get twisted.
3-19
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if

you pull the belt across you very
quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it.
Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.
If the shoulder portion of a
passenger belt is pulled out
all the way, the child restraint
locking feature may be engaged.
If this happens, let the belt go
back all the way and start again.
3. Push the latch plate into the

buckle until it clicks.
3-20
Pull up on the latch plate to

make sure it is secure. If the belt
is not long enough, see Safety
Belt Extender on page 324.
Position the release button on
the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
If equipped with a shoulder belt
height adjuster, move it to the
height that is right for you. See
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
later in this section for
instructions on use and
important safety information.
4. To make the lap part tight, pull

up on the shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, push the button

on the buckle. The belt should
return to its stowed position.
Before a door is closed, be sure the
safety belt is out of the way. If a
door is slammed against a safety
belt, damage can occur to both the
safety belt and the vehicle.
3-21
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
The vehicle has a shoulder belt

height adjuster for the driver and
right front passenger seating
positions.
This vehicle has safety belt

pretensioners for front outboard
occupants. Although the safety belt
pretensioners cannot be seen, they
are part of the safety belt assembly.
They can help tighten the safety
belts during the early stages of a
moderate to severe frontal and
near frontal crash if the threshold
conditions for pretensioner
activation are met.
Adjust the guide so the shoulder

portion of the belt is on the shoulder
and not falling off of it. The belt
should be close to, but not
contacting, the neck. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment
could reduce the effectiveness of
the safety belt in a crash. See How
to Wear Safety Belts Properly on
page 313.
Press the release button (A) and

move the height adjuster to the
desired position. The adjuster can
be moved up by pushing the slide/
trim up. After the adjuster is set to
the desired position, try to move it
down without pushing the release
button to make sure it has locked
into position.
Pretensioners work only once. If the

pretensioners activate in a crash,
they will need to be replaced, and
probably other new parts for the
vehicle's safety belt system. See
Replacing Safety Belt System Parts
after a Crash on page 325.
3-22
Black plate (22,1)
Rear Safety Belt Comfort

Guides
This vehicle may have rear shoulder
belt comfort guides. If not, they are
available through the dealer. The
guides may provide added safety
belt comfort for older children who
have outgrown booster seats and
for some adults. When installed and
properly adjusted, the comfort guide
positions the belt away from the
neck and head.
There is one guide, if equipped, for

each outboard passenger position in
the rear seat. To install a comfort
guide to the safety belt:
2. Place the guide over the belt,

and insert the two edges of the
belt into the slots of the guide.
1. Remove the guide from its
storage pocket on the side of
the seat.
Black plate (23,1)
3-23
{ WARNING
3. Be sure that the belt is not

twisted and it lies flat. The
elastic cord must be under the
belt and the guide on top.
A safety belt that is not properly

worn may not provide the
protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt
could be seriously injured. The
shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest.
These parts of the body are best
able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release

the safety belt as described
previously in this section. Make
sure the shoulder portion of the
belt is on the shoulder and not
falling off of it. The belt should
be close to, but not contacting,
the neck.
5. To remove and store the comfort
guide, squeeze the belt edges
together so that the safety belt
can be removed from the guide.
Store the guide in its storage
pocket on the seatback.
3-24
Safety Belt Use During

Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone,
including pregnant women. Like all
occupants, they are more likely to
be seriously injured if they do not
wear safety belts.
The best way to protect the fetus is

to protect the mother. When a safety
belt is worn properly, it is more likely
that the fetus will not be hurt in a
crash. For pregnant women, as for
anyone, the key to making safety
belts effective is wearing them
properly.
Safety Belt Extender

If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten
around you, you should use it.
A pregnant woman should wear

a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap
portion should be worn as low as
possible, below the rounding,
throughout the pregnancy.
But if a safety belt is not long

enough, your dealer will order you
an extender. When you go in to
order it, take the heaviest coat you
will wear, so the extender will be
long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone
else use it, and use it only for the
seat it is made to fit. The extender
has been designed for adults. Never
use it for securing child seats. To
wear it, attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the
instruction sheet that comes with
the extender.
Safety System Check

Now and then, check that the safety
belt reminder light, safety belts,
buckles, latch plates, retractors,
and anchorages are working
properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts
that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job. See your dealer
to have it repaired. Torn or frayed
safety belts may not protect you
in a crash. They can rip apart under
impact forces. If a belt is torn or
frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder
light is working. See Safety Belt
Reminders on page 510 for more
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry.
See Safety Belt Care on page 325.
Safety Belt Care

Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Replacing Safety Belt

System Parts after a
Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the safety
belt system in the vehicle.
A damaged safety belt system
may not properly protect the
person using it, resulting in
serious injury or even death in a
crash. To help make sure the
safety belt systems are working
properly after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
3-25
After a minor crash, replacement of

safety belts may not be necessary.
But the safety belt assemblies that
were used during any crash may
have been stressed or damaged.
See your dealer to have the safety
belt assemblies inspected or
replaced.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the safety belt
system was not being used at the
time of the crash.
Have the safety belt pretensioners
checked if the vehicle has been in a
crash, or if the airbag readiness light
stays on after you start the vehicle
or while you are driving. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 511.
3-26
Airbag System
The vehicle has the following
airbags:
.
A frontal airbag for the driver.
A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.
A knee airbag for the driver.
A knee airbag for the right front

passenger.
A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver and the
passenger seated directly
behind the driver.

airbag for the right front
passenger and the passenger
seated directly behind the right
front passenger.
A roof-rail airbag for the driver
and the passenger seated
directly behind the driver.
A roof-rail airbag for the right

front passenger and the
passenger seated directly
behind the right front passenger.
All of the airbags in the vehicle will

have the word AIRBAG embossed
in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the middle
part of the steering wheel for the
driver and on the instrument panel
for the right front passenger.
With knee airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the lower
portion of the instrument panel.
With seat-mounted side impact
airbags, the word AIRBAG will
appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
With roof-rail airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear along the
headliner or trim.
Airbags are designed to supplement
the protection provided by safety
belts. Even though today's airbags
are also designed to help reduce

the risk of injury from the force of an
inflating bag, all airbags must inflate
very quickly to do their job.
Here are the most important things
to know about the airbag system:
{ WARNING
You can be severely injured or
killed in a crash if you are not
wearing your safety belt, even
with airbags. Airbags are
designed to work with safety
belts, not replace them. Also,
airbags are not designed to inflate
in every crash. In some crashes
safety belts are the only restraint.
See When Should an Airbag
Inflate? on page 329.
Wearing a safety belt during a
crash helps reduce your chance
of hitting things inside the vehicle
or being ejected from it. Airbags
are supplemental restraints to
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
the safety belts. Everyone in the
vehicle should wear a safety belt
properly, whether or not there is
an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING
Because airbags inflate with
great force and faster than the
blink of an eye, anyone who is
up against, or very close to any
airbag when it inflates can be
seriously injured or killed. Do not
sit unnecessarily close to any
airbag, as you would be if sitting
on the edge of the seat or leaning
forward. Safety belts help keep
you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear a safety
belt, even with airbags. The driver
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of
the vehicle.
Occupants should not lean on or
sleep against the door or side
windows in seating positions with
seat-mounted side impact airbags
and/or roof-rail airbags.
3-27
WARNING (Continued)
children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always
secure children properly in the
vehicle. To read how, see Older
Children on page 340 or Infants
and Young Children on
page 342.
{ WARNING
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus
lap-shoulder belts offer protection
for adults and older children, but
not for young children and infants.
Neither the vehicle's safety belt
system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young
(Continued)
There is an airbag readiness light

on the instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag electrical
system for malfunctions. The light
tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 511 for more
information.
3-28
Black plate (28,1)
Where Are the Airbags?
The driver frontal airbag is in the

middle of the steering wheel.
The right front passenger frontal
airbag is in the instrument panel
on the passenger side.
The driver knee airbag is below

the steering column. The front
passenger knee airbag is below the
glove box.
Driver Side Shown, Passenger

Side Similar
The seat-mounted side impact
airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver,
right front passenger, and second
row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
Black plate (29,1)
{ WARNING
Rear Seat Driver Side Shown,

Passenger Side Similar
The second row seatmounted side
impact airbags are in the sides of
the rear seatback closest to
the door.
If something is between an
occupant and an airbag, the
airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into
that person causing severe injury
or even death. The path of an
inflating airbag must be kept
clear. Do not put anything
between an occupant and an
airbag, and do not attach or put
anything on the steering wheel
hub or on or near any other
airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories
that block the inflation path of a
seat-mounted side impact airbag.
Never secure anything to the roof
of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags
by routing a rope or tiedown
through any door or window
opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be
blocked.
3-29

Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to
inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes to help
reduce the potential for severe
injuries mainly to the driver's or right
front passenger's head and chest.
However, they are only designed
to inflate if the impact exceeds
a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds
are used to predict how severe a
crash is likely to be in time for the
airbags to inflate and help restrain
the occupants.
Whether the frontal airbags will or
should deploy depends largely on
what you hit, the direction of the
impact, and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
3-30
Frontal airbags may inflate at

different crash speeds. For
example:
Frontal airbags are not intended to

inflate during vehicle rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts.
If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflate
at a different crash speed than if
the vehicle hits a moving object.
In addition, the vehicle has

dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the
restraint according to crash severity.
If the vehicle hits an object that

deforms, the airbags could
inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits an object
that does not deform.
Frontal knee airbags are designed

to inflate in moderate to severe
frontal or near frontal impacts
that exceed a predetermined
deployment threshold.
If the vehicle hits a narrow object

(like a pole), the airbags could
than if the vehicle hits a wide
object (like a wall).
The vehicle has electronic frontal

sensors, which help the sensing
system distinguish between a
moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. For moderate
frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags
inflate at a level less than full
deployment. For more severe frontal
impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the vehicle goes into an object

at an angle, the airbags could
than if the vehicle goes straight
into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with

specific vehicle design.
The vehicle has seat-mounted side

impact airbags and roof-rail airbags.
See Airbag System on page 326.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags are intended to
inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roofrail
airbags are intended to inflate
during a rollover or in a severe
frontal impact. Seat-mounted side
impact and roof-rail airbags will
inflate if the crash severity is above
the system's designed threshold
level. The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design.
Roofrail airbags are not intended
to inflate in rear impacts.
airbag is intended to deploy on the
side of the vehicle that is struck.
Both roofrail airbags will deploy
when either side of the vehicle is
struck or if the sensing system
predicts that the vehicle is about to
roll over, or in a severe frontal
impact.

In any particular crash, no one can
say whether an airbag should
have inflated simply because of
the damage to a vehicle or because
of what the repair costs were.
For frontal airbags, inflation is
determined by what the vehicle hits,
the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down.
For seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and
severity of the side impact.
In a rollover event, roofrail airbag
deployment is determined by the
direction of the roll.

Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing
system sends an electrical signal
triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the
airbag causing the bag to break out
of the cover and deploy. The inflator,
the airbag, and related hardware are
all part of the airbag module.
Frontal airbag modules are located

inside the steering wheel and
instrument panel. For vehicles with
knee airbags, there are airbag
modules below the steering column
and below the glove box. For
vehicles with seat-mounted side
impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the
seatbacks closest to the door.
For vehicles with roof-rail airbags,
there are airbag modules in the
ceiling of the vehicle, near the side
windows that have occupant seating
positions.
How Does an Airbag

Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or
near frontal collisions, even belted
occupants can contact the steering
wheel or the instrument panel. In
moderate to severe side collisions,
even belted occupants can contact
the inside of the vehicle.
3-31
Airbags supplement the protection

provided by safety belts. Frontal
airbags with knee airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly
over the occupant's body, stopping
the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and
roof-rail airbags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the
occupant's upper body.
Rollover capable roofrail airbags
are designed to help contain the
head an chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the
first and second rows. The rollover
capable roofrail airbags are
designed to help reduce the risk
of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can
prevent all such ejections.
But airbags would not help in
many types of collisions, primarily
because the occupant's motion is
not toward those airbags. See When
Should an Airbag Inflate? on
3-32
Airbags should never be regarded

as anything more than a supplement
to safety belts.
What Will You See after

an Airbag Inflates?
After the frontal airbags and
seat-mounted side impact airbags
inflate, they quickly deflate, so
quickly that some people may not
even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least
partially inflated for some time after
they deploy. Some components of
the airbag module may be hot for
several minutes. For location of the
airbag modules, see What Makes
an Airbag Inflate? on page 331.
The parts of the airbag that come
into contact with you may be warm,
but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming
from the vents in the deflated
airbags. Airbag inflation does not
prevent the driver from seeing out of
the windshield or being able to steer

the vehicle, nor does it prevent
people from leaving the vehicle.
{ WARNING
When an airbag inflates, there
may be dust in the air. This dust
could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of
asthma or other breathing trouble.
To avoid this, everyone in the
vehicle should get out as soon as
it is safe to do so. If you have
breathing problems but cannot
get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air
by opening a window or a door.
If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag
deployment, you should seek
medical attention.
The vehicle has a feature that may
automatically unlock the doors, turn
on the interior lamps, turn on the
hazard warning flashers, and shut
off the fuel system after the airbags

inflate. You can lock the doors, turn
off the interior lamps, and turn off
the hazard warning flashers by
using the controls for those
features.
{ WARNING
A crash severe enough to inflate
the airbags may have also
damaged important functions
in the vehicle, such as the fuel
system, brake and steering
systems, etc. Even if the vehicle
appears to be drivable after a
moderate crash, there may be
concealed damage that could
make it difficult to safely operate
the vehicle.
Use caution if you should attempt
to restart the engine after a crash
has occurred.
In many crashes severe enough to
inflate the airbag, windshields are
broken by vehicle deformation.

Additional windshield breakage
may also occur from the right front
passenger airbag.
.
Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbag
inflates, you will need some
new parts for the airbag system.
If you do not get them, the
airbag system will not be there
to help protect you in another
crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly
other parts. The service manual
for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
The vehicle has a crash sensing
and diagnostic module which
records information after a
crash. See Vehicle Data
Recording and Privacy on
page 1314 and Event Data
Recorders on page 1315.
3-33
Let only qualified technicians

work on the airbag systems.
Improper service can mean that
an airbag system will not work
properly. See your dealer for
service.
Passenger Sensing
System
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system for the right front
passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible
on the instrument panel when the
vehicle is started.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the
symbol for on and off, will be visible
during the system check. If you are
using remote start, if equipped, to
start the vehicle from a distance,
you may not see the system
check. When the system check is
complete, either the word ON or
OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 512.
3-34
Black plate (34,1)
The passenger sensing system

turns off the right front passenger
frontal airbag and passenger knee
airbag, under certain conditions.
The driver airbag, driver knee
airbag, seatmounted side impact
airbags, and roofrail airbags are not
affected by the passenger sensing
system.
The passenger sensing system
works with sensors that are part of
the right front passenger seat. The
sensors are designed to detect
the presence of a properly seated
occupant and determine if the right
front passenger frontal airbag and
passenger knee airbag should be
enabled (may inflate) or not.
According to accident statistics,
children are safer when properly
secured in a rear seat in the correct
child restraint for their weight
and size.
We recommend that children be
secured in a rear seat, including:
an infant or a child riding in a
rear-facing child restraint; a child
riding in a forward-facing child seat;

an older child riding in a booster
seat; and children, who are large
enough, using safety belts.
A label on the sun visor says,
Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front. This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
A child in a rear-facing child
restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front
passenger airbag inflates. This
is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would
be very close to the inflating
airbag. A child in a forward-facing
child restraint can be seriously
passenger airbag inflates and the
passenger seat is in a forward
position.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Even if the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right
front passenger frontal airbag(s),
no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not
deploy under some unusual
circumstance, even though the
airbag(s) are off.
Secure rear-facing child
restraints in a rear seat, even if
the airbag(s) are off. If you secure
a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far
back as it will go. It is better to
secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.

The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger frontal airbag and
passenger knee airbag if:
.
The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.
The system determines that an

infant is present in a rear-facing
infant seat.
The system determines that a

small child is present in a child
restraint.
The system determines that a

small child is present in a
booster seat.
A right front passenger takes

his/her weight off of the seat for
a period of time.
The right front passenger seat is

occupied by a smaller person,
such as a child who has
outgrown child restraints.
Or, if there is a critical problem

with the airbag system or the
passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing

system has turned off the right front
passenger knee airbag, the off
indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbags are off.
See Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 512.
The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn on (may inflate) the
right front passenger frontal airbag
and passenger knee airbag anytime
the system senses that a person of
adult size is sitting properly in the
right front passenger seat. When the
passenger sensing system has
allowed the airbag to be enabled,
the on indicator will light and stay lit
to remind you that the airbags are
active.
For some children who have
outgrown child restraints and for
very small adults, the passenger
sensing system may or may not turn
off the right front passenger frontal
airbag and passenger knee airbag,
depending upon the person's
seating posture and body build.
3-35
Everyone in the vehicle who

has outgrown child restraints
should wear a safety belt
properly whether or not there
is an airbag for that person.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
information, including important
safety information.
If the On Indicator is Lit for a

Child Restraint
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove the child restraint from
the vehicle.
3-36
3. Remove any additional items

from the seat such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
4. Reinstall the child restraint
following the directions
provided by the child restraint
manufacturer and refer to
Securing Child Restraints (Rear
Seat) on page 355 or Securing
Child Restraints (Front
Passenger Seat) on page 357.
6. Restart the vehicle.

If the on indicator is still lit,
secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in
the vehicle, and check with your
dealer.
If the Off Indicator is Lit for an

Adult-Size Occupant
5. If, after reinstalling the child

restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still
lit, turn the vehicle off. Then
slightly recline the vehicle
seatback and adjust the seat
cushion, if adjustable, to make
sure that the vehicle seatback is
not pushing the child restraint
into the seat cushion.
because that person is not sitting

properly in the seat. If this happens,
use the following steps to allow the
system to detect that person and
enable the right front passenger
airbag:
1. Turn the vehicle off.
2. Remove any additional material
from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat
heaters, or seat massagers.
3. Place the seatback in the fully
upright position.
4. Have the person sit upright in
the seat, centered on the seat
cushion, with legs comfortably
extended.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in

the right front passenger seat, but
the off indicator is lit, it could be
5. Restart the vehicle and have the

person remain in this position for
one minute after the on indicator
is lit.

Additional Factors Affecting
System Operation
Safety belts help keep the
passenger in position on the seat
during vehicle maneuvers and
braking, which helps the passenger
sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See
Safety Belts and Child Restraints
in the Index for additional
information about the importance
of proper restraint use.
A thick layer of additional material,
such as a blanket or cushion,
or aftermarket equipment such as
seat covers, seat heaters, and seat
massagers can affect how well the
passenger sensing system
operates. We recommend that you
not use seat covers or other
aftermarket equipment except when
approved by GM for your specific
vehicle. See Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 338 for more information
about modifications that can affect
how the system operates.
3-37
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Stowing of articles under the

passenger seat or between the
passenger seat cushion and
seatback may interfere with the
proper operation of the passenger
sensing system.
For up to 10 seconds after the

ignition is turned off and the
battery is disconnected, an airbag
can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you
are close to an airbag when it
inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow
proper service procedures, and
make sure the person performing
work for you is qualified to do so.
Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how the vehicle
should be serviced. There are parts
of the airbag system in several
places around the vehicle. Your
dealer and the service manual have
information about servicing the
vehicle and the airbag system. To
purchase a service manual, see
Service Publications Ordering
Information on page 1312.
3-38

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add
to or change about the vehicle
that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that
change the vehicle's frame,
bumper system, height, front end
or side sheet metal, they may
keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or
moving any parts of the front
seats, safety belts, the airbag
sensing and diagnostic module,
steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules,
ceiling headliner or pillar garnish
trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, or airbag wiring can
affect the operation of the airbag
system.
In addition, the vehicle has a

for the right front passenger
position, which includes sensors
that are part of the passenger
seat. The passenger sensing
system may not operate properly
if the original seat trim is
replaced with non-GM covers,
upholstery or trim, or with GM
covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle.
Any object, such as an
aftermarket seat heater or a
comfort enhancing pad or
device, installed under or on top
of the seat fabric, could also
interfere with the operation of
the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper

deployment of the passenger
airbag(s) or prevent the
from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See
Passenger Sensing System on
page 333.
If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on
page 131.
If the vehicle has rollover
roofrail airbags, see Different
Size Tires and Wheels on
page 1057 for additional
important information.

Q: Because I have a disability,
I have to get my vehicle
modified. How can I find out
whether this will affect my
airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call
Customer Assistance. The
phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in
Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on
page 131.
In addition, your dealer and the
service manual have information
about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic
module and airbag wiring.
Airbag System Check

The airbag system does not need
regularly scheduled maintenance or
replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
Notice: If an airbag covering is

damaged, opened, or broken, the
airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag
coverings. If there are any
opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or
airbag module replaced. For the
location of the airbag modules,
see What Makes an Airbag
Inflate? on page 331. See your
dealer for service.
Replacing Airbag System

Parts after a Crash
{ WARNING
A crash can damage the
airbag systems in the vehicle.
A damaged airbag system
may not work properly and
may not protect you and your
passenger(s) in a crash, resulting
in serious injury or even death.
(Continued)
3-39
WARNING (Continued)
To help make sure the airbag
systems are working properly
after a crash, have them
inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as
possible.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to
replace airbag system parts. See
your dealer for service.
If the airbag readiness light stays on
after the vehicle is started or comes
on when you are driving, the airbag
system may not work properly. Have
the vehicle serviced right away. See
Airbag Readiness Light on
3-40
Child Restraints
Older Children
The manufacturer's instructions that

come with the booster seat state the
weight and height limitations for that
booster. Use a booster seat with a
lap-shoulder belt until the child
passes the fit test below:
.
Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seat
edge? If yes, continue. If no,
return to the booster seat.
Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.

Does the shoulder belt rest on
the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety
belt comfort guide. See Rear
Safety Belt Comfort Guides
under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
If the shoulder belt still does not
rest on the shoulder, then return
to the booster seat.
Does the lap belt fit low and

snug on the hips, touching the
thighs? If yes, continue. If no,
Older children who have outgrown

booster seats should wear the
vehicle safety belts.
Can proper safety belt fit be

maintained for the length of the
trip? If yes, continue. If no,
Q: What is the proper way to

wear safety belts?
A: An older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the
additional restraint a shoulder
belt can provide. The shoulder
belt should not cross the face or
neck. The lap belt should fit
snugly below the hips, just
touching the top of the thighs.
This applies belt force to the
child's pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the
abdomen, which could cause
severe or even fatal internal
injuries in a crash.
Also see Rear Safety Belt Comfort
Guides under Lap-Shoulder Belt on
page 319.
Black plate (41,1)

children and infants are safer when
properly restrained in a child
restraint system or infant restraint
system secured in a rear seating
position.
WARNING (Continued)
In a crash, children who are not

buckled up can strike other people
who are buckled up, or can be
thrown out of the vehicle. Older
children need to use safety belts
properly.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow two children to wear
the same safety belt. The safety
belt cannot properly spread the
impact forces. In a crash, the two
children can be crushed together
and seriously injured. A safety
belt must be used by only one
person at a time.
3-41
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never allow a child to wear the
safety belt with the shoulder belt
behind their back. A child can be
seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a
crash, the child would not be
restrained by the shoulder belt.
(Continued)
The child could move too far

forward increasing the chance of
head and neck injury. The child
might also slide under the lap
belt. The belt force would then be
applied right on the abdomen.
That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should
go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
3-42
Black plate (42,1)
Infants and Young

Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs
protection! This includes infants
and all other children. Neither the
distance traveled nor the age and
size of the traveler changes the
need, for everyone, to use safety
restraints. In fact, the law in every
state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says
children up to some age must be
restrained while in a vehicle.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Never leave children
unattended in a vehicle and
never allow children to play with
the safety belts.
Airbags plus lapshoulder belts offer

protection for adults and older
children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle's
safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Every
time infants and young children ride
in vehicles, they should have the
protection provided by appropriate
child restraints.
Children who are not restrained
properly can strike other people,
or can be thrown out of the vehicle.
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Never hold an infant or a child
while riding in a vehicle. Due to
crash forces, an infant or a child
will become so heavy it is not
possible to hold it during a crash.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
For example, in a crash at only
40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)
infant will suddenly become a
110 kg (240 lb) force on a person's
arms. An infant should be
secured in an appropriate
restraint.
Black plate (43,1)
{ WARNING
Never do this.
Children who are up against,
or very close to, any airbag when
it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Never put a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat. Secure a rear-facing child
restraint in a rear seat. It is also
better to secure a forward-facing
child restraint in a rear seat. If you
must secure a forward-facing
child restraint in the right front
seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it
will go.
3-43
Q: What are the different types of

add-on child restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which
are purchased by the vehicle
owner, are available in four basic
types. Selection of a particular
restraint should take into
consideration not only the child's
weight, height, and age but also
whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor
vehicle in which it will be used.
For most basic types of child
restraints, there are many
different models available. When
purchasing a child restraint, be
sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the
restraint will have a label saying
that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
3-44
Black plate (44,1)
The restraint manufacturer's

instructions that come with the
restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular
child restraint. In addition, there
are many kinds of restraints
available for children with
special needs.
{ WARNING
To reduce the risk of neck and
head injury during a crash, infants
need complete support. This is
because an infant's neck is not
fully developed and its head
weighs so much compared with
the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing child
restraint settles into the restraint,
so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest
part of an infant's body, the back
and shoulders. Infants should
always be secured in rear-facing
child restraints.
{ WARNING
A young child's hip bones are still
so small that the vehicle's regular
safety belt may not remain low
on the hip bones, as it should.
Instead, it may settle up around
the child's abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a
body area that is unprotected by
any bony structure. This alone
could cause serious or fatal
injuries. To reduce the risk of
serious or fatal injuries during a
crash, young children should
always be secured in appropriate
child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
(A) RearFacing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)
provides restraint with the seating
surface against the back of the
infant.
The harness system holds the infant
in place and, in a crash, acts to
keep the infant positioned in the
restraint.
3-45
Securing an Add-On Child

Restraint in the Vehicle
{ WARNING
(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)
provides restraint for the child's
body with the harness.
(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a child
restraint designed to improve the fit
of the vehicle's safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child
to see out the window.
A child can be seriously injured

or killed in a crash if the child
restraint is not properly secured
in the vehicle. Secure the child
restraint properly in the vehicle
using the vehicle safety belt or
LATCH system, following the
instructions that came with that
child restraint and the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of
injury, the child restraint must be
secured in the vehicle. Child
restraint systems must be secured
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder
belt, or by the LATCH system. See
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
3-46
Black plate (46,1)
Children can be endangered in a

crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
When securing an add-on child
restraint, refer to the instructions
that come with the restraint which
may be on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both, and to this manual.
The child restraint instructions
are important, so if they are not
available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle even when no child
is in it.
In some areas, Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technicians
(CPSTs) are available to inspect
and demonstrate how to correctly
use and install child restraints.
In the U.S., refer to the National
Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) website
to locate the nearest child safety

seat inspection station. For CPST
availability in Canada, check with
Transport Canada or the Provincial
Ministry of Transportation office.
Securing the Child within the

Child Restraint
{ WARNING
A child can be seriously injured or
killed in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child
restraint. Secure the child
properly following the instructions
that came with that child restraint.
Where to Put the

Restraint
children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
position.
We recommend that children and

child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, including: an infant or a child
riding in a rear-facing child restraint;
a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat; an older child riding in a
booster seat; and children, who are
large enough, using safety belts.
Never put a rear-facing child
restraint in the front. This is
because the risk to the rear-facing
child is so great if the airbag
deploys.
{ WARNING
passenger airbag inflates.
This is because the back of the
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
WARNING (Continued)

position.
See Passenger Sensing System

on page 333 for additional
information.

front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
When securing a child restraint

in a rear seating position, study
the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.

the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
rear seat.
(Continued)
Child restraints and booster seats

vary considerably in size, and some
may fit in certain seating positions
better than others. Always make
sure the child restraint is properly
secured.
Depending on where you place the
child restraint and the size of the
child restraint you may not be able
to access adjacent safety belt
assemblies or LATCH anchors for
additional passengers or child
restraints. Adjacent seating
positions should not be used if
3-47
the child restraint prevents access

to or interferes with the routing of
the safety belt.
Wherever a child restraint is
installed, be sure to secure the
child restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured
child restraint can move around in a
collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to
properly secure any child restraint in
the vehicle even when no child
is in it.
Lower Anchors and

Tethers for Children
(LATCH System)
The LATCH system holds a child
restraint during driving or in a crash.
This system is designed to make
installation of a child restraint easier.
The LATCH system uses anchors in
the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use
with the LATCH system.
3-48
Black plate (48,1)
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible

child restraint is properly installed
using the anchors, or use the
vehicle's safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual.
When installing a child restraint with
a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the
safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must
never be installed using only the top
tether anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system
in the vehicle, you need a child
restraint that has LATCH
attachments. The child restraint
manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The
following explains how to attach
a child restraint with these
attachments in the vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or

child restraints have lower anchors
and attachments or top tether
anchors and attachments.
Top Tether Anchor
Lower Anchors
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars

built into the vehicle. There are
two lower anchors for each
LATCH seating position that will
accommodate a child restraint
with lower attachments (B).
A top tether (A, C) anchors the

top of the child restraint to the
vehicle. A top tether anchor is built
into the vehicle. The top tether
attachment (B) on the child restraint
connects to the top tether anchor in
the vehicle in order to reduce the
forward movement and rotation of
the child restraint during driving or in
a crash.
Black plate (49,1)

The child restraint may have
a single tether (A) or a dual
tether (C). Either will have a single
attachment (B) to secure the top
tether to the anchor.
Some child restraints that have a
top tether are designed for use with
or without the top tether being
attached. Others require the top
tether always to be attached. In
Canada, the law requires that
forward-facing child restraints have
a top tether, and that the tether be
attached. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the child
restraint.
3-49
Lower Anchor and Top Tether

Anchor Locations
To assist in locating the lower

anchors, each rear anchor position
has a label, near the crease
between the seatback and the
seat cushion.
Rear Seat
I (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating
positions with top tether anchors.
H (Lower Anchor): Seating

positions with two lower anchors.
To assist in locating the top tether

anchors, the top tether anchor
symbol is on the cover.
3-50

children and infants are safer
when properly restrained in a child
position. See Where to Put the
Restraint on page 346 for
Securing a Child Restraint

Designed for the LATCH
System
The top tether anchors are under
the covers, behind the rear seat, on
the filler panel. Be sure to use an
anchor on the same side of the
vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be
placed.
Do not secure a child restraint in a
position without a top tether anchor
if a national or local law requires
that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
{ WARNING
If a LATCH-type child restraint is
not attached to anchors, the child
restraint will not be able to protect
the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or
killed. Install a LATCH-type child
restraint properly using the
anchors, or use the vehicle safety
belts to secure the restraint,
following the instructions that
came with the child restraint and
the instructions in this manual.
{ WARNING
Do not attach more than one child
restraint to a single anchor.
Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could
cause the anchor or attachment
to come loose or even break
during a crash. A child or others
could be injured. To reduce the
risk of serious or fatal injuries
during a crash, attach only one
child restraint per anchor.
{ WARNING
Children can be seriously injured
or strangled if a shoulder belt is
wrapped around their neck and
the safety belt continues to
tighten. Buckle any unused safety
belts behind the child restraint so
children cannot reach them. Pull
the shoulder belt all the way out
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
of the retractor to set the lock,
if the vehicle has one, after the
child restraint has been installed.
Notice: Do not let the LATCH
attachments rub against the
vehicles safety belts. This may
damage these parts. If necessary,
move buckled safety belts to
avoid rubbing the LATCH
attachments.
Do not fold the empty rear seat
with a safety belt buckled. This
could damage the safety belt or
the seat. Unbuckle and return the
safety belt to its stowed position,
before folding the seat.
If you need to secure more than
one child restraint in the rear seat,
see Where to Put the Restraint on
page 346 for additional information.
Make sure to attach the child
restraint at the proper anchor
location.
This system is designed to make

installation of child restraints easier.
When using lower anchors, do
not use the vehicle's safety belts.
Instead use the vehicle's anchors
and child restraint attachments to
secure the restraints. Some
restraints also use another vehicle
anchor to secure a top tether.
1. Attach and tighten the
lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child
restraint does not have lower
attachments or the desired
seating position does not have
lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and
the safety belts. Refer to the
child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions
in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for
the desired rear outboard
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3-51
For outboard rear seating

positions, if the head
restraint interferes with the
proper installation of the
child restraint, the head
restraint may be removed.
See Head Restraint
Removal and
Reinstallation at the
end of this section.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower
attachments on the child
restraint to the lower
anchors.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer
recommends that the top tether
be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether
anchor. Refer to the child
restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
Open the cover to expose
the anchor.
3-52
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten

the top tether according to
the child restraint
instructions and the
following instructions:
If you are using a single

tether in a rear outboard
seating position with an
adjustable head restraint,
or in the center seating
position with an adjustable
headrest, route the single
tether under the head
restraint or headrest. See
Head Restraints on
information.
If you are using a dual

tether in a rear outboard
seating position with an
adjustable head restraint,
or in the center seating
position with an adjustable
headrest, route the dual
tether around the head
restraint or headrest. See
Head Restraints on
information.
If you are using a single

tether in the center seating
position without a headrest,
or the rear outboard head
restraint has been removed,
route the single tether over
the seatback.
If you are using a dual

tether in the center seating
position without a headrest,
or the rear outboard head
restraint has been removed,
route the dual tether over
the seatback.
3-53
3. Before placing a child in the

child restraint, make sure it is
securely held in place. To check,
grasp the child restraint at the
LATCH path and attempt to
move it sidetoside and
backandforth. There should
be no more than 2.5 cm (1 in)
of movement, for proper
installation.
Head Restraint Removal and

Reinstallation
The rear outboard head restraints
can be removed if they interfere with
the proper installation of the child
restraint.
To remove the head restraint:
1. Partially fold the seatback
forward. See Rear Seats on
information.
2. Press both buttons on the head

restraint posts at the same time,
and pull up on the head
restraint.
3. Store the head restraint in the
trunk of the vehicle.
3-54
4. When the child restraint is

removed, reinstall the head
restraint before the seating
position is used.
To reinstall the head restraint:
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
With head restraints that are not
installed and adjusted properly,
there is a greater chance that
occupants will suffer a neck/
spinal injury in a crash. Do not
drive until the head restraints for
all occupants are installed and
adjusted properly.

Parts After a Crash
1. Insert the head restraint posts

into the holes in the top of the
seatback. The notches (A) on
the posts must face the driver
side of the vehicle.
A crash can damage the

LATCH system in the vehicle.
A damaged LATCH system may
not properly secure the child
restraint, resulting in serious
injury or even death in a crash.
To help make sure the LATCH
system is working properly after
a crash, see your dealer to have
the system inspected and any
necessary replacements made as
soon as possible.
2. Push the head restraint down.

If necessary, press the height
adjustment release button to
further lower the head restraint.
See Head Restraints on
page 32.
3. Try to move the head restraint to
make sure that it is locked in
place.
If the vehicle has the LATCH system

and it was being used during a
crash, new LATCH system parts
may be needed.
New parts and repairs may be
necessary even if the LATCH
system was not being used at
the time of the crash.

(Rear Seat)
When securing a child restraint
in a rear seating position, study
the instructions that came with the
child restraint to make sure it is
compatible with this vehicle.
If the child restraint has the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 347 for how and
where to install the child restraint
using LATCH. If a child restraint is
secured in the vehicle using a
safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
page 347 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
that the top tether be anchored, or if
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that

attached.
If the child restraint does not have
the LATCH system, you will be
using the safety belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be
sure to follow the instructions that
came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
3-55
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run

the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.
If more than one child restraint

needs to be installed in the rear
seat, be sure to read Where to Put
the Restraint on page 346.
1. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
If the head restraint interferes
with the proper installation of the
child restraint, the head restraint
may be removed. See Head
Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation under Lower
Anchors and Tethers for
page 347.

buckle until it clicks. If the latch
plate will not go fully into the
buckle, check if the correct
buckle is being used.
3-56

6. If the child restraint has a top
tether, follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions
regarding the use of the top
tether. See Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 347 for more
information.

the buckle so that the safety belt
could be quickly unbuckled if
necessary.
4. Pull the shoulder belt all the way

out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
5. To tighten the belt, push down

on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint, it
may be helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 4 and 5.

safety belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and back
and forth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt
and let it return to the stowed
position. If the top tether is
attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it. If the head restraint
was removed, reinstall it before
the seating position is used. See
Head Restraint Removal and
Reinstallation under Lower Anchors

and Tethers for Children (LATCH
System) on page 347 for additional
information on installing the head
restraint properly.

(Front Passenger Seat)
This vehicle has airbags. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a
forward-facing child restraint. See
Where to Put the Restraint on
page 346.
In addition, the vehicle has a
passenger sensing system which is
designed to turn off the right front
passenger knee airbag under
certain conditions. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 333 and
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 512 for more information,
including important safety
information.

Never put a rear-facing child seat
in the front. This is because the risk
to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{ WARNING
passenger airbag inflates. This
is because the back of the
position.
front passenger frontal airbag, no
system is fail-safe. No one can
(Continued)
3-57
WARNING (Continued)
circumstance, even though it is
turned off.
the airbag is off. If you secure a
forward-facing child restraint in
rear seat.
See Passenger Sensing System
on page 333 for additional
information.
If the child restraint has the
LATCH system, see Lower
Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH System) on page 347
for how and where to install the
child restraint using LATCH.
3-58
If a child restraint is secured using a

safety belt and it uses a top tether,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for
page 347 for top tether anchor
locations.
Do not secure a child seat in a
that the top tether be anchored, or if
child restraint say that the top strap
must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder
belt to secure the child restraint in
this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as
it will go before securing the
forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing

front passenger frontal airbag
and passenger knee airbag, the
off indicator on the passenger
airbag status indicator should
light and stay lit when you start
the vehicle. See Passenger
Airbag Status Indicator on
page 512.
2. Put the child restraint on
the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run
the lap and shoulder portions of
the vehicle's safety belt through
or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show
you how.

buckle until it clicks.
the buckle, so that the safety
belt could be quickly unbuckled
if necessary.
3-59

safety belt path and attempt
to move it sidetoside and
backandforth. When the child
restraint is properly installed,
there should be no more than
2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.
5. Pull the shoulder belt all the way

out of the retractor to set the
lock. When the retractor lock is
set, the belt can be tightened but
not pulled out of the retractor.
6. To tighten the belt, push down

on the child restraint, pull the
shoulder portion of the belt to
tighten the lap portion of the belt,
and feed the shoulder belt back
into the retractor. When installing
a forward-facing child restraint,
it may be helpful to use your
knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
Try to pull the belt out of the
retractor to make sure the
retractor is locked. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat
Steps 5 and 6.
If the airbags are off, the off

indicator in the passenger airbag
status indicator will come on and
stay on when the vehicle is started.
If a child restraint has been installed
and the on indicator is lit, see If
the On Indicator is Lit for a Child
Restraint under Passenger Sensing
System on page 333 for more
information.
To remove the child restraint,
unbuckle the vehicle safety belt
and let it return to the stowed
position.
3-60
Black plate (60,1)
2 NOTES
Storage
Storage
Storage
Compartments
Storage Compartments
Instrument Panel Storage . . . . .
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Center Console Storage . . . . . .
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-1
Cupholders
Cupholders are in the center
console.
Instrument Panel Storage
Additional Storage Features

Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
There may be a storage

compartment on the instrument
panel. Pull the handle to open.
Glove Box
Open the glove box by lifting up on
the lever.
Cupholders may be located in the

second row seat armrest. To
access, pull the armrest down.
4-2
Storage
Center Console Storage
Additional Storage
Features
Cargo Tie-Downs
The center console storage has a

storage area under the armrest. Pull
up on the latch (A) to access.
Pull up on the latch (A) and slide the

center console armrest to adjust the
position. Return the armrest to the
rear position to access the
storage area.
There may be an auxiliary jack
outlet and a USB port located in the
center console.
See Auxiliary Devices on page 719.
On the driver side in the rear

compartment is a retainer to hang
light items on.
Instruments and Controls
Instruments and
Controls
Controls
Steering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2
Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Indicators
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-10

Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11
Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Service Vehicle Soon
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Brake System Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Power Steering Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
StabiliTrak OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-18
Traction Control System
(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light . . . . 5-19
Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-20
Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Reduced Engine Power
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Daytime Running Lamps

(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . .
Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . .
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . .
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-1
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-23
Information Displays
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages (Canada
Base Level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Uplevel and United
States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Battery Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Brake System Messages . . . . 5-27
Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-28
Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Engine Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-29
Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-29
Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-29
5-2
Key and Lock Messages . . . . .

Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Object Detection System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ride Control System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Airbag System Messages . . . .
Security Messages . . . . . . . . . .
Service Vehicle Messages . . .
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transmission Messages . . . . .
Vehicle Reminder
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-29
5-30
Controls
3. Pull or push the steering wheel

closer or away from you.
5-30
Steering Wheel
Adjustment
4. Push the lever (A) up to lock the

steering wheel in place.
5-30
5-30
5-31
5-31
Do not adjust the steering wheel

while driving.
5-31
5-31
5-32
5-32
Vehicle Personalization
Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-33
To adjust the steering wheel:
1. Pull the lever (A) down.
2. Move the steering wheel up
or down.
For vehicles with audio steering

wheel controls, some audio controls
can be adjusted at the steering
wheel.
b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicles

with a Bluetooth, OnStar,
or navigation system, press to
interact with those systems. See
Bluetooth (Overview) on page 722
or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)
on page 724 or Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) on page 728, the
OnStar Owner's Guide, or the
separate navigation manual for
more information.
$ / i (Mute/End Call): Press to
silence the vehicle speakers only.
Press again to turn the sound on.
For vehicles with OnStar or
Bluetooth systems, press to reject
an incoming call, or end a
current call.
_
SRC ^ (Rotary Control): Turn

to select an audio source.
Press _ or ^ to select the next or
previous favorite radio station, CD,
or MP3 track.
+ x (Volume): Press + to
increase the volume. Press to
decrease the volume.
5-3
Horn
Press near the horn symbols or
press on the steering wheel pad to
sound the horn.
Windshield Wiper/Washer
3 (Adjustable Interval Wipes):
Turn the band up for more frequent
wipes or down for less frequent
wipes.
9 (Off): Use to turn the windshield

wipers off.
The windshield wiper lever is on the
side of the steering column. With
the ignition in ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN, move the windshield
wiper lever to select the wiper
speed.
2: Use for fast wipes.
1: Use for slow wipes.
3 (Mist):
For a single wipe, briefly

move the wiper lever down. For
several wipes, hold the wiper
lever down.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they
are frozen to the windshield,
carefully loosen or thaw them.
Damaged wiper blades should be
replaced. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 1027.
5-4

Windshield Washer
Compass
Wipe Parking
Pull the windshield wiper lever

toward you to spray windshield
washer fluid and activate the wipers.
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/

OFF while the wipers are on 1, 2,
or 3, they will immediately stop.
The wipers will continue until the

lever is released or the maximum
wash time is reached.
If the windshield wiper lever is then

moved to OFF before the driver
door is opened, or within
10 minutes, the wipers will restart
and move to the base of the
windshield.
When the windshield wiper lever is

released, additional wipes may
occur depending on how long the
windshield washer had been
activated. See Washer Fluid on
page 1021 for information on filling
the windshield washer fluid
reservoir.
The vehicle may have a compass

display in the Driver Information
Center (DIC). The compass receives
its heading and other information
from the Global Positioning
System (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,
and vehicle speed information.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the

wipers. A circuit breaker stops them
until the motor cools.
If the ignition is turned to LOCK/

OFF during a windshield wash, the
wipers will stop when they reach the
base of the windshield.
{ WARNING
In freezing weather, do not use
the washer until the windshield is
warmed. Otherwise the washer
fluid can form ice on the
windshield, blocking your vision.
Avoid covering the GPS antenna

located on the roof, for long
periods of time with objects that
may interfere with the antenna's
ability to receive a satellite signal.
The compass system is designed
to operate for a certain number of
miles or degrees of turn before
needing a signal from the GPS
satellites. When the compass
display shows CAL, drive the
vehicle for a short distance in an
open area where it can receive a
GPS signal. The compass system
will automatically determine when
the GPS signal is restored and
provide a heading again.

See Compass Messages on
page 528 for more information
on the messages that may be
displayed for the compass.
Clock
The infotainment system controls
are used to access the time and
date settings through the menu
system. See Operation on page 76
for information about how to use the
menu system. For vehicles with a
Navigation System, see the
separate Navigation manual.
3. Turn the MENU or MENU/SEL

knob to adjust the highlighted
number.
4. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob to select the next number.
5. To save the time and return to
the Time Settings menu, press
the BACK button at any time or
press the MENU or MENU/SEL
knob after adjusting the minutes.
Setting the 12/24 Hour Format

Setting the Time
2. Highlight 12/24 Hour Format.
1. Press the CONFIG button

and select Time Settings.
3. Press the MENU or MENU/SEL

knob to select the 12 hour or
24 hour display format.
2. Select Set Time.
5-5
Power Outlets
The accessory power outlets can be
used to plug in electrical equipment,
such as a cell phone or MP3 player.
There is one accessory power outlet
located on the center floor console
and one on the rear of the center
floor console. These outlets are
powered when the key is in ON/
RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or until
the driver door is opened within
10 minutes of turning off the vehicle.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 920.
5-6
Remove the cover to access and

replace when not in use.
Notice: Leaving electrical
equipment plugged in for an
extended period of time while
the vehicle is off will drain the
battery. Always unplug electrical
equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that
exceeds the maximum 20 ampere
rating.
Certain electrical accessories
may not be compatible with the
accessory power outlet and could
overload vehicle or adapter fuses.
If a problem is experienced, see
your dealer.
When adding electrical equipment,

be sure to follow the installation
instructions included with the
equipment. See Add-On Electrical
Equipment on page 950.
Cigarette Lighter
Notice: Hanging heavy

equipment from the power outlet
can cause damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty. The
power outlets are designed for
accessory power plugs only,
such as cell phone charge cords.
To activate the cigarette lighter,

push it into the heating element and
let go. When the lighter is ready it
will pop back out.
For vehicles with a cigarette lighter,

it is located on the front floor
console.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter

in while it is heating does not let
the lighter back away from the
heating element when it is hot.
Damage from overheating can
occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be
blown. Do not hold a cigarette
lighter in while it is heating.
Black plate (7,1)
Ashtrays
For vehicles with a removable
ashtray, the ashtray can be placed
into the front console cupholders.
To open the ashtray, lift the lid of the
ashtray. After using, close the lid.
To empty the ashtray for cleaning,
slightly turn the upper part of the
ashtray counterclockwise and
remove it.
Notice: If papers, pins, or other
flammable items are put in the
ashtray, hot cigarettes or other
smoking materials could ignite
them and possibly damage the
vehicle. Never put flammable
items in the ashtray.
5-7
Warning Lights,
Gauges, and
Indicators
Gauges can indicate when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Often gauges and warning
lights work together to indicate a
problem with the vehicle.
Warning lights and gauges can

signal that something is wrong
before it becomes serious enough
to cause an expensive repair or
replacement. Paying attention to the
warning lights and gauges could
prevent injury.
When one of the warning lights

comes on and stays on while
driving, or when one of the gauges
shows there may be a problem,
check the section that explains what
to do. Follow this manual's advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly
and even dangerous.
Warning lights come on when there

could be a problem with a vehicle
function. Some warning lights come
on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
5-8
Black plate (8,1)
Instrument Cluster
English Automatic Transmission Cluster Shown, Metric Similar
Speedometer
Trip Odometer
The speedometer shows the

vehicle's speed in either kilometers
per hour (km/h) or miles per
hour (mph).
The trip odometer can show how far

the vehicle has been driven since
the trip odometer was last reset.
Odometer
The odometer shows how far the
vehicle has been driven, in either
kilometers or miles.
This vehicle has a tamperresistant
odometer. The digital odometer will
read 999,999 if it is turned back.
If the vehicle needs a new odometer
installed, it must be set to the
mileage total of the old odometer.
If that is not possible, then it must
be set at zero and a label must be
put on the driver door to show the
old mileage reading when the new
odometer was installed.
5-9
Fuel Gauge
The trip odometer is accessed

and reset through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
Tachometer
The tachometer displays the engine
speed in revolutions per
minute (rpm).
Notice: If the engine is operated
with the tachometer in the shaded
warning area, the vehicle could
be damaged, and the damages
would not be covered by the
vehicle warranty. Do not operate
the engine with the tachometer in
the shaded warning area.
When the ignition is on, the fuel

gauge tells you about how much
fuel you have left in your tank.
An arrow on the fuel gauge
indicates the side of the vehicle
the fuel door is on.
A FUEL LEVEL LOW message may
appear in the Driver Information
Center (DIC) and a single chime
sounds. See Fuel System
Messages on page 529 for
more information.
5-10
Black plate (10,1)
Here are four things that some

owners ask about. None of these
show a problem with your fuel
gauge:
Engine Coolant
Temperature Gauge
At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gauge
reads full.
It takes a little more or less

fuel to fill up than the gauge
indicated. For example, the
gauge may have indicated the
tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than
half the tank's capacity to fill
the tank.
The gauge moves a little while

turning a corner or speeding up.
This gauge shows the engine

coolant temperature.
The gauge takes a few seconds

to stabilize after the ignition is
turned on, and will go back to
empty when the ignition is
turned off.
If the indicator needle moves to

the hot side of the gauge toward
the H or shaded area, the engine
is too hot.
Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt Reminder
Light
When the engine is started, a
chime sounds for several seconds
to remind a driver to fasten the
safety belt, unless the driver safety
belt is already buckled.
If the vehicle has been operated

under normal driving conditions, pull
off the road, stop the vehicle, and
turn off the engine as soon as
possible.
The safety belt reminder light comes

on for several seconds, then flashes
for several more.
This chime and light sequence
are repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in
motion. If the driver safety belt is
already buckled, neither the chime
nor the light comes on.

Passenger Safety Belt
Reminder Light
Several seconds after the engine
is started, a chime sounds for
several seconds to remind the front
passenger to buckle their safety
belt. The passenger safety belt light
comes on and flashes for several
seconds.
The front passenger safety belt

warning light and chime may turn on
if an object is put on the seat such
as a briefcase, handbag, grocery
bag, laptop, or other electronic
device. To turn off the warning light
and/or chime, remove the object
from the seat or buckle the
safety belt.
Airbag Readiness Light
This chime and light sequence is

repeated if the passenger remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in
motion.
If the passenger safety belt is
buckled, neither the chime nor
the light comes on.
This light shows if there is an

electrical problem. The system
check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag
modules, the wiring, and the crash
sensing and diagnostic module. For
more information on the airbag
system, see Airbag System on
page 326.
5-11
The airbag readiness light comes on

and stays on for several seconds
when the vehicle is started. Then
the light goes out.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light stays
on after the vehicle is started or
comes on while driving, it means
the airbag system might not be
working properly. The airbags in
the vehicle might not inflate in a
crash, or they could even inflate
without a crash. To help avoid
injury, have the vehicle serviced
right away.
5-12

Indicator
The vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. See Passenger
Sensing System on page 333 for
important safety information. The
instrument panel has a passenger
airbag status indicator.
United States
Canada
When the vehicle is started, the
passenger airbag status indicator
will light ON and OFF, or the symbol
for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. If you are using

remote start, if equipped, to start the
vehicle from a distance you may
not see the system check. Then,
after several seconds, the status
indicator will light either ON or OFF,
or either the on or off symbol to let
you know the status of the right
passenger knee airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is
lit on the passenger airbag status
indicator, it means that the right
passenger knee airbag are enabled
(may inflate).
If the word OFF or the off symbol
is lit on the passenger airbag
status indicator, it means that the
passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger
airbag.
If, after several seconds, both

status indicator lights remain on,
or if there are no lights at all, there
may be a problem with the lights or
the passenger sensing system.
See your dealer for service.
{ WARNING
If the airbag readiness light ever
comes on and stays on, it means
that something may be wrong
with the airbag system. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others,
have the vehicle serviced right
away. See Airbag Readiness
information, including important
safety information.
Black plate (13,1)
Charging System Light
If a short distance must be driven

with the light on, be sure to turn off
all accessories, such as the radio
and air conditioner.
Malfunction
Indicator Lamp
The charging system light comes on
briefly when the ignition is turned
on, but the engine is not running, as
a check to show the light is working.
The light turns off when the engine
is started. If it does not, have the
vehicle serviced by your dealer.
If the light stays on, or comes on
while driving, there could be a
problem with the electrical charging
system. Have it checked by your
dealer. Driving while this light is on
could drain the battery.
5-13
A computer system called OBD II

(On-Board Diagnostics-Second
Generation) monitors operation of
the fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems. It ensures that
emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to
produce a cleaner environment.
This light should come on when the

ignition is on, but the engine is not
running, as a check to show it is
working. If it does not, have the
If the malfunction indicator lamp
comes on and stays on while the
engine is running, this indicates that
there is an OBD II problem and
service is required.
5-14
Malfunctions often are indicated by

the system before any problem is
apparent. Being aware of the light
can prevent more serious damage
to the vehicle. This system assists
the service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If the vehicle is
continually driven with this light
on, the emission controls might
not work as well, the vehicle fuel
economy might not be as good,
and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to
costly repairs that might not be
covered by the vehicle warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the
engine, transmission, exhaust,
intake, or fuel system of the
vehicle or the replacement of
the original tires with other
than those of the same Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) can
affect the vehicle's emission
controls and can cause this light
to come on. Modifications to
these systems could lead to

costly repairs not covered by
the vehicle warranty. This
could also result in a failure
to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
See Accessories and
Modifications on page 103.
This light comes on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing: A misfire condition
has been detected. A misfire
increases vehicle emissions and
could damage the emission control
system on the vehicle. Diagnosis
and service might be required.
To prevent more serious damage to
the vehicle:
.
Reduce vehicle speed.
Avoid hard accelerations.
Avoid steep uphill grades.
If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauled
as soon as it is possible.
If the light continues to flash, when

it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle.
Find a safe place to park the
vehicle. Turn the vehicle off, wait at
least 10 seconds, and restart the
engine. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see
your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
Light On Steady: An emission
control system malfunction has
been detected on the vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be
required.
The following may correct an
emissions system malfunction:
.
Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank on
page 942. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel
cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap
properly installed should turn the
light off.

.
Check that the electrical system

is not wet. The system could be
wet if the vehicle was driven
through a deep puddle of water.
The condition is usually
corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving
trips should turn the light off.
Check that good quality fuel is
used. Poor fuel quality causes
the engine not to run as
efficiently as designed and can
cause: stalling after start-up,
stalling when the vehicle is
changed into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration,
or stumbling on acceleration.
These conditions might go away
once the engine is warmed up.
If one or more of these conditions

occurs, change the fuel brand used.
It will require at least one full tank of
the proper fuel to turn the light off.
5-15
See Recommended Fuel on

page 939.
If none of the above have made the
light turn off, your dealer can check
the vehicle. The dealer has the
proper test equipment and
diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems
that might have developed.
Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have programs to
inspect the on-vehicle emission
control equipment. For the
inspection, the emission system test
equipment is connected to the
vehicles Data Link
Connector (DLC).
The DLC is under the instrument

panel to the left of the steering
wheel. See your dealer if assistance
is needed.
The vehicle may not pass
inspection if:
.
The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or if
the light does not come on when
the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
while the engine is off.
The critical emission control

systems have not been
completely diagnosed by the
system. This can happen if
the battery has recently been
replaced or if the battery has
run down. The diagnostic
system evaluates critical
emission control systems
during normal driving.
5-16
This can take several days of

routine driving. If this has been
done and the vehicle still does
not pass the inspection, your
dealer can prepare the vehicle
for inspection.
Service Vehicle Soon

Light
For vehicles with this light, it comes

on if a condition exists that may
require the vehicle to be taken in for
service.
Vehicles not equipped with a light,
display a SERVICE VEHICLE
SOON message.
See Service Vehicle Messages on

If the light comes on, take the
vehicle to your dealer for service
as soon as possible.

Light
The vehicle brake system consists
of two hydraulic circuits. If one
circuit is not working, the remaining
circuit can still work to stop the
vehicle. For normal braking
performance, both circuits need
to be working.
If the warning light comes on, there
is a brake problem. Have the brake
system inspected right away.
English
Metric
The Brake System Warning Light

should come on briefly as the
engine is started. If it does not come
on, have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer.
{ WARNING
The brake system might not be
working properly if the brake
system warning light is on.
Driving with the brake system
warning light on can lead to a
crash. If the light is still on after
the vehicle has been pulled off
the road and carefully stopped,
have the vehicle towed for
service.

If the light comes on while driving, a
chime sounds. Pull off the road and
stop. The pedal might be harder to
push or go closer to the floor.
It might also take longer to stop.
If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See
Towing the Vehicle on page 1081.
Antilock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)

light comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn if
there is a problem.
If the ABS light comes on and stays

on while driving, stop as soon as
possible and turn the ignition off.
Start the engine again to reset the
system. If the light stays on after
driving at a speed above 20 km/h
(13 mph), see your dealer for
service. A chime may also sound
when the light comes on steady.
If the regular brake system warning
light is not on, the vehicle still has
brakes, but not antilock brakes.
If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, the vehicle does not
have antilock brakes and there is a
problem with the regular brakes.
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 516.
See Brake System Messages on
page 527 for all brakerelated DIC
messages.
5-17
Up-Shift Light
The vehicle may have an up-shift

light. It shows when to shift to the
next higher gear for best fuel
economy.
See Manual Transmission on
5-18

Light
Traction Off Light
See Traction Control System (TCS)

on page 932 and StabiliTrak
information.
StabiliTrak OFF Light
This light comes on briefly when the

ignition is turned to ON/RUN as a
check to show it is working.
If it does not come on have the
If this light stays on, or comes on
while driving, the system may not be
working. If this happens, see your
dealer for service.
This light comes on briefly while

starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer. If the system is working
normally, the indicator light then
turns off.
The traction off light comes on when
the Traction Control System (TCS)
has been turned off by pressing and
releasing the traction control button.
This light and the StabiliTrak Off
light come on when StabiliTrak is
turned off.
If the TCS is off, wheelspin is not
limited. Adjust driving accordingly.
This light comes on briefly while

starting the engine. If it does not,
have the vehicle serviced by your
dealer.
This light comes on when the
StabiliTrak system is turned off.
If StabiliTrak is off, the Traction
Control System (TCS) is also off.
If the TCS is off, the system does
not assist in controlling the vehicle.
Turn on the TCS and the StabiliTrak
systems and the warning light
turns off.

on page 932 and StabiliTrak
information

(TCS)/StabiliTrak Light
feature(s) is no longer functioning

and whether the vehicle requires
service.
If the indicator/warning light is on
and flashing, the TCS and/or the
StabiliTrak system is actively
working.
See StabiliTrak System on
page 933 and Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 932 for
more information.
Tire Pressure Light

The StabiliTrak system or the
Traction Control System (TCS)
indicator/warning light comes on
briefly when the engine is started.
If the light does not come on, have
the vehicle serviced by the dealer.
If the system is working normally,
the indicator light turns off.
If the light is on and not flashing, the
TCS, and potentially the StabiliTrak
system have been disabled. A DIC
message may display. Check the
DIC messages to determine which
5-19
When the Light is On Steady

This indicates that one or more
of the tires are significantly
underinflated.
A Driver Information Center (DIC)
tire pressure message may also
display. See Vehicle Messages
(Canada Base Level) on page 526
or Vehicle Messages (Canada
Uplevel and United States) on
Stop as soon as possible, and
inflate the tires to the pressure
value shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Tire
Pressure on page 1047 for more
information.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is On Steady
For vehicles with the Tire Pressure

Monitor System (TPMS), this light
comes on briefly when the engine
is started. It provides information
about tire pressures and the TPMS.
This indicates that there may be a

problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System. The light flashes
for about a minute and stays on
steady for the remainder of the
ignition cycle. This sequence
repeats with every ignition cycle.
5-20
Low Fuel Warning Light
See Tire Pressure Monitor

Operation on page 1050 for
more information.
Engine Oil Pressure Light
{ WARNING
Do not keep driving if the oil
pressure is low. The engine can
become so hot that it catches fire.
Someone could be burned. Check
the oil as soon as possible and
have the vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil
maintenance can damage the
engine. The repairs would not be
Always follow the maintenance
schedule for changing engine oil.
The oil pressure light should come

on briefly as the engine is started.
If the light comes on and stays on, it
means that oil is not flowing through
the engine properly. The vehicle
could be low on oil and might have
some other system problem. See
your dealer.
This light comes on for a few

seconds when the ignition is turned
on as a check to indicate it is
working. If it does not come on,
have it fixed.
The low fuel warning light (A) comes
on and a chime sounds when the
vehicle is low on fuel. The light turns
off when fuel is added to the
fuel tank.

For vehicles with a Driver
Information Center (DIC), see
Driver Information Center (DIC) on
Security Light
The immobilizer light should come

on briefly as the engine is started.
If the system is working normally
the indicator light turns off.
This light comes on when the
ignition is turned from LOCK/OFF
to ON/RUN and stays on if the
vehicle is immobilized. This
happens when an incorrect key
or an unprogrammed key is used
to start the vehicle.
If the light stays on and the engine

does not start, there could be a
problem with the theft-deterrent
system. See Immobilizer Operation

Light
5-21
Wait for 10 seconds and restart

the vehicle. This might correct the
condition.
The vehicle can be driven at a
reduced speed when the reduced
engine power light is on but
acceleration and speed might be
reduced. The performance could be
reduced until the next time the
vehicle is driven. If this light stays
on, see your dealer as soon as
possible for diagnosis and repair.
High-Beam On Light
The reduced engine power light
should come on briefly as the
engine is started. If it does not come
on have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer.
This light, along with the service
engine soon light, displays when a
noticeable reduction in the vehicle's
performance occurs. Stop the
vehicle and turn off the ignition.
The high-beam on light comes on

when the high-beam headlamps are
in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer on page 62 for more
information.
5-22

(DRL) Indicator Light
This light turns on whenever the

Daytime Running Lamps are in use.
See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Front Fog Lamp Light
Cruise Control Light
For vehicles with front fog lamps,

this light comes on when the front
fog lamps are in use.
The cruise control light is white

whenever the cruise control is set,
and turns green when the cruise
control is active.
The light goes out when the front

fog lamps are turned off. See Front
Fog Lamps on page 64 for more
information.
Lamps On Reminder
The lamps on reminder light comes

on when the lights are in use.
The light turns off when the cruise

control is turned off. See Cruise
Control on page 935 for more
information.
Door Ajar Light
Information Displays
5-23
DIC Buttons
Driver Information
Center (DIC)
For vehicles equipped with this light,

it comes on when a door is open or
not secured. Vehicles not equipped
with a light display a DIC message.
See Door Ajar Messages on
The vehicle may have a Driver

Information Center (DIC). The DIC
displays information about your
vehicle. It also displays warning
messages if a system problem is
detected. See Vehicle Messages
All messages appear in the DIC
display located in the center of the
instrument panel cluster.
DIC Operation and Displays

The DIC has different displays
which can be accessed by using the
DIC buttons located on the turn
signal lever located on the left side
of the steering wheel. The DIC
displays trip, fuel, and warning
messages if a system problem is
detected.
A. SET/CLR: Press to set or clear

the menu item displayed.
B.
w x (Thumbwheel): Use to
scroll through the menus.
A marker will move across the
bottom of the page as you
scroll.
C. MENU: Press to display the

Trip/Fuel menu and the Vehicle
Information menu. This button is
also used to return to or exit the
last screen displayed on
the DIC.
5-24
Black plate (24,1)
Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press MENU on the turn signal
lever until Trip/Fuel Information
menu displays. Use w x to scroll
through the menu items. Not all
items are available on every vehicle.
The following is a list of all of the
possible menu items:
.
Trip 1 or Trip 2
Fuel Range
Average Fuel Economy or

Average Fuel Economy and
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Average Speed
Fuel Used
Digital Speed
Navigation
Blank Display
Trip 1 or Trip 2
This displays the current distance
traveled, in either kilometers (km) or
miles (mi), from the last reset for the
trip odometer. Some models have
one trip odometer and some have

two. The trip odometer can be reset
to zero by pressing and holding the
SET/CLR button while the trip
odometer display is showing.
On some models, this display is

shown as c . L/100km (mpg).
Reset the average consumption
by pressing SET/CLR when it is
displayed.
Fuel Range
The Instantaneous Fuel Economy

display shows the current fuel
economy in liters per 100 kilometers
(L/100 km) or miles per gallon
(mpg). This number reflects only the
fuel economy that the vehicle has
right now and changes frequently as
driving conditions change. Unlike
average economy, this display
cannot be reset.
This displays the approximate

distance the vehicle can be driven
without refueling. The fuel range
estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle's fuel economy over
recent driving history and the
amount of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank. On some models, this display
is shown as . km (mi). Fuel range
cannot be reset.
Average Fuel Economy or
Average Fuel Economy and
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
The Average Fuel Economy display
shows the approximate average
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km)
or miles per gallon (mpg). This
number is based on the number of
L/100 km (mpg) recorded since the
last time this menu item was reset.
Average Speed
This displays the average speed of
the vehicle in kilometers per hour
(km/h) or miles per hour (mph). This
average is based on the various
vehicle speeds recorded since the
last reset. On some models, this
display is shown as c km/h (mph).
Reset the average speed by
pressing SET/CLR when it is
displayed.

Fuel Used
This display shows the approximate
liters (L) or gallons (gal) of fuel that
have been used since last reset.
The fuel used can be reset by
pressing the SET/CLR button while
the Fuel Used display is showing.
Digital Speed
The speedometer shows how fast
the vehicle is moving in either
kilometers per hour (km/h) or miles
per hour (mph). The speedometer
cannot be reset.
Navigation
This display is used for the OnStar
or Navigation System Turn-by-Turn
guidance. See The OnStar Owner's
Guide or the Navigation manual,
if the vehicle has navigation, for
more information.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Information Menu

Items
Press MENU on the turn signal
lever until Vehicle Information menu
is displayed. Use w x to scroll
through the menu items. Not all
items are available on every vehicle.
The following is a list of all of the
possible menu items:
.
Units
Tire Pressure
Remaining Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Blank Display
Units
Move w x to change between
Metric or US when the Unit display
is active. Press SET/CLR to confirm
the setting. On some models, you
will have to select 1, 2, or 3 for the
Unit display. 1 is Imperial units, 2 is
US units, and 3 is metric units. This
5-25
will change the displays on the

cluster and DIC to the type of
measurements you select.
Tire Pressure
The display may show a vehicle
with the approximate pressures
of all four tires. Tire pressure is
displayed in either kilopascal (kPa)
or in pounds per square inch (psi).
On some models, this display only
allows for matching of the TPMS
sensors. In this case, the display
will show TIRE LEARN. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on
page 1048 and Tire Pressure
Monitor Operation on page 1050
Remaining Oil Life
This display shows an estimate
of the oil's remaining useful life.
If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% is
displayed, that means 99% of
the current oil life remains. On
some models, this display is
shown as : %.
5-26
When the remaining oil life is low,

the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
message, or code 82, will appear
on the display. See Engine Oil
Messages on page 529 and
Vehicle Messages (Canadian Base
Level) following. The oil should be
changed as soon as possible.
See Engine Oil on page 109. In
addition to the engine oil life system
monitoring the oil life, additional
maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this
manual. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 112 for
more information.
Remember, the Oil Life display must
be reset after each oil change. It
will not reset itself. Also, be careful
not to reset the Oil Life display
accidentally at any time other than
when the oil has just been changed.
It cannot be reset accurately until
the next oil change. To reset the
engine oil life system press the
SET/CLR button while the Oil Life
display is active. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 1012.
Battery Voltage
This display, available on some
vehicles, shows the current battery
voltage. If the voltage is in the
normal range, the value will display.
For example, the display may read
Battery Voltage 15.0 Volts. The
vehicle's charging system regulates
voltage based on the state of the
battery. The battery voltage can
fluctuate while viewing this
information on the DIC. This is
normal. See Charging System Light
If there is a problem with the battery
charging system, the DIC will
display a message. See Battery
Voltage and Charging Messages on
page 527.
Blank Display
This display shows no information.
Vehicle Messages
Vehicle Messages
(Canada Base Level)
DIC messages display when the
status of the vehicle has changed
and action may be needed to
correct the condition. Multiple
messages appear one after another.
Press any of the DIC buttons on the
turn signal lever to acknowledge
and clear them from the display.
More urgent messages cannot be
cleared from the DIC display. All
messages should be taken
seriously. Clearing messages
will not correct the problem.
On the Canadian base level cluster,
vehicle messages appear as code
numbers.
25: Left front turn indicator failure
26: Left rear turn indicator failure
27: Right front turn indicator failure
28: Right rear turn indicator failure

35: Replace battery in radio remote
control
53: Tighten gas cap
68: Service power steering
75: Service air conditioner
82: Change engine oil soon
84: Engine power is reduced
95: Service airbag
Vehicle Messages
(Canada Uplevel and
United States)
DIC messages display when the
status of the vehicle has changed
and action may be needed to
correct the condition. Multiple
messages appear one after another.
Press any of the DIC buttons on the
turn signal lever to acknowledge
and clear them from the display.
More urgent messages cannot
be cleared from the DIC display.
All messages should be taken

seriously. Clearing messages
will not correct the problem.
On the Canadian uplevel cluster
and on vehicles sold in the United
States, vehicle messages are
displayed as text. The messages
and information about them follow.
5-27
LOW BATTERY
This message is displayed when the
battery voltage is low. See Battery
SERVICE BATTERY
CHARGING SYSTEM
Battery Voltage and

Charging Messages
This message is displayed

when there is a fault in the battery
charging system. Take the vehicle
to your dealer for service.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
Brake System Messages
This message displays when the

vehicle has detected that the
battery voltage is dropping beyond
a reasonable point. The battery
saver system starts reducing certain
features of the vehicle that you may
be able to notice. At the point that
features are disabled, this message
is displayed. It means that the
vehicle is trying to save the charge
in the battery. Turn off unnecessary
accessories to allow the battery to
recharge.
BRAKE FLUID LOW

brake fluid level is low. See Brake
Fluid on page 1023.
RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed as a
reminder that the parking brake is
on. Release it before you attempt to
drive.
5-28
Compass Messages
Door Ajar Messages
CAL
DOOR(S) OPEN

compass needs to be calibrated.
See Compass on page 54.
A vehicle symbol will be displayed

on the DIC showing which door is
open along with this message.
Close the door completely.
Two dashes will be displayed if the

compass needs service. See your
dealer for service.
Cruise Control Messages

APPLY BRAKE BEFORE
CRUISE
If this message displays when
attempting to activate cruise control,
apply the brake pedal and try again.
CRUISE SET TO XXX

cruise control is set and shows the
speed it was set to. See Cruise
Control on page 935 for more
information.
HOOD OPEN
This message will display when
the hood is open. Close the hood
completely.
TRUNK OPEN
This message will display when
the trunk is open. Close the trunk
completely.
Engine Cooling System

Messages
A/C OFF DUE TO HIGH
ENGINE TEMP
engine coolant becomes hotter than
the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot

engine, the air conditioning
compressor automatically turns off.
When the coolant temperature
returns to normal, the air
conditioning compressor turns
back on. You can continue to
drive the vehicle.
If this message continues to appear,
have the system repaired by your
dealer as soon as possible to avoid
damage to the engine.
ENGINE
OVERHEATED IDLE
ENGINE
engine coolant temperature is too
hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
ENGINE
OVERHEATED STOP
ENGINE
This message displays and a
continuous chime sounds if the
engine cooling system reaches
unsafe temperatures for operation.

Stop and turn off the vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so to avoid
severe damage. This message
clears when the engine has cooled
to a safe operating temperature.
HIGH COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
This message displays if the coolant
temperature is hot. See Engine
Overheating on page 1020.
Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
engine oil needs to be changed.
When you change the engine oil, be
sure to reset the Oil Life System.
See Engine Oil Life System on
page 1012 and Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 523 for
information on how to reset the
system. See Engine Oil on
page 109 and Scheduled
Maintenance on page 112 for
more information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP

ENGINE
This message displays if low oil
pressure levels occur. Stop the
vehicle as soon as safely possible
and do not operate it until the cause
of the low oil pressure has been
corrected. Check the oil as soon as
possible and have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer.
5-29
may be reduced. Anytime this

message stays on, the vehicle
should be taken to your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
Fuel System Messages

FUEL LEVEL LOW
vehicle is low on fuel. Refuel as
soon as possible.
Engine Power Messages
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

fuel cap is not on tight. Tighten the
fuel cap.

vehicle's engine power is reduced.
Reduced engine power can affect
the vehicle's ability to accelerate.
If this message is on, but there is no
reduction in performance, proceed
to your destination. The
performance may be reduced the
next time the vehicle is driven. The
vehicle may be driven at a reduced
speed while this message is on, but
maximum acceleration and speed
Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY
battery in the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter needs to be
replaced.
5-30
Lamp Messages
TURN SIGNAL ON
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL ON
This message is displayed if the

turn signal has been left on. Turn
off the turn signal.
This message is displayed when

the automatic light control has been
turned on. See Automatic Headlamp
System on page 63.

Messages
AUTOMATIC LIGHT
CONTROL OFF
automatic light control has been
turned off. See Automatic Headlamp
System on page 63.
XXX TURN INDICATOR

FAILURE
When one of the turn signals is
out, this message displays to show
which bulb needs to be replaced.
See Bulb Replacement on
page 1028 and Replacement Bulbs
on page 1033 for more information
on the turn signal bulb replacement.
PARK ASSIST OFF

park assist system has been turned
off. See Ultrasonic Parking Assist
on page 937.
SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message is displayed if there
is a problem with the park assist
system. Take the vehicle to your
dealer for service.
Ride Control System

Messages
SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL
This message displays when
there is a problem with the Traction
Control System (TCS). See Traction
Control System (TCS) on
page 932.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
This message displays if there
is a problem with the StabiliTrak
system. See StabiliTrak System on
page 933.
Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG
This message displays if there is
a problem with the airbag system.
Take the vehicle to your dealer for
service.
5-31
Security Messages
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
Tire Messages
THEFT ATTEMPTED
This message displays if there is a

problem with the vehicle. Take the
vehicle to your dealer for service.
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR

SYSTEM

Messages

problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS). See Tire
Pressure Monitor Operation on
This message displays if the vehicle

detects a tamper condition.
Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM
problem with the air conditioning
dealer for service.
SERVICE POWER STEERING

problem with the power steering
dealer for service.
SERVICE STEERING
COLUMN LOCK
problem with the steering column
lock. Take the vehicle to your dealer
for service.
TURN STEERING WHEEL

TURN KEY OFF THEN ON
steering column is locked. Try
turning the steering wheel while
turning the vehicle off and then back
on to unlock the steering column.
TURN STEERING WHEEL

START VEHICLE AGAIN
steering column is locked. Try
turning the steering wheel while
starting the vehicle to unlock the
steering column.
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

system is learning new tires. See
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on
TIRE PRESSURE LOW ADD

AIR TO TIRE
On vehicles with the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS), this
message displays when the
pressure in one or more of the
vehicle's tires is low.
There is also an icon with the
warning that will indicate the
location of the low tire.
5-32
The low tire pressure warning light

will also come on. See Tire
Pressure Light on page 519.
Transmission Messages
If a tire pressure message appears

on the DIC, stop as soon as you
can. Inflate the tires by adding air
until the tire pressure is equal to
the values shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Tires
on page 1040, Vehicle Load Limits
on page 911, and Tire Pressure on
page 1047.

problem with the transmission. See
your dealer.
You can receive more than one tire

pressure message at a time. To
read the other messages that may
have been sent at the same time,
press the SET/CLR button. The DIC
also shows the tire pressure values.
See Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 523.
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE

ENGINE
This message displays and a chime
sounds if the transmission fluid in
the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high
can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to
allow the transmission to cool. This
message clears when the fluid
temperature reaches a safe level.
Vehicle Reminder
Messages
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE
WITH CARE
This message displays when ice
conditions are possible.
STEERING COLUMN IS
LOCKED
steering column is locked.
Black plate (33,1)
Vehicle
Personalization
The audio system controls are
used to access the personalization
menus for customizing vehicle
features.
CONFIG (Configuration): Press
to access the Configuration
Settings menu.
MENU knob: Press the center of
this knob to enter the menus and
select menu items. Turn the knob
to scroll through the menus.
BACK: Press to exit or move
backwards in a menu.
Entering the Personalization

Menus
1. Press CONFIG to access the
Configuration Settings menu.
2. Turn the MENU knob to highlight
Vehicle Settings. Press the
CONFIG button until Vehicle is
highlighted on vehicles with
navigation system only.
3. Press the center of the MENU
knob to select the Vehicle
Settings menu. Key myst be in
the run position.
The following list of menu items may
be available:
.
Climate and Air Quality
Comfort and Convenience
.
.
.
Collision/Detection Systems
Languages
Lighting
5-33
Power Door Locks
Remote Locking, Unlocking,

Starting
Return to Factory Settings
Turn the MENU knob to highlight the

menu. Press the knob to select it.
Each of the menus is detailed in the
following information.
Vehicles with a Navigation system
will display a check mark to indicate
this feature is on.
Climate and Air Quality

If equipped, select the Climate and
Air Quality menu and the following
will be displayed:
.
Auto Fan Speed
Air Quality Sensor
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
Auto Defog
Auto Rear Defog
5-34
Auto Fan Speed
Remote Start Auto Heat Seats
This will allow you to select the

automatic fan speed. This feature
sets the climate control fan speed to
maintain the interior temperature.
On vehicles with remote start and

heated seats, the heated seats can
be set to on or off.
Press the MENU knob when

Auto Fan Speed is highlighted to
open the menu. Turn the knob to
highlight High, Medium, or Low.
Press the BACK button to confirm
the selection and move back to
the last menu.
Air Quality Sensor
This will allow you to select whether
the system will operate at high or
low sensitivity. Only vehicles with
the automatic climate control will
have this option.
Press the MENU knob when Air
Quality Sensor is highlighted to
open the menu. Turn the knob to
highlight High Sensitivity or Low
Sensitivity. Press the BACK button
to confirm the selection and move
back to the last menu.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats is
highlighted to open the menu. Turn
the knob to highlight On or Off.
the selection and move back to the
last menu.
Auto Defog
When turned On and high humidity
is detected, the climate control
system may adjust to outside
air supply and turn on the air
conditioner or the heater. The fan
speed may slightly increase to
help prevent fogging. When high
humidity is no longer detected, the
system will return to its prior
operation.
Press the MENU knob when Auto
Defog is highlighted to open the
menu. Turn the knob to highlight
On or Off.

last menu.
Auto Rear Defog
When on, this feature turns on the
rear defogger at vehicle start when
the interior temperature is cold and
likely fog. The Auto rear defog
function can be disabled by
pressing 1. When OFF, the
feature can be turned on by
pressing 1. See Rear Window
Defogger under Climate Control
Systems on page 81 for more
information.
Rear Defog is highlighted to open
the menu. Turn the knob to highlight
On or Off. Press the knob to confirm
last menu.
Black plate (35,1)

Comfort and Convenience
Select the Comfort and
Convenience menu and Chime
Volume will be displayed.
Chime Volume
This allows the selection of the
chime volume level.
Press the MENU knob when Chime
Volume is highlighted. Turn the knob
to select Normal or High. Press the
BACK button to confirm and go
Collision/Detection Systems
If equipped, select the Collision/
Detection Systems menu and Park
Assist will be displayed.
Park Assist
This allows the Ultrasonic Parking
Assist feature, audible only, to be
turned on or off.
Press the MENU knob when Park

Assist is highlighted. Turn the knob
to select On or Off. Press the knob
to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Exit Lighting
Languages
5-35
This allows the selection of how

long the exterior lamps stay on
when leaving the vehicle when it is
dark outside.
English
Francais
Press the MENU knob when Exit

Lighting is highlighted. Turn the
knob to select Off, 30 Seconds,
1 Minute, or 2 Minutes. Press the
BACK button to confirm and go
Espanol
Vehicle Locator Lights
Select the Language menu and the

following will be displayed:
Turn the MENU knob to select the

language. Press BACK to return to
the last menu.
Lighting
Select the Lighting menu and the
.
Exit Lighting
Vehicle Locator Lights
This allows the vehicle locator lights

to be turned on or off. When on, the
head lamps and back up lamps will
flash when the keb fob unbutton K
is pressed.
Press the MENU knob when Vehicle
Locator Lights is highlighted to open
the menu. Turn the MENU knob to
highlight On or Off. Press MENU to
select On or Off. Press the BACK
button to confirm the selection and
move back to the last menu.
5-36
Black plate (36,1)
Power Door Locks
Delayed Door Lock
Select Power Door Locks and the

When on, this feature will delay

the locking of the doors until
five seconds after the last door is
closed. You will hear three chimes
to signal delayed locking is in use.
Press either the power lock button
or the lock button on the RKE
transmitter twice to override the
delayed locking feature and
immediately lock all of the doors.
Auto Door Unlock
Delayed Door Lock
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically unlock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Door Unlock is highlighted. Turn
the knob to select All Doors, Driver
Door, or Off. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.

Delayed Door Lock is highlighted
to select On or Off. Press BACK to
return to the last menu.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out
When on, all doors will lock. The
driver door will then unlock if door
locking is requested while the
drivers door is open and disables
Delayed Door Lock feature.
Even when this feature is off, the

driver is protected from accidental
lockouts when the key is in the
ignition.
If Off is selected, the Delayed
Door Lock feature may be enabled
through an additional menu
selection.
Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out is
highlighted to select On or Off.
Press BACK to return to the
last menu.
Auto Door Lock
This allows selection of which of the
doors will automatically lock when
the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
Door Lock is highlighted. Turn the
knob to select On or Off. Press the
knob to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Black plate (37,1)

Remote Locking, Unlocking,
Starting
Door Unlock or Remote Door

Unlock
Select Remote Locking, Unlocking,

Starting and the following will be
displayed (depending on system):
This allows selection of which doors

will unlock when pressing the unlock
button on the RKE transmitter.
Remote Lock Feedback
Door Unlock or Remote Door

Unlock
Remote Unlock Light Feedback
Remote Start
Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type of
feedback is given when locking the
vehicle with the RKE transmitter.
Remote Lock Feedback is
highlighted. Turn the knob to
select Lights and Horn, Lights
Only, Horn Only, or Off. Press the
knob to confirm and go back to the
last menu.
Press the MENU knob when Door

Unlock is highlighted. Turn the knob
to select All Doors or Driver Door
Only. When set to Driver Door Only,
the driver door will unlock the first
time the unlock button is pressed
and all doors will unlock when the
button is pressed a second time.
When set to All Doors, all of the
doors will unlock at the first press of
the unlock button. Press the knob to
confirm and go back to the
last menu.
If equipped, this allows selection of
what type of feedback is given when
unlocking the vehicle with the RKE
transmitter.
5-37

is highlighted. Turn the knob to
select On or Off. Press the knob
last menu.
Remote Start
If equipped, this allows selection to
turn on or off Remote Start.
Remote Start is highlighted. Turn
the knob to select On or Off. Press
the knob to confirm and go back to
the last menu.
Return to Factory Settings

Select Return to Factory Settings to
return all vehicle personalization to
the default settings. Turn the knob
to select Yes or No. Press the knob
last menu.
5-38
Black plate (38,1)
2 NOTES
Lighting
Lighting
Exterior Lighting
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . .
Headlamp High/Low-Beam
Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Headlamp
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . .
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Front Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The exterior lamps control has four

positions:
Exterior Lamp Controls
O (Off): Briefly turn to this position

to turn the automatic light control off
or on again.
AUTO (Automatic): Turns the
headlamps on automatically at
normal brightness, together with
the following:
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-4
Interior Lighting
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exterior Lighting
6-1
6-4
6-4
6-5
6-5
6-5
6-6
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Battery Power Protection . . . . . . 6-6
6-1
The exterior lamps control is located

on the instrument panel to the
outboard side of the steering
column.
It controls the following systems:
.
Headlamps
Taillamps
.
.
Parking Lamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Fog Lamps
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Side Marker Lamps
; (Parking Lamps):
Turns the
parking lamps on together with the
following:
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Side Marker Lamps
6-2
Lighting
5 (Headlamps): Turns the

headlamps on together with the
lamps listed below. A warning chime
sounds if the driver door is opened
when the ignition switch is off and
the headlamps are on.
Headlamp High/
Low-Beam Changer
Parking Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
2 3 Headlamp High/LowBeam
Side Marker Lamps
Changer: Push the turn signal/lane

change lever away from you to turn
the high beams on.
See Front Fog Lamps on page 64.
To flash the high beams, pull the

turn signal/lane change lever all the
way toward you. Then release it.
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL)
# (Front Fog Lamps): For

vehicles with fog lamps, press to
turn the lamps on or off.
Flash-to-Pass
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can

make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
Fully functional daytime running
lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
Pull the lever toward you to return to

low beams.
When the lights are on, ; will be

lit. See Lamps On Reminder on
page 522.
This indicator light turns on in the

instrument panel cluster when the
highbeam headlamps are on.
This indicator light turns on in the

instrument panel cluster when the
DRL are on.
A light sensor on top of the
instrument panel makes the DRL
work, so be sure it is not covered.
Lighting
The DRL system makes the low
beam headlamps come on at a
reduced brightness when the
following conditions are met:
.
The ignition is in the ON/

RUN mode.
The exterior lamps control is

in AUTO.
The engine is running.
When the DRL are on, only the low

beam headlamps, at a reduced level
of brightness, will be on. The
taillamps, sidemarker, instrument
panel, and other lamps will not
be on.
The headlamps automatically
change from DRL to the regular
headlamps depending on the
darkness of the surroundings. The
other lamps that come on with the
headlamps will also come on.
6-3
When it is bright enough outside,

the headlamps go off and the DRL
come on.
To turn the DRL lamps off or on
again, turn the exterior lamps
control to the off position and then
release. For vehicles first sold in
Canada, the DRL lamps cannot be
turned off.
Automatic Headlamp
System
When it is dark enough outside and
the exterior lamps control is in the
automatic position, the headlamps
come on automatically. See Exterior
Lamp Controls on page 61.
The vehicle has a light sensor

located on top of the instrument
panel. Make sure it is not covered,
or the headlamps will be on when
they are not needed.
The system may also turn on the
headlamps when driving through a
parking garage or tunnel.
6-4
Lighting
Hazard Warning Flashers

Signals
If after signaling a turn or lane

change the arrow flashes rapidly or
does not come on, a signal bulb
may be burned out. Have the bulbs
replaced. If the bulb is not burned
out, check the fuse. See Fuses and
Circuit Breakers on page 1034 for
more information.
Front Fog Lamps
| Hazard Warning Flasher:

Press and momentarily hold this
button located on the instrument
panel above the climate control
system, to make the front and
rear turn signal lamps flash on
and off. This warns others that
you are having trouble. Press and
momentarily hold again to turn the
flashers off.
An arrow on the instrument panel

cluster will flash in the direction of
the turn or lane change.
Move the lever all the way up or
down to signal a turn.
Raise or lower the lever until the
arrow starts to flash to signal a lane
change. The turn signal flashes
three times.
The lever returns to its starting
position when it is released.
For vehicles with front fog lamps,

the button is located on the
outboard side of the instrument
panel.
Black plate (5,1)
Lighting
The ignition must be on to turn on
the fog lamps.
Interior Lighting
Courtesy Lamps
#:
Instrument Panel
Illumination Control
The courtesy lamps come on

automatically when any door is
opened and the dome lamp is
in the door position.
Press to turn the fog lamps

on or off. An indicator light on the
instrument panel cluster comes on
when the fog lamps are on.
6-5
Dome Lamps
The fog lamps come on together

with the parking lamps.
If the highbeam headlamps are
turned on, the fog lamps will turn off.
If the highbeam headlamps are
turned off, the fog lamps will turn
back on again.
Some localities have laws that
require the headlamps to be on
along with the fog lamps.
This feature controls the brightness

of the instrument panel controls and
infotainment display screen. The
thumbwheel is located to the left
of the steering column on the
instrument panel.
D (Instrument Panel
Brightness): Turn the thumbwheel
up or down and hold, to brighten or
dim the instrument panel controls
and infotainment display screen.
The dome lamp controls are located

in the headliner.
( (Dome Lamp Override):
Press
to turn the lamps off, even when a
door is open.
6-6
Lighting
H (Door): Press to turn the lamps

on automatically when a door is
opened.
' (On):
Press to turn on the

dome lamps.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located in

the overhead console.
# / $ : Press the button near

each lamp to turn it on or off.
Lighting Features
Entry Lighting
The headlamps, parking lamps,
taillamps, and most of the interior
lights turn on briefly, when the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) K is
pressed. After about 30 seconds the
exterior lamps turn off, and then the
dome and remaining interior lights
will dim to off. Entry lighting can be
disabled manually by changing the
ignition out of the OFF position,
or by pressing the RKE Q button.
This feature can be changed. See
Vehicle Personalization on
page 533.
Exit Lighting
The headlamps, taillamps, parking
lamps, backup lamps, and license
plate lamps come on at night, or in
areas with limited lighting, when the
key is removed from the ignition.
The dome lamps also come on

when the key is removed from the
ignition. The exterior lamps and
dome lamps remain on after the
door is closed for a set amount of
time, then automatically turn off.
The exterior lamps turn off
immediately by turning the
exterior lamps control off.
The exit lighting feature can
be changed. See Vehicle
Battery Power Protection

The battery saver feature is
designed to protect the vehicle's
battery.
If some interior lights are left on
and the ignition is turned off, the
battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after
some time.
Infotainment System
Infotainment
System
Introduction
Infotainment
Introduction
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . .
Overview (Base Level) . . . . . . . .
Overview (Uplevel) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-4
7-6
Read the following pages to

become familiar with the audio
system's features.
{ WARNING
Taking your eyes off the road
for extended periods could
cause a crash resulting in injury
or death to you or others. Do
not give extended attention to
entertainment tasks while driving.
Radio
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . 7-17
Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Audio Players
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Phone
Bluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-22
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-24
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28
This system provides access to

many audio and nonaudio listings.
To minimize taking your eyes off the
road while driving, do the following
while the vehicle is parked:
.
Become familiar with the

operation and controls of the
audio system.
7-1
Set up the tone, speaker

adjustments, and preset radio
stations.
For more information, see Defensive

Driving on page 92.
The vehicle has Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP,
the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) on page 920 for more
information.
Navigation/Radio System
For vehicles with a navigation radio
system, see the separate navigation
manual.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
The theft-deterrent feature works by
learning a portion of the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to
the infotainment system. The
infotainment system does not
operate if it is stolen or moved
to a different vehicle.
7-2
Black plate (2,1)
Infotainment System
Overview (Base Level)
D.
k
.
E.
F.
CD: Pauses playback, and

stops playback.
l
.
Radio: Seeks the next

station.
CD: Selects the next track

or fast forwards within a
track.
CLOCK
.
Opens the clock menu.
G. INFO
A.
O
.
C.
Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. Buttons 1 to 6
.
Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.
Radio: Shows available

information about the
current station.
CD: Shows available

current track.
g
.
Radio: Seeks the previous

station.
CD: Selects the previous
track or rewinds within a
track.
H. TONE
.
Opens the tone menu.
Black plate (3,1)
Infotainment System
I.
AS
.
J.
M. CONFIG
Radio: Opens the auto
store stations list.
BAND
.
N.
Selects the radio when

listening to a different
audio source.
L.
Selects the CD player or

an external audio source.
P.
Insert a CD.
Opens the phone

main menu.
Turn to open menus,

highlight menu items,
or set numeric values while
in a menu.
Press to select menu

items.
Radio: Manually selects

radio stations.
CD: Selects tracks.
Mutes the audio system.

Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
BACK
.
Menu: Moves one

level back.
Character Input: Deletes

the last character.
CD Slot
.
Opens the settings menu.
O. FAV
K. CD/AUX
.
Q. MENU
5\>
.
Changes the band while

listening to the radio.
7-3
R.
Y
.
Removes a disc from the

CD slot.
7-4
Black plate (4,1)
Infotainment System
Overview (Uplevel)
D.
u
.
E.
k
.
F.
A.
O
.
C.
Turns the system on or off
and adjusts the volume.
B. Buttons 1 to 6
.
Radio: Saves and selects

favorite stations.
CD: Pauses playback, and

stops playback.
w
.
G.
CD: Moves up one folder

level while playing an MP3.
CD: Moves back one folder

level while playing an MP3.
l
.
Radio: Seeks the next

station.
CD: Selects the next track

or fast forwards within a
track.
H. CLOCK
Radio: Seeks the previous

station.
CD: Selects the previous

track or rewinds within a
track.
Opens the clock menu.
Black plate (5,1)
Infotainment System
I.
INFO
.
J.
CD Slot
Radio: Shows available

current station.
O. CONFIG
CD: Shows available

current track.
P.
Opens the tone menu.
K. AS
.
Insert a CD.
Radio: Opens the auto

store stations list.
Opens the phone

main menu.
Mutes the audio system.
Radio: Opens the
favorites list.
R. BACK
Changes the band while

listening to the radio.
Menu: Moves one

level back.
Selects the radio when

listening to a different
audio source.
Character Input: Deletes

the last character.
M. CD/AUX
Selects the CD player or
an external audio source.
Turn to open menus,

highlight menu items,
or set numeric values while
in a menu.
Press to select menu

items.
Radio: Manually selects

radio stations.
CD: Selects tracks.
Opens the settings menu.
Q. FAV
BAND
S. MENU
5\>
TONE
.
L.
N.
7-5
T.
Y
.
Removes a disc from the

CD slot.
7-6
Black plate (6,1)
Infotainment System
Operation
MENU System (Base Level)
Controls
The menu system for the base level

infotainment system appears on the
top half of the display screen.
The infotainment system is

operated by using the pushbuttons,
multifunction knobs, menus shown
on the display, and steering wheel
controls, if equipped.
Menu Icons
The menu icons indicate the
following:
O (Volume/Power):
Press to
turn the system on and off.
Controls
Automatic SwitchOff
The MENU knob and the BACK

button are used to navigate the
menu system.
If the infotainment system has

been turned on after the ignition is
turned off, the system will turn off
automatically after 10 minutes.
MENU Knob: Press to:
Volume Control
Turn to adjust
the volume.
5 / > (Phone/Mute):
Press 5 /
to mute the infotainment system.
Press 5 / > again, or turn
the O knob to cancel mute.
C. A single right arrow indicates

that the first submenu level is
active. Two right arrows indicate
that the second submenu level
is active.
D. The down arrow indicates that
that more options are available
in the current menu.
Turning the System On or Off
O (Volume/Power):
B. The angled arrow indicates that

a submenu with more options is
available.
>
A. The up and down arrows

indicate that the main menu is
active.
Enter the menu system.
Select or activate the menu

option.
Confirm a set value.
Turn a system setting on or off.
Black plate (7,1)
Infotainment System
Turn to:
.
Activating a Setting
Select a menu, or a menu

option.
Turning a Function On or Off
BACK: Press to:

.
Exit a menu.
Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.
1. Press the MENU knob to enter

the displayed menu.
Delete the last character in a

sequence.
2. Turn the MENU knob to display

the setting.
1. Turn the MENU knob to scroll

through available menu options.
3. Press the MENU knob to

activate the setting.

the displayed menu.
Setting a Value
2. Turn the MENU knob to turn the

function on or off.

the option.
3. Press the MENU knob to confirm

the setting.
Submenus
A single right arrow indicates that a
submenu with other options is
available.
A double right arrow indicates that a
second submenu with other options
is available.
2. Turn the MENU knob to change

the current value of the setting.
the setting.
Select a value.
Selecting a Menu Option
7-7

the displayed menu.
7-8
Black plate (8,1)
Infotainment System
Entering a Character Sequence
Controls
Selecting a Menu Option
The MENU knob and the BACK

button are used to navigate the
menu system.
MENU Knob: Press to:

the displayed menu.
2. Turn the MENU knob to adjust
the highlighted character.
Enter the menu system.
Select or activate the highlighted

menu option.
Confirm a set value.
Turn a system setting on or off.

the character.
Turn to:
.
Highlight a menu option.
Press the BACK button to delete the

last character in the sequence or
press and hold to delete the entire
character sequence.
Select a value.
MENU System (Uplevel)

The menu system for the uplevel
infotainment system appears on the
display screen.
BACK: Press to:

.
Exit a menu.
Return from a submenu screen

to the previous menu screen.
Delete the last character in a

sequence.
1. Turn the MENU knob to move

the highlighted bar.
the highlighted option.
Submenus
An arrow on the righthand edge of
the menu indicates that it has a
submenu with other options.
Black plate (9,1)
Infotainment System
Activating a Setting
Turning a Function On or Off
7-9
Press the BACK button to delete the

last character in the sequence or
press and hold to delete the entire
character sequence.
Audio Settings

the setting.

the function.
2. Press the MENU knob to

activate the setting.
2. Press the MENU knob to turn

the function on or off.
Setting a Value
Entering a Character Sequence
The audio settings can be set for

each radio band and each audio
player source.
To quickly reset an audio setting
value to 0:
1. Press the TONE button.
2. Select the audio setting.
3. Press and hold the MENU
button until the value
changes to 0.
Press the BACK button to go back
to the Tone Settings menu.
1. Turn the MENU knob to change

the current value of the setting.

the character.

the setting.

the character.
7-10
Black plate (10,1)
Infotainment System
Adjusting the Treble, Midrange,

and Bass
System Settings
The level of volume compensation

can be selected, or the auto volume
feature can be turned off.
Configuring the Number of

Favorite Pages
2. Select Treble, Midrange,

or Bass.
To configure the number of available

favorite pages:
3. Select the value.
1. Press the CONFIG button.
3. Select Auto Volume.

2. Select Radio Settings.
4. Select the setting.
3. Select Radio Favorites.
5. Press the BACK button

to go back to the System
Configuration menu.
Adjusting the Fader and Balance

2. Select Fader or Balance.
3. Select the value.
Adjusting the EQ (Equalizer)
For vehicles that have an equalizer:
2. Select EQ presets.
4. Select the number of available

favorite pages.
Configuration menu.
Auto Volume
The auto volume feature
automatically adjusts the radio
volume to compensate for road and
wind noise as the vehicle speeds up
or slows down, so that the volume
level is consistent.

Maximum Startup Volume

The maximum volume played when
the radio is first turned on can
be set.
3. Select Maximum Startup
Volume.
Configuration menu.
Black plate (11,1)
Infotainment System
Radio
AM-FM Radio
Control Buttons
The buttons used to control the
radio are:
BAND: Press to turn the radio on
and choose between AM, FM, and
XM, if equipped.
MENU: Turn to navigate the
available menus and to search for
stations.
INFO: Press to display additional
information that may be available for
the current song.
g/l:
Press to search for
stations.
FAV: Press to open the favorites
list and select the favorites page.
1 to 6: Press to select preset
stations.
AS (Autostore): Press to open the
autostore list.
7-11
RDS (Radio Data System)
Selecting a Band
The radio may have RDS. The RDS

feature is available for use only on
FM stations that broadcast RDS
information. This feature only works
when the information from the radio
station is available. In rare cases,
a radio station could broadcast
incorrect information that causes the
radio features to work improperly.
If this happens, contact the radio
station.
Press the BAND button to choose

AM, FM, or XM, if equipped. The
last station that was playing starts
playing again.
While the radio is tuned to an

FM-RDS station, the station name
or call letters display.
Radio Menus
Radio menus are available for AM
and FM.
Turn the MENU knob to open the
main radio menu for that band.
Selecting a Station
Seek Tuning
If the radio station is not known:
Briefly press g or l to
automatically search for the next
available station. If a station is not
found, the radio switches to a more
sensitive search level. If a station
still is not found, the frequency that
was last active begins to play.
If the radio station is known:
Press and hold g or l until the
station on the display is reached,
then release the button.
Manual Tuning
Turn the TUNE knob to select the
frequency on the display.
7-12
Black plate (12,1)
Infotainment System
1. Turn the MENU knob.
To search for a programming type

determined by station:
To cancel the station search, press

the MENU Knob.
2. Select Favorites List.
Storing a Station as a Favorite
3. Select the station.
2. Select FM category list. A list of

all programming types available
displays.
Stations from all bands can be

stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
3. Select the programming type.

A list of stations that transmit
programming of the selected
type displays.
Up to six stations can be stored in

each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
Storing Stations
The category lists are updated when

the station lists are updated.
To store the station to a position in

the list, press the corresponding
button 1 to 6 until a beep is heard.
Favorites List
Station Lists
2. Select AM or FM Station List. All
receivable stations in the current
reception area are displayed. If a
station list has not been created,
an automatic station search
is done.
Category Lists
Most stations that broadcast an
RDS program type code specify the
type of programming transmitted.
Some stations change the program
type code depending on the
content. The system stores the RDS
stations sorted by program type in
the FM category list.
Updating Station & Category Lists

If stations stored in the station list
can no longer be received:
2. Select Update AM or FM Station
List, if the stations stored in
the station list are no longer
received. A station search will
be completed and the first
station in the updated list
will play.
Retrieving Stations
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to switch to another
favorite page. Briefly press one of
the 1 to 6 buttons to retrieve the
station.
Black plate (13,1)
Infotainment System
7-13
Autostore Stations
Satellite Radio
Control Buttons
AS (Autostore): Autostore
searches and stores six FM and
six AM stations with the strongest
signal. To use autostore:
Vehicles with an XM Satellite Radio

tuner and a valid XM Satellite Radio
subscription can receive XM
programming.
The buttons used to control the XM

radio are:
1. Press RADIO/BAND to select

FM or AM.
2. Press AS for at least

two seconds until a beep
sounds. SEARCH displays on
the radio, followed by the
number of stations found.
3. The radio will automatically store
the six strongest stations found
as autostore presets.
Press the AS button to alternate
between the autostore stations and
favorites.
AS displays on the radio when using
autostore presets.
Autostore does not delete
previously stored favorite stations.
Autostore does not function with XM
radio stations.
XM is a satellite radio service that is

based in the 48 contiguous United
States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM Satellite Radio has a wide
variety of programming and
commercial-free music, coast to
coast, and in digital-quality sound.
A service fee is required to receive
the XM service. If XM Service needs
to be reactivated, the radio will
display "No Subscription Please
Renew" on channel XM1. For
more information, contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and
www.xmradio.ca or call
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
RADIO/BAND: Press to turn the

radio on and choose between AM,
FM, and XM.
g/l:
Press to go to the
previous or next channel.
FAV: Press to open the
favorites list.
1 to 6: Press to select a favorite.
MENU: Turn to select a channel.
information that may be available
about the current song.
k (Play/Pause): Press to pause

time shifted content, if equipped.
Selecting the XM Band
Press the RADIO/BAND button to
choose between the AM, FM, and
XM bands. The last channel played
in that band begins to play when
that band is selected.
7-14
Black plate (14,1)
Infotainment System
XM Categories
XM channels are organized in
categories.
Selecting a Channel
Using g or l
.
Removing or Adding Categories

Channels in a category that have
been removed can still be accessed
by using the g or l buttons,
or the MENU knob.
To add or remove categories:
3. Select XM Categories.
the category.
5. Press the MENU knob to remove
or add the category.
Selecting an XM Channel
XM channels can be selected by
using g, l, the MENU knob,
or the MENU system.
Selecting a Channel Using the

MENU System
Press and release g or l to

go to the previous or next
channel.
Press and hold g or l to

scroll through the previous or
next channel until the channel is
reached.
4. Select the channel.
Selecting a Channel Using the

MENU Knob
To select an XM channel using the
MENU knob:
Turn the MENU knob to highlight
an XM channel. The channel is
selected after a short delay.
To select a channel using
the MENU:
1. Turn the MENU knob and select
Channel List.
2. Select the desired channel.
2. Select XM Category List.

3. Select the category.
Storing an XM Channel as a
Favorite
Channels from all bands can be
stored in any order in the favorite
pages.
Up to six channels can be stored in
each favorite page and the number
of available favorite pages can
be set.
Storing a Channel as a Favorite
To store the channel to a position
in the list, press and hold the
corresponding 1 to 6 button until
the channel can be heard again.
Black plate (15,1)
Infotainment System
Retrieving Channels
Press the FAV button to open a
favorite page or to change to
another favorite page. Briefly
press one of the 1 to 6 buttons
to retrieve the channel.
XM Messages
XL (Explicit Language
Channels): These channels, or any
others, can be blocked by request,
by calling 1-800-929-2100 in the
U.S., and 1-877-438-9677 in
Canada.
XM Updating: The encryption code
in the receiver is being updated. No
action is required. This process
should take no longer than
30 seconds.
Loading XM: The audio system is
acquiring and processing audio and
text data. No action is needed. This
message should disappear shortly.
Channel Off Air: This channel is
not currently in service. Tune in to
another channel.
Channel Unauth: This channel is

blocked or cannot be received with
your XM Subscription package.
Channel Unavailable: This
previously assigned channel is no
longer assigned. Tune to another
station.
No Artist Info: The system is
working properly. No artist
information is available at this
time on this channel.
No Title Info: The system is
working properly. No song title
No CAT Info: The system is
working properly. No category
No Information: The system
is working properly. No text or
informational messages are
available at this time on this
channel.
7-15
No Subscription Please Renew:

XM subscription needs to be
reactivated. Contact XM at
www.xmradio.com or
1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.
and www.xmradio.ca or
1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
No XM Signal: The system is
working properly. The vehicle may
be in a location where the XM signal
is being blocked. When the vehicle
is moved into an open area, the
signal should return.
CAT Not Found: The system is
working properly. There are no
channels available for the selected
category.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,
this message alternates with the XM
Radio eightdigit radio ID label. This
label is needed to activate the
service.
Unknown: If this message is
received when tuned to channel 0,
there could be a receiver fault.
Consult with your dealer.
7-16
Black plate (16,1)
Infotainment System
Check Antenna: If this message

does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
XM Not Available: If this message
does not clear within a short period
of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer.
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static
can occur during normal radio
reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience
accessories, and external electronic
devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is
interference or static, unplug the
item from the accessory power
outlet.
FM
FM signals only reach about 16 to

65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although the
radio has a built-in electronic circuit
that automatically works to reduce
interference, some static can occur,
especially around tall buildings or
hills, causing the sound to fade in
and out.
XM Satellite Radio Service gives

digital radio reception from coast to
coast in the 48 contiguous United
States, and in Canada. Just as
with FM, tall buildings or hills can
interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and
out. In addition, traveling or standing
under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or tunnels may cause loss
of the XM signal for a period of time.
AM
The range for most AM stations is
greater than for FM, especially at
night. The longer range can cause
station frequencies to interfere
with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations
boost the power levels during the
day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also
occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio
reception. When this happens, try
reducing the treble on the radio.
Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage may cause
interference with the vehicle's radio.
This interference may occur when
making or receiving phone calls,
charging the phone's battery,
or simply having the phone on. This
interference can cause an increased
level of static while listening to the
radio. If static is received while
listening to the radio, unplug the
cellular phone and turn it off.
Black plate (17,1)
Infotainment System
Satellite Radio Antenna

The XM Satellite Radio antenna is
located on the roof of the vehicle.
Keep the antenna clear of
obstructions for clear radio
reception.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the
performance of the XM system may
be affected if the sunroof is open.
Multi-Band Antenna
The multi-band antenna is on the
roof of the vehicle. The antenna is
used for the AMFM radio, OnStar,
the XM Satellite Radio Service
System, and GPS (Global
Positioning System), if the vehicle
has these features. Keep the
antenna clear of obstructions for
clear reception.
Audio Players
CD Player
The CD player can play audio CDs
and MP3 CDs.
The CD player will not play
8 cm (3 in) CDs.
Care of CDs
Sound quality can be reduced due
to disc quality, recording method,
quality of the music recorded, and
how the disc has been handled.
Handle discs carefully and store
them in their original cases or other
protective cases away from direct
sunlight and dust. If the bottom
surface of a disc is damaged, the
disc may not play properly or at all.
Do not touch the bottom surface of
a disc while handling it; this could
damage the surface. Pick up discs
by grasping the outer edges or the
edge of the hole and the outer edge.
If the bottom surface of a disc is
dirty, take a soft lintfree cloth,
or dampen a clean soft cloth in a
7-17
mild neutral detergent solution

mixed with water, and clean it.
Wipe the disc from the center to
the outer edge.
Care of the CD Player
Do not add a label to a disc, as it
could get caught in the CD player.
If a label is needed, label the
top of the recorded disc with a
marking pen.
Do not use disc lens cleaners
because they could contaminate the
lens of the disc optics and damage
the CD player.
Notice: If a label is added to a
CD, more than one CD is inserted
into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched
or damaged CDs, the CD player
could be damaged. While using
the CD player, use only CDs in
good condition without any label,
load one CD at a time, and keep
the CD player and the loading slot
free of foreign materials, liquids,
and debris.
7-18
Black plate (18,1)
Infotainment System
Control Buttons
Removing a CD
The buttons used to control the CD

player are:
Press
CD/AUX: Press to use the CD

player.
l/g:
Press to select tracks or

to fast forward or rewind within a
track.
information about the current track
that may be available.
TUNE: Turn to select tracks.
MENU: Turn to enter the menu.
SELECT: Press to select an item.
Y:
Press to eject the disc.
Y.
Using the CD Menu:

The disc is pushed out of the

CD slot.
2. Select Tracks list.
If the disc is not removed after it is

ejected, it is pulled back in after a
few seconds.
Playing Tracks in Random Order
Playing a CD or MP3 CD
Press the CD/AUX button if there is
a disc in the player; it begins
playing.
Information about the disc and
current track is shown on the
display depending on the data
stored.
Inserting a CD
Selecting a CD Track
With the printed side facing up,

insert a disc into the CD slot until it
is drawn in.
Using the control buttons:

.
Press g or l to select the

previous or next track.
Turn the TUNE knob.
3. Select the track.

Turn the MENU knob and then set
Shuffle Songs to On.
Fast Forward and Rewind
Press and hold l or g to fast
forward or rewind within the current
track.
Selecting an MP3 Track
Using the control buttons:
.
Press g or l to select the

previous or next track.
Turn the TUNE knob.
Infotainment System
Using the CD Menu:
To search for tracks:
2. Select Playlists/Folders.
2. Select Search.
3. Select the playlist or folder.

3. Select: Playlists, Artists, Albums,

Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
Searching for MP3 Tracks
The search feature may take some

time to display the information after
reading the disc due to the amount
of information stored on the disc.
FM automatically plays while the
disc is being read.
Tracks can be searched by:
.
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Song Titles
Genres
Folder View
7-19
Auxiliary Devices
The optional AUX input allows
portable devices to connect to the
vehicle using the 3.5 mm (1/8 in)
auxiliary jack or USB port.
Portable devices are controlled by
using the menu system described in
The AUX input/USB port is located

in the center console. Remove the
cover to access and replace when
not in use.
3.5 mm Jack
Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to
the auxiliary input jack to use a
portable audio player.
Playback of an audio device that is
connected to the 3.5 mm jack can
only be controlled using the controls
on the device.
7-20
Black plate (20,1)
Infotainment System
Adjusting the Volume

Turn the O knob to adjust the
volume of the infotainment system
after the volume level has been set
on the portable audio device.
Connecting and Controlling

an iPod
Not all iPods can be controlled by
the infotainment system.

Song Titles, Podcasts, Genres,
Audiobooks, or Composers.
Connecting an iPod
Shuffle
USB Port
Connect the iPod to the USB port.
For vehicles with a USB port, the

following devices may be connected
and controlled by the infotainment
system.
Searching for a Track
Turn the MENU knob and set

Shuffle Songs (Random) to On or
Off, then press the BACK button to
return to the main screen.
.
.
.
.
Tracks that are found can be

searched for by:
On: Plays tracks in the current

folder in random order.
iPods
Playlists
PlaysForSure Devices (PFD)
Artists
USB Drives
Albums
Zunes
Song Titles
Podcasts
Genres
Audiobooks

Repeat to On or Off, then press the
BACK button to return the main
screen.
Composers
On: Repeats the current track.
Not all iPods, PFDs, USB drives,

and Zunes are compatible with the
infotainment system. Devices are
also charged while plugged into the
USB port.

2. Select Search.
Off: Plays tracks in the current

folder in sequential order.
Repeat
Off: Starts playback from the

beginning of the current track
after the last track finishes.
Black plate (21,1)
Infotainment System
Connecting and Controlling a
PlaysForSure Device (PFD)
or Zune

Song Titles, Podcasts,
or Genres.
Connecting a PFD or Zune
Connect the PFD or Zune to the

USB port.
Shuffle Functionality

Tracks can be searched for by:

Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
or Off.
On: Plays current tracks in
random order.
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Off: Plays current tracks in

sequential order.
Song Titles
Repeat Functionality
Podcasts
Genres

Repeat to On or Off.

2. Select Search.
Repeat On: Repeats the current

track.
Repeat Off: Starts playback from
the beginning of the current track
7-21
Connecting and Controlling a

USB Drive
The infotainment system can only
play back .mp3 and .wma files from
a USB drive.
Only the first 10,000 songs are
recognized on the device.
When a device is not supported, the
message No supported data found.
You can safely disconnect the
device appears.
Connecting a USB Drive
Connect the USB drive to the
USB port.
It is normal for the search feature
to take some time to display the
information after reading the device
due to the amount of information
stored.
Files that do not have any meta
data stored in the ID3 tag display
as Unknown.
7-22
Black plate (22,1)
Infotainment System
Tracks can be searched for by:

.
Playlists*
Artists
Albums
Song Titles
Genres
Folder View
*This only displays if a playlist is

found on the device.
2. Select Search.
Song Titles, Genres,
or Folder View.
Shuffle Functionality
Phone

Shuffle Songs (Random) to On
or Off.
Bluetooth (Overview)
On: Plays current tracks in random

order.
Off: Plays current tracks in
sequential order.
For vehicles equipped with

Bluetooth capability, the system
can interact with many cell phones,
allowing:
.
Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.
Sharing of the cell phones

address book or contact list
with the vehicle.
Repeat Functionality
Repeat to On or Off.
Repeat On: Repeats the current
track.
Repeat Off: Starts playback from
the beginning of the current track
To minimize driver distraction,

before driving, and with the vehicle
parked:
.
Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.
Organize the phone book and
contact lists clearly and delete
duplicate or rarely used entries.
If possible, program speed dial
or other shortcuts.
Review the controls and

operation of the infotainment
system.
Infotainment System
.
Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.

The system may not work with
all cell phones. See Pairing a
Phone in this section for more
information.
If the cell phone has voice
dialing capability, learn to use
that feature to access the
address book or contact list. See
Voice Pass-Thru in this section
See Storing and Deleting Phone
Numbers in this section for
more information.
{ WARNING
When using a cell phone, it can
be distracting to look too long or
too often at the screen of the
phone or the infotainment
(navigation) system. Taking
your eyes off the road too long
or too often could cause a crash
resulting in injury or death. Focus
your attention on driving.
Vehicles with a Bluetooth system

can use a Bluetoothcapable cell
phone with a HandsFree Profile to
make and receive phone calls. The
infotainment system and voice
recognition are used to control the
system. The system can be used
while the ignition is in ON/RUN or
ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of
the Bluetooth system can be up to
9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support
all functions and not all phones work
with the Bluetooth system. See
www.gm.com/bluetooth for more
information about compatible
phones.
Bluetooth Controls
Use the buttons located on the
infotainment system and the
steering wheel to operate the
Bluetooth system.
b / g (Push To Talk): Press to

answer incoming calls, confirm
system information, and start
voice recognition.
7-23
$ / i (End Call/Mute): Press to

end a call, reject a call, or cancel an
operation.
Infotainment System Controls
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using
the infotainment controls, see
5 \ > (Phone): Press to enter the

Phone main menu.
Voice Recognition
The voice recognition system uses
commands to control the system
and dial phone numbers.
Noise: The system may not
recognize voice commands if there
is too much background noise.
When to Speak: A tone sounds to
indicate that the system is ready for
a voice command. Wait for the tone
and then speak.
How to Speak: Speak clearly in a
calm and natural voice.
7-24
Infotainment System
Audio System
When using the Bluetooth system,
sound comes through the vehicle's
front audio system speakers and
overrides the audio system. Turn
the O knob during a call to change
the volume level. The adjusted
volume level remains in memory
for later calls. The system maintains
a minimum volume level.
Other Information
The Bluetooth word mark and
logos are owned by the Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks
by General Motors is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
page 1316 for FCC and Industry
Canada information.
Bluetooth (Infotainment
Controls)
For information about how to
navigate the menu system using
the infotainment controls, see
Pairing Information:
.
Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.
The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.
The Bluetooth system links with

the first available paired cell
phone in the order the phone
was paired.
Only one paired cell phone can

be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
Pairing should only need to be

completed once, unless changes
to the pairing information have
been made or the phone is
deleted.
Pairing
A Bluetoothenabled cell phone
must be paired to the Bluetooth
system first and then connected to
the vehicle before it can be used.
See the cell phone manufacturer's
user guide for Bluetooth functions
before pairing the cell phone. If a
Bluetooth phone is not connected,
calls will be made using OnStar
HandsFree Calling, if available.
Refer to the OnStar Owner's Guide
The pairing process can be started
by using the voice recognition
system or the controls on the
infotainment system.
To link to a different paired phone,

see Linking to a Different Phone
later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
2. Select Phone Settings.
3. Select Bluetooth.
Black plate (25,1)
Infotainment System
4. Select Pair Device (Phone).
A fourdigit Personal
Identification Number (PIN)
appears on the display.
If the Add new GPS device
option is selected, the system
will start a search for Bluetooth
Handsfree profile devices just
like if Add new Phone was
selected. The additional GPS
location feature which would
provide the vehicle's GPS
location through the Bluetooth
Serial Port Profile is not
available.
5. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that will be paired to
the vehicle. Reference the cell
phone manufacturer's user guide
for information on this process.
Locate the device named Your
Vehicle in the list on the cell
phone and follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
fourdigit PIN provided by the
system.
7-25
6. The system prompts for a name

for the phone and confirms the
name provided. This name is
used to indicate which phone is
connected.
4. Select Device List.
7. The system responds with

<Phone name> has been
successfully paired after the
pairing process is complete.
To link to a different phone, the new

phone must be in the vehicle and
available to be connected to the
Bluetooth system before the
process is started.
8. Repeat Steps 1 through 7 to

pair additional phones.
5. Select the phone to delete and

follow the onscreen prompts.
Linking to a Different Phone
Listing All Paired and Connected

Phones
5. Select the new phone to link

to and follow the onscreen
prompts.
Deleting a Paired Phone
If delete is selected, the

highlighted phone will be
deleted.
7-26
Infotainment System
Making a Call Using

Phone Book
To make a call using the Phone

Book menu:
For cell phones that support the

phone book feature, the Bluetooth
system can use the contacts stored
on your cell phone to make calls.
See your cell phone's owner's guide
or contact your wireless provider to
find out if this feature is supported
by your phone.
1. Press the
When a cell phone supports the

phone book feature, the Phone
Book and Call Lists menus are
automatically available.
The Phone Book menu allows you
to access the phone book stored in
the cell phone to make a call.
The Call Lists menu allows you to
access the phone numbers from the
Incoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, and
Missed Calls menus on your cell
phone to make a call.
5 / > button twice.
2. Select Phone Book.

3. You can search through the list
by selecting the letter group the
phone book entry begins with,
or press the MENU knob to
scroll through the entire list of
names/numbers in the
phone book.
4. Select the name or number you
want to call.
To make a call using the Call
Lists menu:
1. Press the
5 / > button twice.
Making a Call
1. Press the
5 / > button twice.
2. Enter the character sequence.

See Entering a Character
Sequence in Operation on
3. Select Call to start dialing the
number.
Accepting or Declining a Call

When a call is received, the
infotainment system mutes and a
ring tone is heard in the vehicle.
Accepting a Call
Turn the MENU knob to Answer
and press the MENU knob.
2. Select Call Lists.
Declining a Call
3. Select the Incoming Calls,

Outgoing Calls, or Missed
Calls list.
Turn the MENU knob to Decline and

press the MENU knob.
4. Select the name or number you

want to call.
Infotainment System
Call Waiting
Conference Calling
Ending a Call
Call waiting must be supported on

the Bluetooth phone and enabled by
the wireless service carrier to work.
Conference calling and threeway

calling must be supported on the
Bluetooth phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier to work.
Press the MENU knob and

select Hang Up.
To start a conference while in a

current call:
To Mute a Call
Accepting a Call
Turn the MENU knob to Answer
Declining a Call
Turn the MENU knob to Decline
Switching Between Calls
(Call Waiting Calls Only)
To switch between calls:
1. Press the MENU knob.
2. Select Switch Call from
the menu.
7-27
Muting a Call
1. Press the MENU knob.

select Mute Call.
2. Select Enter Number.
To Cancel Mute
3. Enter the character sequence

then select call. See Entering
a Character Sequence in
more information.

select Mute Call.
4. After the call has been placed,

turn the MENU knob button and
choose Merge Calls.
The Bluetooth system can send

numbers during a call. This is used
when calling a menudriven phone
system.
5. To add more callers to the

conference call, repeat
Steps 1 through 4. The number
of callers that can be added is
limited by your wireless service
carrier.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

(DTMF) Tones
1. Press the MENU knob and

select Enter Number.
2. Enter the character sequence.
See Entering a Character
Sequence in Operation on
7-28
Black plate (28,1)
Infotainment System
Bluetooth (Voice
Recognition)
Using Voice Recognition
To use voice recognition, press the
b / g button located on the steering
wheel. The system responds
differently depending on what kind
of infotainment system the vehicle
has installed.
For vehicles without a navigation
system, the system responds
Ready, followed by a tone. After
the tone, say a command.
For vehicles with a navigation
system, the system responds with a
tone. After the tone say Hands
Free to use the Bluetooth voice
recognition system. The system
then responds with Ready,
followed by a tone. After the tone,
say a command.
For additional information say
Help while you are in a voice
recognition menu.
Pairing
A Bluetooth cell phone must be
paired to the Bluetooth system and
then connected to the vehicle before
it can be used. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for
Bluetooth functions before pairing
the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone
is not connected, calls will be made
using OnStar HandsFree Calling,
if available. Refer to the OnStar
Owner's Guide for more information.
Pairing Information
.
Up to five cell phones can be

paired to the Bluetooth system.
The pairing process is disabled

when the vehicle is moving.
Pairing only needs to be

completed once, unless the
pairing information on the cell
phone changes or the cell phone
is deleted from the system.
Only one paired cell phone can

be connected to the Bluetooth
system at a time.
If multiple paired cell phones are

within range of the system, the
system connects to the first
available paired cell phone in the
order that they were first paired
to the system. To link to a
different paired phone, see
Connecting to a Different
Phone later in this section.
Pairing a Phone
1. Press b / g. For vehicles with a
navigation system, say Hands
Free, after the tone.
2. Say Bluetooth.
3. Say Pair. The system responds
with instructions and a fourdigit
Personal Identification Number
(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.
Black plate (29,1)
Infotainment System
4. Start the pairing process on the
cell phone that you want to pair.
For help with this process, see
your cell phone manufacturer's
user guide.
5. Locate the device named Your
Vehicle in the list on the cell
phone. Follow the instructions
on the cell phone to enter the
PIN provided in Step 3. After the
PIN is successfully entered, the
system prompts you to provide a
name for the paired cell phone.
This name will indicate which
phones are paired and
connected to the vehicle.
See Listing All Paired and
Connected Phones later in this
section for more information.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pair
additional phones.
Listing All Paired and Connected

Phones
The system can list all cell phones
paired to it. If a paired cell phone is
also connected to the vehicle, the
system responds with is connected
after that phone name.
2. Say Bluetooth.
3. Say List.
Deleting a Paired Phone
If the phone name you want to
delete is unknown, see Listing All
Paired and Connected Phones.
2. Say Bluetooth.
3. Say Delete.
4. Say the name of the phone you
want to delete.
7-29
Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,
the Bluetooth system looks for the
next available cell phone in the
order in which all the available cell
phones were paired. Depending
on which cell phone you want to
connect to, you may have to use
this command several times.
2. Say Bluetooth.
3. Say Change phone.
.
If another cell phone is

found, the response will be
<Phone name> is now
connected.
If another cell phone is not

found, the original phone
remains connected.
7-30
Black plate (30,1)
Infotainment System
Storing and Deleting Phone

Numbers
The system can store up to
30 phone numbers as name
tags in the HandsFree Directory
that is shared between the
Bluetooth and OnStar systems.
The following commands are used
to delete and store phone numbers.
Store: This command will store
a phone number or a group of
numbers as a name tag.
Digit Store: This command allows
a phone number to be stored as a
name tag by entering the digits one
at a time.
Delete: This command is used to
delete individual name tags.
Delete All Name Tags: This
command deletes all stored name
tags in the HandsFree Calling
Directory and the OnStar
TurnbyTurn Destinations
Directory.
Using the Store Command

2. Say Store.
3. Say the phone number or group
of numbers you want to store all
at once with no pauses, then
follow the directions given by the
system to save a name tag for
this number.
Using the Digit Store Command
3. Say each digit, one at a time,

that you want to store. After
each digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
digit has been entered, say
Store, and then follow the
directions given by the system to
save a name tag for this number.
Using the Delete Command
If an unwanted number is
recognized by the system, say
Clear at any time to clear the
last number.
2. Say Delete.
To hear all of the numbers

Verify at any time.
Using the Delete All Name Tags

Command

2. Say Digit Store.
3. Say the name tag you want to

delete.
This command deletes all stored

name tags in the HandsFree
Calling Directory and the OnStar
TurnbyTurn Destinations Directory.
Black plate (31,1)
Infotainment System
To delete all name tags:
2. Say Delete all name tags.
Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all the
stored numbers and name tags.
Using the List Command
2. Say Directory.
Digit Dial: This command allows a

phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
Redial: This command is used to
dial the last number used on the cell
phone.
Using the Dial or Call
Command
2. Say Dial or Call.
3. Say the entire number without
pausing or say the name tag.
4. Say List.
Once connected, the person called

will be heard through the audio
speakers.
Making a Call
Using the Digit Dial Command
Calls can be made using the

following commands.
The digit dial command allows a

phone number to be dialed by
entering the digits one at a time.
After each digit is entered, the
system repeats back the digit it
heard followed by a tone.
3. Say HandsFree Calling.
Dial or Call: The dial or

call command can be used
interchangeably to dial a phone
number or a stored name tag.
7-31
If an unwanted number is
Clear at any time to clear the last
number.
To hear all of the numbers
Verify at any time.
2. Say Digit Dial.
3. Say each digit, one at a time,
that you want to dial. After each
digit is entered, the system
repeats back the digit it heard
followed by a tone. After the last
digit has been entered,
say Dial.
speakers.
7-32
Black plate (32,1)
Infotainment System
Using the Redial Command

Press b / g again to return to

the original call.
To ignore the incoming call, no

action is required.
2. After the tone, say Redial.

speakers.
Receiving a Call
When an incoming call is received,
the audio system mutes and a ring
tone is heard in the vehicle.
.
.
b / g to answer the call.

Press $ / i to ignore a call.
Press
Call Waiting
Call waiting must be supported on
the cell phone and enabled by the
wireless service carrier.
.
Press b / g to answer an
incoming call when another call
is active. The original call is
placed on hold.
Press $ / i to disconnect the

current call and switch to the call
on hold.
ThreeWay Calling
Threeway calling must be
supported on the cell phone and
enabled by the wireless service
carrier.
1. While on a call, press
b / g.
2. Say Threeway Call.

3. Use the dial or call command to
dial the number of the third party
to be called.
4. Once the call is connected,
press b / g to link all callers
together.
Ending a Call
Press
$ / i to end a call.
Muting a Call
During a call, all sounds from inside
the vehicle can be muted so that the
person on the other end of the call
cannot hear them.
To mute a call, press b /
then say Mute Call.
g, and
To cancel mute, press b /

then say Unmute Call.
g, and
Transferring a Call
Audio can be transferred between
the Bluetooth system and the cell
phone.
The cell phone must be paired
and connected with the Bluetooth
system before a call can be
transferred. The connection process
can take up to two minutes after the
ignition is turned to ON/RUN.
Black plate (33,1)
Infotainment System
7-33
To Transfer Audio from the

Bluetooth System to a Cell Phone
To access contacts stored in the

cell phone:
Sending a Number or Name Tag

During a Call
During a call with the audio in the

vehicle:

1. Press
1. Press
b / g.
2. Say Transfer Call.

To Transfer Audio to the Bluetooth
System from a Cell Phone
During a call with the audio on the
cell phone, press b / g. The audio
transfers to the vehicle. If the audio
does not transfer to the vehicle,
use the audio transfer feature on the
cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide for more
information.
Voice Pass-Thru
Voice passthru allows access to the
voice recognition commands on the
cell phone. See your cell phone
manufacturer's user guide to see if
the cell phone supports this feature.
2. Say Bluetooth.
3. Say Voice. The cell phone's
normal prompt messages will go
through their cycle according to
the phone's operating
instructions.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

(DTMF) Tones
The Bluetooth system can send
numbers and the numbers stored as
name tags during a call. You can
use this feature when calling a
menudriven phone system.
Account numbers can also be
stored for use.
b / g.
2. Say Dial.
3. Say the number or name tag
to send.
Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted out of
the invehicle Bluetooth system, it
will be retained indefinitely. This
includes all saved name tags in the
phone book and phone pairing
information. For information on how
to delete this information, see the
previous section Deleting a Paired
Phone and the previous sections
on deleting name tags.
7-34
Black plate (34,1)
Infotainment System
2 NOTES
Climate Controls
Climate Controls
Climate Control
Systems
F.
Climate Control Systems
The heating, cooling, defrosting, and

ventilation for the vehicle can be
controlled with these systems.
H. Defog
Vehicles Without Air Conditioning
Vehicles With Air Conditioning
C. Floor Air Mode
C. Floor Air Mode
D. Vent Air Mode
D. Vent Air Mode
E. Fan Control
E. Fan Control
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1

Automatic Climate Control
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Seats (If Equipped)

I.
8-1
Defrost
Air Vents
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8-2
F.
Black plate (2,1)
Climate Controls
Seats (If Equipped)

H. Recirculation
I.
Defog
J.
Air Conditioning
K. Defrost
9 (Fan Control): Turn to increase

or decrease the fan speed.
Temperature Control: Turn to
increase or decrease the
temperature.
Air Delivery Mode Control: To
change the current mode, press
one of the following:
F (Vent): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets.
* (Bi-level): Air is directed to the
instrument panel outlets and the
floor outlets.
7 (Floor): Air is directed to the

floor outlets.
W (Defog):
Clears the windows of

fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
0 (Defrost): Clears the

windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield and side window outlets.
For best results, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield before
defrosting.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Air Conditioning
# (Air Conditioning, If
Equipped): Press to turn the
air conditioning on or off. If the
fan is turned off or the outside
temperature falls below freezing,
the air conditioning compressor
will not work.
h (Recirculation, If Equipped):
Press to turn on the recirculation.
An indicator light comes on. Air is
recirculated inside the vehicle.
It helps to quickly cool the air inside
the vehicle or prevent outside air
and odors from entering.
Rear Window Defogger
1 (Rear Defogger): Press to turn

the rear window defogger on or off.
The rear window defogger turns off
after about 10 minutes. It can also
be turned off by turning the ignition
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/
OFF. If turned on again it runs for
about five minutes before
turning off.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the
windows are clear.
Climate Controls
Notice: Do not use a razor blade
or sharp object to clear the inside
rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid
lines in the rear glass. These
actions may damage the rear
defogger. Repairs would not be
covered by your warranty.
Automatic Climate
Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation
for the vehicle can be controlled
with this system.
Heated Seats (If Equipped): Press

to turn the heated seats on or off.
page 37
8-3
E. Fan Control
F.

Seats
G. Power
H. Recirculation
I.
MODE (Air Delivery Mode)
J.
AQS (Air Quality Sensor)
K. Air Conditioning
Automatic Operation
The system automatically controls
the fan speed, air delivery, air
conditioning and recirculation in
order to heat or cool the vehicle to
the desired temperature.
B. Rear Window Defogger
C. AUTO (Automatic Operation)
D. Defrost
When the indicator light is on, the

system is in full automatic operation.
If the air delivery mode or fan
setting is manually adjusted, the
auto indicator turns off and displays
will show the selected settings.
8-4
Climate Controls
To place the system in automatic

mode do the following:
1. Press AUTO.
2. Set the temperature. Allow the
system time to stabilize. Then
adjust the temperature as
needed for best comfort.
English units can be changed to
metric units through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See
page 533.
Manual Operation
O (Power): Press to turn the

climate control system on or off.
Fan Control: Turn the knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to
increase or decrease the fan speed.
The selected fan speed is indicated
by a number on the display screen.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation.
MODE (Air Delivery Mode): Press

to change the direction of the
airflow. The current mode appears
in the display screen. Automatic
operation is cancelled and manual
mode is initiated. Press AUTO to
return to automatic operation.
To change the current mode, select
one of the following:
Y (Vent): Air is directed to the

instrument panel outlets.
\ (Bi-level):
Air is divided
between the instrument panel
outlets and the floor outlets.
C (TriLevel): Air is divided

between the windshield,
instrument panel, and floor outlets.
[ (Floor):
Air is directed to the
floor outlets.
- (Defog):
Clears the windows of

fog or moisture. Air is directed to the
windshield and floor outlets.
0 (Defrost): Clears the

windshield of fog or frost more
quickly. Air is directed to the
windshield.
# (Air Conditioning):
Press to
turn the automatic air conditioning
on or off. If the fan is turned off or
the outside temperature falls below
freezing, the air conditioning
compressor will not run.
Press AUTO to return to automatic
operation and the air conditioner
runs as needed. When the indicator
light is on, the air conditioner runs
automatically to cool the air inside
the vehicle or to dry the air needed
to defog the windshield faster.
h (Recirculation):
Press to turn
on recirculation. An indicator light
comes on. Air is recirculated to
quickly cool the inside of the vehicle
or prevent outside air and odors
from entering.
Climate Controls
Automatic Air Recirculation:
When the AUTO indicator light
is on, the air is automatically
recirculated as needed to help
quickly cool the inside of the
vehicle.
AQS (Air Quality Sensor): For
vehicles with an air quality sensor,
the climate control system adjusts
to limit some exhaust fumes from
being pulled inside your vehicle.
Press the AQS button on the
climate control to activate the air
quality sensor. The air quality
sensor will not maintain recirculation
for an extended period to prevent
the air inside the vehicle from
becoming too dry or stuffy. To adjust
the sensitivity of the Air Quality
Control, see Climate and Air Quality
page 533.
Auto Defog: The climate control

system may have a sensor to
automatically detect high humidity
inside the vehicle. When high
humidity is detected, the climate
control system may adjust to
outside air supply and turn on the
air conditioner. If the climate control
system does not detect possible
window fogging, it returns to normal
operation. To turn Auto Defog off or
on, see Climate and Air Quality
page 533.
Rear Window Defogger
= (Rear Window Defogger):

Press to turn the rear window
defogger on or off.
8-5
The rear window defogger

turns off automatically after about
10 minutes. If turned on again it
runs for about five minutes before
turning off.
The rear window defogger can be
set to automatic operation, see
Climate and Air Quality under
page 533. When auto rear defog is
selected, the rear window defogger
turns on automatically when the
interior temperature is cold and the
outside temperature is about 40F
and below. The auto rear defogger
turns off automatically after about
10 minutes. At higher speeds, the
rear window defogger may stay on
continuously.
8-6
Climate Controls
For vehicles with heated outside

rearview mirrors, they turn on when
the rear window defogger button is
on and help to clear fog or frost from
the surface of the mirrors. See
Heated Mirrors on page 213.
Notice: Do not try to clear frost
or other material from the inside
of the front windshield and rear
window with a razor blade or
anything else that is sharp. This
may damage the rear window
defogger grid and affect your
radio's ability to pick up stations
clearly. The repairs wouldn't be
covered by your warranty.
Heated Seats (If Equipped): Press
to turn the heated seats on or off.
page 37.
Remote Start Climate Control
Operation: For vehicles with the
remote vehicle start feature, the
climate control system may run
when the vehicle is started remotely.
The system will default to a heating

or cooling mode depending on the
outside temperature and then go
back to the previous settings. See
Remote Vehicle Start on page 25.
Air Vents
Adjustable air vents are in the
center and on the side of the
instrument panel.
The rear window defogger turns on

if it is cold outside.
Sensors
The solar sensor, located on top of
the instrument panel near the
windshield, monitors the solar heat.
The climate control system
uses the sensor information to
adjust the temperature, fan speed,
recirculation, and air delivery mode
for best comfort.
If the sensor is covered, the
automatic climate control system
may not work properly.
Move the slats (A) to change the

direction of the airflow.
Climate Controls
Operation Tips
.
Use the thumbwheels (B) near the

air vents to open or close off the
airflow.
Additional air vents are located
beneath the windshield, driver and
passenger side door windows, and
in the footwells. These are fixed and
cannot be adjusted.
Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets at the
base of the windshield that could
block the flow of air into the
vehicle.
Keep the path under the front

seats clear of objects to help
circulate the air inside of the
vehicle more effectively.
Use of nonGM approved hood

deflectors can adversely affect
the performance of the system.
Check with your dealer before
adding equipment to the outside
of the vehicle.
8-7
Maintenance
Passenger Compartment
Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and
other airborne irritants from outside
air that is pulled into the vehicle.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
page 112
See your dealer regarding
replacement of the filter.
8-8
Black plate (8,1)
Climate Controls
2 NOTES
Driving and Operating
Driving and
Operating
Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-21

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Parking over Things
That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Engine Exhaust
Driving Information
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . 9-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-11
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Starting and Operating

New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . .
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Automatic Transmission
Automatic Transmission . . . . . 9-25
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Manual Transmission
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . 9-28
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31
Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
9-16
9-16
9-18
9-19
Ride Control Systems
9-20
Cruise Control
9-20
Traction Control
System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32
StabiliTrak System . . . . . . . . . 9-33
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
9-1
Object Detection Systems

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-37
Fuel
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Gasoline Specifications (U.S.
and Canada Only) . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
California Fuel
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-40
Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-40
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-42
Filling a Portable Fuel
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43
Towing
General Towing
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing (Except Fuel
Economy Model) . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing (Fuel Economy
Model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . .
9-44
9-44
9-48
9-49
9-49
Conversions and Add-Ons

Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
9-2
Driving Information
Defensive Driving
Defensive driving means always
expect the unexpected. The first
step in driving defensively is to wear
the safety belt. See Safety Belts on
page 310.
{ WARNING
Assume that other road users
(pedestrians, bicyclists, and other
drivers) are going to be careless
and make mistakes. Anticipate
what they might do and be ready.
In addition:
.
Allow enough following

distance between you and
the driver in front of you.
Focus on the task of driving.

(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Driver distraction can cause
collisions resulting in injury or
possible death. These simple
defensive driving techniques
could save your life.
Drunk Driving
{ WARNING
Drinking and then driving is
very dangerous. Your reflexes,
perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even
a small amount of alcohol. You
can have a serious or even
fatal collision if you drive after
drinking.
Do not drink and drive or ride with
a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are
with a group, designate a driver
who will not drink.
Death and injury associated with

drinking and driving is a global
tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that
anyone needs to drive a vehicle:
judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
Police records show that
almost 40 percent of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve
alcohol. In most cases, these
deaths are the result of someone
who was drinking and driving.
In recent years, more than
17,000 annual motor vehicle-related
deaths have been associated with
the use of alcohol, with about
250,000 people injured.
For persons under 21, it is against
the law in every U.S. state to drink
alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental
reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the
leading highway safety problem is
for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.

Medical research shows that
alcohol in a person's system can
make crash injuries worse,
especially injuries to the brain,
spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been
drinking driver or passenger is
in a crash, that person's chance of
being killed or permanently disabled
is higher than if the person had not
been drinking.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems
help to control the vehicle while
driving brakes, steering, and
accelerator. At times, as when
driving on snow or ice, it is easy to
ask more of those control systems
than the tires and road can provide.
Meaning, you can lose control of the
vehicle.
Adding nondealer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 103.
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on
page 516.
Braking action involves perception
time and reaction time. Deciding
to push the brake pedal is
perception time. Actually doing
it is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about
threefourths of a second. But that
is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two
or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition,
alertness, coordination, and
eyesight all play a part. So do
alcohol, drugs, and frustration.
But even in threefourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at
100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m
(66 ft). That could be a lot of
distance in an emergency, so
keeping enough space between
the vehicle and others is important.
9-3
And, of course, actual stopping

distances vary greatly with the
surface of the road, whether it is
pavement or gravel; the condition
of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the
brakes; the weight of the vehicle;
and the amount of brake force
applied.
Avoid needless heavy
braking. Some people drive in
spurts heavy acceleration
followed by heavy braking rather
than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. The brakes might not
have time to cool between hard
stops. The brakes will wear out
much faster with a lot of heavy
braking. Keeping pace with the
traffic and allowing realistic
following distances eliminates a
lot of unnecessary braking. That
means better braking and longer
brake life.
9-4
If the engine ever stops while the

vehicle is being driven, brake
normally but do not pump the
brakes. If the brakes are pumped,
the pedal could get harder to push
down. If the engine stops, there will
still be some power brake assist but
it will be used when the brake is
applied. Once the power assist is
used up, it can take longer to stop
and the brake pedal will be harder
to push.
Adding nondealer accessories can
affect vehicle performance. See
Accessories and Modifications on
page 103.
Steering
If the engine stalls while driving, the
power steering assist system will
continue to operate until you are
able to stop the vehicle. If power
steering assist is lost because the
electric power steering system is
not functioning, the vehicle can be
steered but it will take more effort.
If you turn the steering wheel in

either direction several times until
it stops, or hold the steering wheel
in the stopped position for an
extended amount of time, you may
notice a reduced amount of power
steering assist. The normal amount
of power steering assist should
return shortly after a few normal
steering movements.
If there is a need to reduce speed,

do it before entering the curve, while
the front wheels are straight.
The electric power steering

system does not require regular
maintenance. If you suspect
steering system problems, such
as abnormally high steering effort
for a prolonged period of time,
contact your dealer for service
repairs.
Steering in Emergencies
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a
reasonable speed.
Traction in a curve depends on the
condition of the tires and the road
surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and vehicle speed.
While in a curve, speed is the one
factor that can be controlled.
Try to adjust the speed so you can

drive through the curve. Maintain a
reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the
straightaway.
There are times when steering can
be more effective than braking. For
example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane,
or a car suddenly pulls out from
nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right
in front of you. These problems can
be avoided by braking if you can
stop in time. But sometimes you
cannot stop in time because there
is no room. That is the time for
evasive action steering around
the problem.

The vehicle can perform very well
in emergencies like these. First
apply the brakes. See Braking on
page 93. It is better to remove
as much speed as possible from
a collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right
depending on the space available.
recommended 9 and 3 o'clock

positions, it can be turned a full
180 degrees very quickly without
removing either hand. But you have
to act fast, steer quickly, and just as
quickly straighten the wheel once
you have avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency
situations are always possible is a
good reason to practice defensive
driving at all times and wear safety
belts properly.
Off-Road Recovery
The vehicle's right wheels can drop
off the edge of a road onto the
shoulder while driving.
An emergency like this requires

close attention and a quick decision.
If holding the steering wheel at the
9-5
If the level of the shoulder is only

slightly below the pavement,
recovery should be fairly easy. Ease
off the accelerator and then, if there
is nothing in the way, steer so that
the vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. Turn the steering
wheel 8 to 13 cm (3 to 5 in), about
one-eighth turn, until the right front
tire contacts the pavement edge.
Then turn the steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
9-6
Black plate (6,1)
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts
say about what happens when the
three control systems brakes,
steering, and acceleration do not
have enough friction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver
has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up.
Keep trying to steer and constantly
seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of
the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid
most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions,
and by not overdriving those
conditions. But skids are always
possible.
The three types of skids correspond

to the vehicle's three control
systems. In the braking skid, the
wheels are not rolling. In the
steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes
tires to slip and lose cornering force.
And in the acceleration skid, too
much throttle causes the driving
wheels to spin.
If the vehicle starts to slide, ease
your foot off the accelerator pedal
and quickly steer the way you
want the vehicle to go. If you start
steering quickly enough, the vehicle
may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when
water, snow, ice, gravel, or other
material is on the road. For safety,
slow down and adjust your driving
to these conditions. It is important
to slow down on slippery surfaces
because stopping distance is longer
and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with

reduced traction, try to avoid
sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing
vehicle speed by shifting to a lower
gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You might
not realize the surface is slippery
until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to
recognize warning clues such as
enough water, ice, or packed snow
on the road to make a mirrored
surface and slow down when
you have any doubt.
Remember: Antilock brakes help
avoid only the braking skid.
Driving on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can reduce
vehicle traction and affect your
ability to stop and accelerate.
Always drive slower in these types
of driving conditions and avoid
driving through large puddles and
deepstanding or flowing water.
{ WARNING
Wet brakes can cause crashes.
They might not work as well in a
quick stop and could cause
pulling to one side. You could
lose control of the vehicle.
After driving through a large
puddle of water or a car/vehicle
wash, lightly apply the brake
pedal until the brakes work
normally.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Flowing or rushing water creates
strong forces. Driving through
flowing water could cause the
vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not
ignore police warnings and be
very cautious about trying to
drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water
can build up under the vehicle's
tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road
is wet enough and you are going
fast enough. When the vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no
contact with the road.
9-7
There is no hard and fast rule about

hydroplaning. The best advice is to
slow down when the road is wet.
Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wet
weather driving tips include:
.
Allow extra following distance.
Pass with caution.
Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.
Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.
Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires on
page 1040.
Turn off cruise control.
9-8
Black plate (8,1)
Highway Hypnosis
Hill and Mountain Roads
Always be alert and pay attention to

your surroundings while driving.
If you become tired or sleepy, find
a safe place to park the vehicle
and rest.
Driving on steep hills or through

mountains is different than driving
on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for
driving in these conditions include:
.
Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.
Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, and
transmission.
Shift to a lower gear when going

down steep or long hills.
Other driving tips include:

.
Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
Keep interior temperature cool.
Keep your eyes moving scan

the road ahead and to the sides.
Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.
{ WARNING
If you do not shift down, the
brakes could get so hot that they
would not work well. You would
then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could
crash. Shift down to let the engine
assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
{ WARNING
Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)
or with the ignition off is
dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down
and they could get so hot that
they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or
even none going down a hill.
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
Winter Driving
Driving on Snow or Ice
You could crash. Always have the

engine running and the vehicle
in gear when going downhill.
.
Stay in your own lane. Do not

swing wide or cut across the
center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your
own lane.
Top of hills: Be alert

something could be in your
lane (stalled car, accident).
Pay attention to special road

signs (falling rocks area, winding
roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take
appropriate action.
Drive carefully when there is snow

or ice between the tires and the
road, creating less traction or grip.
Wet ice can occur at about 0C
(32F) when freezing rain begins to
fall, resulting in even less traction.
Avoid driving on wet ice or in
freezing rain until roads can be
treated with salt or sand.
Drive with caution, whatever the
condition. Accelerate gently so
traction is not lost. Accelerating too
quickly causes the wheels to spin
and makes the surface under the
tires slick, so there is even less
traction.
9-9
Try not to break the fragile traction.

If you accelerate too fast, the drive
wheels will spin and polish the
surface under the tires even more.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 930 improves vehicle
stability during hard stops on
slippery roads, but apply the brakes
sooner than when on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distance on
any slippery road and watch for
slippery spots. Icy patches can
occur on otherwise clear roads in
shaded areas. The surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain
icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. Avoid sudden steering
maneuvers and braking while
on ice.
Turn off cruise control on slippery
surfaces.
9-10
Blizzard Conditions
Being stuck in snow can be a
serious situation. Stay with the
vehicle unless there is help nearby.
If possible, use the Roadside
Assistance Program on page 136.
To get help and keep everyone in
the vehicle safe:
.

flashers.
Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:
.
Check again from time to

time to be sure snow does
not collect there.
Open a window about 5 cm

(2 in) on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the
wind to bring in fresh air.
Fully open the air outlets on

or under the instrument
panel.
Adjust the climate control

system to a setting that
circulates the air inside the
vehicle and set the fan speed
to the highest setting. See
Climate Control System in the
Index.
(Continued)
{ WARNING
Snow can trap engine exhaust
under the vehicle. This may
cause exhaust gases to get
inside. Engine exhaust contains
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
cannot be seen or smelled. It can
cause unconsciousness and even
death.
(Continued)
Clear away snow from around

the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking
the exhaust pipe.
WARNING (Continued)
For more information about
carbon monoxide, see Engine
Snow can trap exhaust gases
under your vehicle. This can
cause deadly CO (Carbon
Monoxide) gas to get inside. CO
could overcome you and kill you.
You cannot see it or smell it, so
you might not know it is in your
vehicle. Clear away snow from
around the base of your vehicle,
especially any that is blocking the
exhaust.
Run the engine for short periods
only as needed to keep warm, but
be careful.

To save fuel, run the engine for only
short periods as needed to warm
the vehicle and then shut the engine
off and close the window most of
the way to save heat. Repeat this
until help arrives but only when you
feel really uncomfortable from the
cold. Moving about to keep warm
also helps.
If it takes some time for help to
arrive, now and then when you run
the engine, push the accelerator
pedal slightly so the engine runs
faster than the idle speed. This
keeps the battery charged to restart
the vehicle and to signal for help
with the headlamps. Do this as
little as possible to save fuel.
If the Vehicle Is Stuck

Slowly and cautiously spin the
wheels to free the vehicle when
stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.
If stuck too severely for the traction
system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the
rocking method.
{ WARNING
If the vehicle's tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you
or others could be injured. The
vehicle can overheat, causing an
engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little
as possible and avoid going
above 55 km/h (35 mph).
For information about using tire
chains on the vehicle, see Tire
Chains on page 1060.
9-11
as little as possible. To prevent

transmission wear, wait until the
wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator
pedal while shifting, and press
lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transmission is in gear.
Slowly spinning the wheels in the
forward and reverse directions
causes a rocking motion that could
free the vehicle. If that does not get
the vehicle out after a few tries, it
might need to be towed out. If the
vehicle does need to be towed out,
see Towing the Vehicle on
page 1081.
Rocking the Vehicle to Get

it Out
Vehicle Load Limits
Turn the steering wheel left and

right to clear the area around the
front wheels. Turn off any traction
system. Shift back and forth
between R (Reverse) and a forward
gear, or with a manual transmission,
between 1 (First) or 2 (Second) and
R (Reverse), spinning the wheels
It is very important to know how

much weight the vehicle can
carry. This weight is called the
vehicle capacity weight and
includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo and all
nonfactoryinstalled options.
9-12
Two labels on the vehicle

show how much weight it may
properly carry, the Tire and
Loading Information label and
the Certification label.
Tire and Loading Information

Label
The Tire and Loading

Information label also shows
the tire size of the original
equipment tires (C) and the
recommended cold tire inflation
pressures (D). For more
information on tires and inflation
see Tires on page 1040 and
Tire Pressure on page 1047.
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
number of occupant seating

positions (A), and the maximum
vehicle capacity weight (B) in
kilograms and pounds.
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Tire and

Loading Information label is
attached to the vehicle center
pillar (B-pillar). With the driver
door open, you will find the label
attached below the door lock
post. The Tire and Loading
Information label shows the
There is also important loading

information on the Certification
label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
and the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR) for the front
and rear axle; see Certification
Label later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement
The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs on your vehicle's
placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and

passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined
weight of the driver and

passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals
the available amount of cargo

and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the XXX
amount equals 1400 lbs and
there will be five 150 lb
passengers in your vehicle,
the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 750
(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
9-13
important information on towing

a trailer, towing safety rules, and
trailering tips.
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo

being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing
a trailer, the load from your

trailer will be transferred to
your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo
and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
See Trailer Towing (Except Fuel
Economy Model) on page 948
or Trailer Towing (Fuel Economy
Model) on page 949 for
Example 1
A. Vehicle Capacity Weight for
Example 1 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
B. Subtract Occupant Weight
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) 2 =
136 kg (300 lbs).
C. Available Occupant and
Cargo Weight = 317 kg

(700 lbs).
9-14
Black plate (14,1)

seating positions. The combined
weight of the driver, passengers,
and cargo should never exceed
the vehicle's capacity weight.
Certification Label
Example 2
Example 2 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
Example 3
Example 3 = 453 kg
(1,000 lbs).
@ 68 kg (150 lbs) 5 =
340 kg (750 lbs).
@ 91 kg (200 lbs) 5 =
453 kg (1,000 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
113 kg (250 lbs).
C. Available Cargo Weight =
0 kg (0 lbs).
Refer to the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information label for
specific information about the
vehicle's capacity weight and
Label Example
A vehicle-specific Certification
label, found on the vehicle
center pillar (B-pillar), tells you
the gross weight capacity of the
vehicle, called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The
GVWR includes the weight of
the vehicle, all occupants, fuel,
Black plate (15,1)

and cargo. Never exceed the
GVWR for the vehicle, or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle.
And, if you do have a heavy
load, you should spread it out.
See Steps for Determining
Correct Load Limit earlier in this
section.
{ WARNING
Do not load the vehicle any
heavier than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), or either the
maximum front or rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
This can cause systems to
break and change the way the
vehicle handles. This could
cause loss of control and a
crash. Overloading can also
shorten the life of the vehicle.
If you put things inside the

vehicle like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything
else they will go as fast as
the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is
a crash, they will keep going.
{ WARNING
Things inside the vehicle can
strike and injure people in a
sudden stop or turn, or in a
crash.
.
Put things in the cargo

area of the vehicle. In the
cargo area, put them as
far forward as possible.
Try to spread the weight
evenly.
(Continued)
9-15
WARNING (Continued)
.
Never stack heavier

things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above
the tops of the seats.
Do not leave an
unsecured child
restraint in the vehicle.
Secure loose items in the

vehicle.
Do not leave a seat folded

down unless needed.
9-16
Starting and
Operating
Following breakin, engine speed

and load can be gradually
increased.
and turn it only with your hand.

If the key cannot be turned by
hand, see your dealer.
New Vehicle Break-In
Ignition Positions
The key must be fully extended to

start the vehicle.
Notice: The vehicle does not

need an elaborate break-in. But it
will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
.
Do not drive at any one

constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 805 km
(500 miles). Do not make
full-throttle starts. Avoid
downshifting to brake or
slow the vehicle.
Avoid making hard stops for

the first 322 km (200 miles) or
so. During this time the new
brake linings are not yet
broken in. Hard stops with
new linings can mean
premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this
breaking-in guideline every
time you get new brake
linings.
To shift out of P (Park), turn the

ignition to ON/RUN and apply the
brake pedal.
A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/
LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle is
stopped, turn the ignition switch to
LOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
will remain active. See Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) on
page 920.
The ignition switch has four different
positions.
Notice: Using a tool to force the
key to turn in the ignition could
cause damage to the switch or
break the key. Use the correct
key, make sure it is all the way in,
This is the only position from which

the key can be removed. This locks
the steering wheel, ignition and
automatic transmission.
Do not turn the engine off when the
vehicle is moving. This will cause a
loss of power assist in the brake
and steering systems and disable
the airbags.

In an emergency, if the vehicle must
be shut off while driving:
1. Brake using a firm and steady
pressure. Do not pump the
brakes repeatedly. This may
deplete power assist, requiring
increased brake pedal force.
2. Shift the vehicle to neutral. This
can be done while the vehicle is
moving. After shifting to neutral,
continue to firmly apply the
brakes and steer the vehicle
to a safe location.
3. Come to a complete stop. Shift
to P (Park) with an automatic
transmission, or neutral with a
manual transmission. Turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Set the parking brake. See
Parking Brake on page 931.
{ WARNING
Turning off the vehicle while
moving may cause loss of power
assist in the brake and steering
systems and disable the airbags.
While driving, only shut the
vehicle off in an emergency.
5. If the vehicle must be shut off
while driving, turn the ignition to
ACC/ACCESSORY.
The ignition switch can bind in the
LOCK/OFF position with the wheels
turned off center. If this happens,
move the steering wheel from right
to left while turning the key to ACC/
ACCESSORY. If this does not work,
then the vehicle needs service.
B (ACC/ACCESSORY): This
position provides power to some of
the electrical accessories. It unlocks
the steering wheel and ignition.
9-17
To move the key from ACC/

ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,
push in the key and then turn
it to LOCK/OFF.
C (ON/RUN): The ignition switch
stays in this position when the
engine is running. This position can
be used to operate the electrical
accessories, including the
ventilation fan and 12 volt power
outlet, as well as to display some
warning and indicator lights. The
transmission is also unlocked in this
position on automatic transmission
vehicles.
The battery could be drained if the
key is left in the ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. The vehicle might not start if the
battery is allowed to drain for an
extended period of time.
D (START): This position starts the
engine. When the engine starts,
release the key. The ignition switch
will return to ON/RUN for normal
driving.
9-18
Black plate (18,1)
A warning tone sounds when the

driver door is opened if the ignition
is still in ACC/ACCESSORY and
the key is in the ignition.
Manual Transmission
Place the transmission in the

proper gear.
The shift lever should be in

N (Neutral) and the parking brake
engaged. Hold the clutch pedal
down to the floor and start the
engine. The vehicle will not start
if the clutch pedal is not all the
way down.
Starting Procedure
Move the shift lever to P (Park) or

N (Neutral). The engine will not start
in any other position. To restart the
vehicle when it is already moving,
use N (Neutral) only.
1. With your foot off the accelerator

pedal, turn the ignition key to
START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed
will go down as the engine
warms. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it.
Allow the oil to warm up and
lubricate all moving parts.
Starting the Engine
Notice: Do not try to shift to

P (Park) if the vehicle is moving.
If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to P (Park)
only when the vehicle is stopped.
The vehicle has a

Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in
starting the engine and protects
components. If the ignition key is
turned to the START position,
and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the
engine will continue cranking
for a few seconds or until the
vehicle starts. If the engine does
not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds,
cranking stops after 15 seconds
to prevent cranking motor
damage. To prevent gear
damage, this system also
prevents cranking if the engine
is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by
turning the ignition switch to
ACC/ACCESSORY or
LOCK/OFF.
Black plate (19,1)

Notice: Cranking the engine for
long periods of time, by returning
the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has
ended, can overheat and damage
the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to let the
cranking motor cool down.
2. If the engine does not start
after 510 seconds, especially
in very cold weather (below 0F
or 18C), it could be flooded
with too much gasoline. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and holding it there
as you hold the key in START
for a maximum of 15 seconds.
Wait at least 15 seconds
between each try, to allow
the cranking motor to cool.
When the engine starts, let
go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but
then stops again, repeat the
procedure. This clears the extra
gasoline from the engine. Do not

race the engine immediately
after starting it. Operate the
engine and transmission gently
until the oil warms up and
lubricates all moving parts.
Notice: The engine is designed
to work with the electronics in
the vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could
change the way the engine
operates. Before adding electrical
equipment, check with your
dealer. If you do not, the engine
might not perform properly. Any
resulting damage would not be
9-19
the vehicle. An internal thermostat

in the plug-end of the cord will
prevent engine heater operation at
temperatures above 18C (0F).
To Use The Engine Heater

1. Turn off the engine.
Engine Heater
The engine heater, if available, can
help in cold weather conditions at or
below 18C (0F) for easier starting
and better fuel economy during
engine warm-up. Plug in the heater
at least four hours before starting
1.4L Engine Shown, 1.8L Similar

2. Open the hood and unwrap the
electrical cord. The electrical
cord is located on the passenger
side of the engine compartment,
behind the air cleaner.
9-20
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded

110-volt AC outlet.
{ WARNING
Plugging the cord into an
ungrounded outlet could cause an
electrical shock. Also, the wrong
kind of extension cord could
overheat and cause a fire. You
could be seriously injured. Plug
the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet.
If the cord will not reach, use a
heavy-duty three-prong extension
cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be
sure to unplug and store the
cord as it was before to keep it
away from moving engine parts.
If you do not it could be
damaged.
The length of time the heater should

remain plugged in depends on
several factors. Ask a dealer in the
area where you will be parking the
vehicle for the best advice on this.
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories may be
used for up to 10 minutes after the
engine is turned off:
.
Audio System
Power Windows
Sunroof
The power windows and sunroof

will continue to work for up to
10 minutes or until any door is
opened. The radio will work when
the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/
ACCESSORY. Once the key is
turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF,
the radio will continue to work for
10 minutes, or until the driver door is
opened or the key is removed from
the ignition.
Shifting Into Park

(Automatic Transmission)
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out of
the vehicle if the shift lever is not
fully in P (Park) with the parking
brake firmly set. The vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine
running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure the vehicle will
not move, even when you are on
fairly level ground, use the steps
that follow. If you are pulling a
trailer, see Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips on page 944.
Use this procedure to shift into
P (Park):
1. Hold the brake pedal down and
set the parking brake.
See Parking Brake on page 931

2. Hold the button on the shift lever
and push the lever toward the
front of the vehicle into P (Park).
3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key.
Leaving the Vehicle With the

Engine Running
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to leave the
vehicle with the engine running.
The vehicle could move suddenly
if the shift lever is not fully in
P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. And, if you leave the
vehicle with the engine running, it
could overheat and even catch
fire. You or others could be
injured. Do not leave the vehicle
with the engine running.
If you have to leave the vehicle with

the engine running, the vehicle must
be in P (Park) and the parking
brake set.
Release the button and check that
the shift lever cannot be moved out
of P (Park).
Shifting out of Park

This vehicle is equipped with
an electronic shift lock release
system. The shift lock release is
designed to:
.
Prevent ignition key removal

unless the shift lever is in
P (Park) with the shift lever
button fully released.
Prevent movement of the shift

lever out of P (Park) unless the
ignition is in ON/RUN and the
brake pedal is applied.
Torque Lock
Torque lock is when the weight
of the vehicle puts too much
force on the parking pawl in the
transmission. This happens when
parking on a hill and shifting the
transmission into P (Park) is not
done properly and then it is difficult
to shift out of P (Park). To prevent
torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into P (Park). To find
out how, see Shifting Into Park
listed previously.
If torque lock does occur, the
vehicle may need to be pushed
uphill by another vehicle to relieve
the parking pawl pressure, so you
can shift out of P (Park).
9-21
The shift lock release is always

functional except in the case of an
uncharged or low voltage (less than
9 volt) battery.
If the vehicle has an uncharged
battery or a battery with low voltage,
try charging or jump starting the
battery. See Jump Starting on
page 1078
9-22
Black plate (22,1)
To shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
3. Press the shift lever button.
4. Move the shift lever to the
desired position.
If still unable to shift out of P (Park):
1. Fully release the shift lever
button.
lever can be moved from the

P (Park) position. If the battery has
lost power, the shift lever cannot
be moved from P (Park) unless
the shift lock manual release is
disengaged manually.
To access the shift lock manual
release:
1. Apply the park brake.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and

press the shift lever button
again.
3. Insert a tool into the opening as

far as it will go and move the
shift lever out of P (Park).
If P (Park) is selected again,
the shift lever will be locked
again. Have the cause of the
problem fixed by your dealer.
3. Move the shift lever to the

desired position.
If the shift lever still cannot be
moved from P (Park), see Shift
Lock Manual Release.
4. Close the cover.
Shift Lock Manual Release

The automatic transmission has an
electric park lock. The key must be
in the ON/RUN position, and the
brake pedal pressed so the shift
2. Open the cover to the right of

the shift lever.
Parking
If the vehicle has a manual
transmission, before getting out of
the vehicle, move the shift lever into
R (Reverse), and firmly apply the
parking brake. Once the shift lever
has been placed into R (Reverse)
with the clutch pedal pressed in,
turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF,
remove the key and release the
clutch.
If parking on a hill, or if the vehicle
is pulling a trailer, see Driving
Characteristics and Towing Tips on
page 944.
Parking over Things

That Burn
{ WARNING
Things that can burn could touch
hot exhaust parts under the
vehicle and ignite. Do not park
over papers, leaves, dry grass,
or other things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
{ WARNING
Engine exhaust contains carbon
monoxide (CO) which cannot be
seen or smelled. Exposure to CO
can cause unconsciousness and
even death.
Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:
.
The vehicle idles in areas

with poor ventilation (parking
garages, tunnels, deep snow
that may block underbody
airflow or tail pipes).
The exhaust smells or

sounds strange or different.
The exhaust system leaks

due to corrosion or damage.
The vehicle exhaust system

has been modified, damaged
or improperly repaired.
(Continued)
9-23
WARNING (Continued)
.
There are holes or openings

in the vehicle body from
damage or after market
modifications that are not
completely sealed.
If unusual fumes are detected or

if it is suspected that exhaust is
coming into the vehicle:
.
Drive it only with the windows

completely down.
Have the vehicle repaired

immediately.
Never park the vehicle with the

engine running in an enclosed
area such as a garage or a
building that has no fresh air
ventilation.
9-24
Running the Vehicle

While Parked
It is better not to park with the
engine running. But if you ever have
to, here are some things to know.
{ WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed
area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
{ WARNING
It can be dangerous to get out
of the vehicle if the automatic
transmission shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do
not leave the vehicle when the
engine is running unless you
have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
it is on fairly level ground, always
set the parking brake and move
the automatic transmission shift
lever to P (Park), or the manual
transmission shift lever to Neutral.
Follow the proper steps to be

sure the vehicle will not move.
If the vehicle has an automatic
transmission, see Shifting Into
Park (Automatic Transmission) on
page 920. If the vehicle has a
manual transmission, see Parking
on page 923.
page 944.
Automatic
Transmission
WARNING (Continued)
The automatic transmission has a

shift lever located on the console
between the seats.
English Shown, Metric Similar

P (Park): This position locks the
drive wheels. It is the best position
to use when starting the engine
because the vehicle cannot move
easily.
The selected gear is also shown in
the instrument cluster.
9-25
{ WARNING
It is dangerous to get out of the
vehicle if the shift lever is not fully
in P (Park) with the parking brake
firmly set. The vehicle can roll.
(Continued)
Do not leave the vehicle when

the engine is running unless
you have to. If you have left the
engine running, the vehicle can
move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure the
vehicle will not move, even when
you are on level ground, always
set the parking brake and move
the shift lever to P (Park). See
Shifting Into Park (Automatic
Transmission) on page 920.
Make sure the shift lever is fully
in P (Park) before starting the
engine. The vehicle has an
automatic transmission shift lock
control system. The regular brake
must be fully applied first and
then the shift lever button pressed
before shifting from P (Park) when
the ignition key is in ON/RUN.
9-26
If you cannot shift out of P (Park),

ease pressure on the shift lever,
then push the shift lever all the way
into P (Park) as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift
lever button and move the shift lever
into another gear. See Shifting out
of Park on page 921.
R (Reverse): Use this gear to
back up.
Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving
forward could damage the
transmission. The repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Shift to R (Reverse) only
after the vehicle is stopped.
To rock the vehicle back and forth to
get out of snow, ice or sand without
damaging the transmission, see If
the Vehicle Is Stuck on page 911.
N (Neutral): In this position, the
engine does not connect with the
wheels. To restart the engine when
the vehicle is already moving, use
N (Neutral) only. Also, use

N (Neutral) when the vehicle is
being towed.
The vehicle has an automatic
neutral shift feature which allows
the transmission to automatically
shift to N (Neutral) when the vehicle
is stopped with a forward gear
engaged. The reduced load on
the engine improves vehicle fuel
economy.
{ WARNING
Shifting into a drive gear while the
engine is running at high speed is
dangerous. Unless your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could move very rapidly.
You could lose control and hit
people or objects. Do not shift
into a drive gear while the engine
is running at high speed.
Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)

or N (Neutral) with the engine
running at high speed may
damage the transmission. The
repairs would not be covered by
the vehicle warranty. Be sure the
engine is not running at high
speed when shifting the vehicle.
D (Drive): This position is for
normal driving. It provides the
best fuel economy. If more power
is needed for passing, and the
vehicle is:
.
Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the accelerator
pedal about halfway down.
Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) or

more, push the accelerator all
the way down.
Black plate (27,1)

Notice: If the vehicle seems to
accelerate slowly or not shift
gears when you go faster, and
you continue to drive the vehicle
that way, you could damage the
transmission. Have the vehicle
serviced right away.
9-27

allows you to shift an automatic
transmission similar to a manual
transmission. To use the DSC
feature:
Manual Mode
Notice: If you drive the vehicle at
a high rpm without upshifting
while using Driver Shift Control
(DSC), you could damage the
vehicle. Always upshift when
necessary while using DSC.
English Shown, Metric Similar

2. Press the shift lever forward (+)
to upshift or rearward () to
downshift. An M and the current
gear will be displayed in the DIC.
1. Move the shift lever from
D (Drive) to the left into
the (+) or () manual position.
While using the DSC feature, the

vehicle will have firmer, quicker
shifting. You can use this for sport
driving or when climbing or
descending hills, to stay in gear
longer, or to down shift for more
power or engine braking.
9-28
Black plate (28,1)
The transmission will only allow

you to shift into gears appropriate
for the vehicle speed and engine
revolutions per minute (rpm). The
transmission will not automatically
shift to the next lower gear if the
engine rpm is too high, nor to the
next higher gear when the maximum
engine rpm is reached.
Manual Transmission
If shifting is prevented for any

reason, the currently selected gear
will flash multiple times, indicating
that the transmission has not shifted
gears.
All Models
Except Fuel
Economy Model
While in the DSC mode, the

transmission will automatically
downshift when the vehicle comes
to a stop. This will allow for more
power during take-off.
When accelerating the vehicle from
a stop in snowy and icy conditions,
you may want to shift into second
gear. A higher gear allows the
vehicle to gain more traction on
slippery surfaces.
Shift Pattern
Fuel Economy
Model
Notice: Do not rest your foot on

the clutch pedal while driving or
while stopped. The pressure can
cause premature wear in the
clutch. The repairs would not be
1 (First): Press the clutch pedal
fully to the pedal stop and shift into
1 (First). Then slowly let up on the
clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
To operate the transmissions:
If you come to a complete stop and

it is hard to shift into 1 (First), put
the shift lever in Neutral and let up
on the clutch. Press the clutch pedal
back down. Then shift into 1 (First).
Notice: Do not rest your hand on

the shift lever while driving. The
pressure could cause premature
wear in the transmission. The
the vehicle warranty.
2 (Second): Press the clutch pedal

fully to the pedal stop as you let up
on the accelerator pedal and shift
into 2 (Second). Then, slowly let up
on the clutch pedal as you press the
accelerator pedal.
These are the shift patterns for the

six-speed manual transmissions.
Black plate (29,1)

3 (Third), 4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and
6 (Sixth): Shift into 3 (Third),
4 (Fourth), 5 (Fifth) and 6 (Sixth) the
same way you do for 2 (Second).
Slowly let up on the clutch pedal
as you press the accelerator pedal.
For the best fuel economy, use
6 (Sixth) gear whenever vehicle
speed and driving conditions allow.
To stop, let up on the accelerator

pedal and press the brake pedal.
Just before the vehicle stops, press
the clutch pedal and the brake
pedal, and shift to Neutral.
Neutral: Use this position when
you start or idle the engine. The
shift lever is in Neutral when it is
centered in the shift pattern, not in
any gear.
the ring on the shift lever, and shift

into R (Reverse). Let up on the
clutch pedal slowly while pressing
the accelerator pedal.
If the gear does not engage, shift
the transmission to neutral, release
the clutch pedal and press it back
down. Repeat the gear selection.
{ WARNING
If you skip a gear when you
downshift, you could lose control
of the vehicle. You could injure
yourself or others. Do not shift
down more than one gear at a
time when you downshift.
An up-shift light in the instrument

cluster indicates when to shift to the
next higher gear for the best fuel
economy.
During normal driving, upshifts
should occur between 1,300 and
2,500 rpm, and downshifts should
occur between 1,500 and
1,000 rpm.
9-29
R (Reverse): To back up, with the

vehicle at a complete stop, press
down the clutch pedal. Then pull up
Notice: Do not skip gears

while upshifting. This can
cause premature wear in the
transmission. The repairs would
warranty.
9-30
Brakes
Antilock Brake
System (ABS)
This vehicle has the Antilock
Brake System (ABS), an advanced
electronic braking system that helps
prevent a braking skid.
When the engine is started and the
vehicle begins to drive away, ABS
checks itself. A momentary motor or
clicking noise might be heard while
this test is going on, and it might
even be noticed that the brake
pedal moves a little. This is normal.
If driving safely on a wet road and

it becomes necessary to slam on
the brakes and continue braking
to avoid a sudden obstacle, a
computer senses that the wheels
are slowing down. If one of the
wheels is about to stop rolling, the
computer will separately work the
brakes at each wheel.
ABS can change the brake pressure
to each wheel, as required, faster
than any driver could. This can help
the driver steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.
As the brakes are applied, the
computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls
braking pressure accordingly.
Remember: ABS does not change
the time needed to get a foot up to
the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too
close to the vehicle in front of you,
If there is a problem with ABS, this

warning light stays on. See Antilock
Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
on page 517.
there will not be enough time to

apply the brakes if that vehicle
suddenly slows or stops. Always
leave enough room up ahead to
stop, even with ABS.
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold
the brake pedal down firmly and let
ABS work. You might hear the ABS
pump or motor operating and feel
the brake pedal pulsate, but this is
normal.
Braking in Emergencies
ABS allows the driver to steer and
brake at the same time. In many
emergencies, steering can help
more than even the very best
braking.
Parking Brake
To release the parking brake:

1. Hold the brake pedal down.
2. Pull the parking brake handle up
until you can press the release
button.
3. Hold the release button in as
you move the brake handle all
the way down.
To apply the parking brake, pull up

on the parking brake handle. It is
not necessary to push in on the
release button while applying the
parking brake. If the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position, the brake system
warning light will come on. See
Brake System Warning Light on
page 516.
Notice: Driving with the parking

brake on can overheat the brake
system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system
parts. Make sure that the parking
brake is fully released and the
brake warning light is off before
driving.
9-31
Driving with the parking brake

applied will cause a warning
chime to sound and the RELEASE
PARKING BRAKE message to
appear in the DIC. The message will
remain on until the parking brake is
released or the vehicle is stopped.
page 944.
9-32
Brake Assist
This vehicle has a brake assist
feature designed to assist the driver
in stopping or decreasing vehicle
speed in emergency driving
conditions. This feature uses the
stability system hydraulic brake
control module to supplement
the power brake system under
conditions where the driver has
quickly and forcefully applied the
brake pedal in an attempt to quickly
stop or slow down the vehicle. The
stability system hydraulic brake
control module increases brake
pressure at each corner of the
vehicle until the ABS activates.
Minor brake pedal pulsation or
pedal movement during this time
is normal and the driver should
continue to apply the brake pedal
as the driving situation dictates.
The brake assist feature will
automatically disengage when
the brake pedal is released or
brake pedal pressure is quickly
decreased.

Traction Control
System (TCS)
The vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) that limits wheel spin.
On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the
system operates if it senses that
one or both of the front wheels are
spinning or beginning to lose
traction. When this happens, the
system brakes the spinning
wheel(s), and/or reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
The system may be heard or felt
while it is working, but this is
normal.
TCS is on whenever the vehicle
is started. To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road
conditions, the system should
always be left on. But, TCS can
be turned off if needed.
TCS/StabiliTrak Light
d flashes to indicate that the

traction control system is active.
If there is a problem detected
with TCS, SERVICE TRACTION
CONTROL and SERVICE
STABILITRAK may be displayed
on the Driver Information Center
(DIC). See Vehicle Messages
page 527. When this message is
displayed and d comes on and
stays on, the vehicle is safe to drive
but the system is not operational.
Driving should be adjusted
accordingly.

If d comes on and stays on, reset
the system by:
If cruise control is being used when

TCS activates, cruise control will
automatically disengage. Press the
cruise control button to reengage
when road conditions allow. See
Cruise Control on page 935.
1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off and
waiting 15 seconds.
3. Starting the engine.
If d still comes on and stays on at a
speed above 20 km/h (13 mi/h), see
A chime may also sound when the
light comes on steady.
Notice: Do not repeatedly brake
or accelerate heavily when TCS is
off. The vehicle's driveline could
be damaged.
TCS/StabiliTrak Button
g is located on the console.
9-33
TCS Off Light

TCS can be turned off by pressing
and releasing g. When TCS is
turned off, i comes on and the
system will not limit wheel spin.
accordingly. Press and release g
again to turn the system back on.
It may be necessary to turn the
system off if the vehicle gets stuck
in sand, mud, or snow and rocking
the vehicle is required. See If the
Vehicle Is Stuck on page 911 for
more information. See also Winter
Driving on page 99 for information
on using TCS when driving in snowy
or icy conditions.
Adding nonGM accessories can

affect the vehicle's performance.
See Accessories and Modifications
StabiliTrak System
The vehicle has a vehicle stability
enhancement system called
StabiliTrak. It is an advanced
computer controlled system that
assists with directional control of the
vehicle in difficult driving conditions.
StabiliTrak activates when the
computer senses a difference
between the intended path, and
the direction the vehicle is actually
traveling. StabiliTrak selectively
applies braking pressure at any one
of the vehicle's brakes to help steer
the vehicle in the intended direction.
9-34
StabiliTrak is on automatically
whenever the vehicle is started. To
assist with directional control of the
vehicle, the system should always
be left on.

page 527. When this message is
displayed and/or d comes on and
stays on, the vehicle is safe to drive
but the system is not operational.
accordingly.
If d comes on and stays on, reset
the system by:
1. Stopping the vehicle.
TCS/StabiliTrak Light
When the stability control system
activates, d flashes on the
instrument panel. This also occurs
when traction control is activated.
A noise may be heard or vibration
may be felt in the brake pedal. This
is normal. Continue to steer the
vehicle in the intended direction.
If there is a problem detected
with StabiliTrak, SERVICE
STABILITRAK is displayed on the
Driver Information Center (DIC).
See Vehicle Messages (Canada
Base Level) on page 526 or
2. Turning the engine off and

waiting 15 seconds.
3. Starting the engine.
If d still comes on and stays on at a
speed above 20 km/h (13 mi/h), see
TCS/StabiliTrak Button
g is located on the console.
StabiliTrak Off
Light
TCS Off Light
StabiliTrak can be turned off

if needed by pressing and
holding g until g and i come
on the instrument panel. When
StabiliTrak is turned off, the
system will not assist with
directional control of the vehicle
or limit wheel spin. Driving should
be adjusted accordingly. Press
and release g again to turn the
system back on.
If cruise control is being used
when StabiliTrak activates, cruise
control will automatically disengage.
Press the cruise control button to
reengage when road conditions
allow. See Cruise Control on
Cruise Control
With cruise control, the vehicle can
maintain a speed of about 40 km/h
(25 mph) or more without keeping
your foot on the accelerator. Cruise
control does not work at speeds
below 40 km/h (25 mph).
If the brakes are applied, the cruise
control shuts off.
If the vehicle has a Traction Control
System (TCS) or StabiliTrak System
and begins to limit wheel spin while
using cruise control, the cruise
control automatically disengages.
on page 932 or StabiliTrak System
on page 933. When road conditions
allow you to safely use it again, the
cruise control can be turned
back on.
9-35
{ WARNING
Cruise control can be dangerous
where you cannot drive safely at
a steady speed. So, do not use
the cruise control on winding
roads or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous
on slippery roads. On such roads,
fast changes in tire traction can
cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use
cruise control on slippery roads.
5 (On/Off):
Press to turn the

cruise control system on and off.
RES/+ (Resume/Accelerate):
Move the thumbwheel up to resume
a previously set speed or to
accelerate.
SET/ (Set/Coast): Move the
thumbwheel down to set a speed or
to make the vehicle decelerate.
* (Cancel):
Press to disengage
cruise control without erasing the
set speed from memory.
9-36
Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not in
use, it could get bumped and go into
cruise when not desired. Keep the
cruise control switch off when cruise
is not being used.
1. Press
Black plate (36,1)
Increasing Speed While Using

Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
Move the thumbwheel up toward

RES/+ and hold it until the
desired speed is reached, and
then release it.
To increase the speed in small

amounts, move the thumbwheel
up toward RES/+ briefly and
then release it. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.
5.
2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Move the thumbwheel down and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a
desired speed and then the brakes
or clutch for manual transmissions
are applied, the cruise control is
disengaged without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Once the vehicle reaches about
40 km/h (25 mph) or more, move
the thumbwheel up toward RES/+
briefly. The vehicle returns to the
speed selected previously and
stays there.
Reducing Speed While Using

Cruise Control
If the cruise control system is
already activated,
.
Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/ and hold until the desired
lower speed is reached, then
release it.
To slow down in small amounts,

move the thumbwheel toward
SET/ briefly. Each time this is
done, the vehicle goes about
1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While

Using Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to
increase the vehicle speed. When
you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle slows down to the previous
set cruise control speed.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works
on hills depends upon the vehicle
speed, load, and the steepness of
the hills. When going up steep hills,
you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the
vehicle speed. When going
downhill, you might have to brake or
shift to a lower gear to maintain the
vehicle speed. When the brakes are
applied, the cruise control is
disengaged.
Black plate (37,1)

Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to end cruise
control:
.
To disengage cruise control;

step lightly on the brake pedal or
clutch for manual transmission.
* on the steering wheel.
Press
To turn off the cruise control,

press 5 on the steering wheel.
Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speed is
erased from memory if the 5 button
is pressed or if the ignition is
turned off.
Object Detection
Systems
Ultrasonic Parking Assist
For vehicles with the Ultrasonic
Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system,
it assists the driver with parking
and avoiding objects while in
R (Reverse). URPA operates at
speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),
and the sensors on the rear bumper
detect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)
behind the vehicle, and at least
20 cm (8 in) off the ground.
9-37
{ WARNING
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking
Assist (URPA) system does not
replace driver vision. It cannot
detect:
.
Objects that are below the

bumper, under the vehicle,
or too close or far from the
vehicle.
Children, pedestrians,
bicyclists, or pets.
If you do not use proper care

before and while backing up,
vehicle damage, injury, or death
could occur. Even with URPA,
always check behind the vehicle
before backing up. While backing
up, be sure to look for objects and
check the vehicle's mirrors.
9-38
How the System Works

URPA comes on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into
R (Reverse).
A single tone sounds to indicate the
system is working.
URPA operates only at speeds less
than 8 km/h (5 mph).
An obstacle is indicated by audible
beeps. The interval between the
beeps becomes shorter as the
vehicle gets closer to the obstacle.
When the distance is less than
30 cm (12 in) the beeps are
continuous.
To be detected, objects must be at

least 20 cm (8 in) off the ground and
below trunk level. Objects must also
be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear
bumper. The distance objects can
be detected may be less during
warmer or humid weather.
PARK ASSIST OFF may display on
the Driver Information Center (DIC)
to indicate that URPA is off. The
message disappears after a short
period of time.
Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turned
on and off through the vehicle
personalization menu on the
infotainment system. See Vehicle
Personalization on page 533 for
more information.
When the System Does Not

Seem to Work Properly
If the URPA system does not
activate due to a temporary
condition, the message PARK
ASSIST OFF displays on the DIC.
See Object Detection System
Messages on page 530 for more
information. This can occur under
the following conditions:
.
The driver has disabled the

system.
The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rear
bumper free of mud, dirt, snow,
ice, and slush. For cleaning
instructions, see Exterior Care
on page 1083.
Black plate (39,1)

.
An object was hanging out of the

trunk during the last drive cycle.
Once the object is removed,
URPA will return to normal
operation.
The vehicle's bumper is

damaged. Take the vehicle to
your dealer to repair the system.
Other conditions may affect

system performance, such as
vibrations from a jackhammer or
the compression of air brakes on
a very large truck.
9-39
Fuel
Use of the recommended fuel
is an important part of the proper
maintenance of this vehicle. To help
keep the engine clean and maintain
optimum vehicle performance, we
recommend the use of gasoline
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline.
Look for the TOP TIER label on the
fuel pump to ensure gasoline meets
enhanced detergency standards
developed by auto companies. A list
of marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found at
www.toptiergas.com.
Recommended Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with
a posted octane rating of 87 or
higher. If the octane rating is less
than 87, an audible knocking noise,
commonly referred to as spark
knock, might be heard when driving.
If this occurs, use a gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher as soon as
possible. If heavy knocking is heard
when using gasoline rated at
87 octane or higher, the engine
needs service.
9-40
Gasoline Specifications
(U.S. and Canada Only)
California Fuel
Requirements
Fuels in Foreign
Countries
At a minimum, gasoline should

meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States
or CAN/CGSB3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
We recommend against the use
of gasolines containing MMT.
See Fuel Additives on page 940
for additional information.
If the vehicle is certified to meet

California Emissions Standards, it is
designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See
the underhood emission control
label. If this fuel is not available in
states adopting California Emissions
Standards, the vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission
control system performance might
be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp could turn on and the
vehicle might fail a smogcheck test.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 513. If this occurs, return to
your authorized dealer for diagnosis.
If it is determined that the condition
is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the
vehicle warranty.
Never use leaded gasoline or any

other fuel not recommended in the
previous text on fuel. Costly repairs
caused by use of improper fuel
would not be covered by the vehicle
warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an
auto club, or contact a major oil
company that does business in the
country where you will be driving.
Fuel Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines
in the United States are now
required to contain additives that
help prevent engine and fuel system
deposits from forming, allowing the
emission control system to work
properly. In most cases, nothing
should have to be added to the fuel.
Black plate (41,1)

However, some gasolines contain
only the minimum amount of
additive required to meet U.S.
Environmental Protection Agency
regulations. To help keep fuel
injectors and intake valves clean
and avoid problems due to dirty
injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline. Look for the
TOP TIER label on the fuel pump to
ensure gasoline meets enhanced
detergency standards developed
by the auto companies. A list of
marketers providing TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline can be found
at www.toptiergas.com.
For customers who do not use

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline
regularly, one bottle of GM Fuel
System Treatment PLUS, added to
the fuel tank at every engine oil
change, can help clean deposits
from fuel injectors and intake
valves. GM Fuel System Treatment
PLUS is the only gasoline additive
recommended by General Motors.
It is available at your dealer.
Gasolines containing oxygenates,
such as ethers and ethanol, and
reformulated gasolines might be
available in your area. We
recommend that you use these
gasolines, if they comply with the
specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and
other fuels containing more than
10% ethanol must not be used in
vehicles that were not designed for
those fuels.
9-41
Notice: This vehicle was not

designed for fuel that contains
methanol. Do not use fuel
containing methanol. It can
corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic
and rubber parts. That damage
would not be covered under the
vehicle warranty.
Some gasolines that
are not reformulated for low
emissions can contain an
octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant
where you buy gasoline whether the
fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce
spark plug life and affect emission
control system performance. The
malfunction indicator lamp might
turn on. If this occurs, return to your
dealer for service.
9-42
Filling the Tank
{ WARNING
Fuel vapor burns violently and a
fuel fire can cause bad injuries.
To help avoid injuries to you and
others, read and follow all the
instructions on the fuel pump
island. Turn off the engine when
refueling. Do not smoke near fuel
or when refueling the vehicle. Do
not use cellular phones. Keep
sparks, flames, and smoking
materials away from fuel. Do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling the vehicle. This is
against the law in some places.
Do not re-enter the vehicle while
pumping fuel. Keep children away
from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
The tethered fuel cap is behind the

fuel door on the vehicle's passenger
side. To open the fuel door, push the
rearward center edge in and release
and the door will open. Turn the fuel
cap counterclockwise to remove. Do
not release the cap too soon or it
will spring back. Reinstall the cap by
turning it clockwise until it clicks.
If the cap is not properly installed,

the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will
come on. See Malfunction Indicator
Lamp on page 513 for more
information.
{ WARNING
Fuel can spray out on you if
you open the fuel cap too
quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be
badly burned. This spray can
happen if the tank is nearly full,
(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)
and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait
for any hiss noise to stop. Then
unscrew the cap all the way.
Do not top off or overfill the tank.
Wait a few seconds before removing
the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted
surfaces as soon as possible. See
Exterior Care on page 1083.
{ WARNING
If a fire starts while you are
refueling, do not remove the
nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by
notifying the station attendant.
Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If a new fuel cap is

needed, be sure to get the right
type of cap from your dealer.
The wrong type of fuel cap might
not fit properly, might cause the
malfunction indicator lamp to
light, and could damage the fuel
tank and emissions system. See
Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 513.
WARNING (Continued)
and the vehicle damaged if this
occurs. To help avoid injury to you
and others:
.
Dispense fuel only into

approved containers.
Do not fill a container while

it is inside a vehicle, in a
vehicle's trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than
the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact

with the inside of the fill
opening before operating the
nozzle. Contact should be
maintained until the filling is
complete.
Do not smoke while

pumping fuel.
Do not use a cellular phone

while pumping fuel.

Container
{ WARNING
Never fill a portable fuel container
while it is in the vehicle. Static
electricity discharge from the
container can ignite the fuel
vapor. You can be badly burned
(Continued)
9-43
9-44
Towing
General Towing
Information
Only use towing equipment that
has been designed for the vehicle.
Contact your dealer or trailering
dealer for assistance with preparing
the vehicle for towing a trailer.
See the following trailer towing
information in this section:
.
For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips.
For maximum vehicle and trailer

weights, see Trailer Towing.
For information on equipment

to tow a trailer, see Towing
Equipment.
For information on towing a disabled

vehicle, see Towing the Vehicle on
page 1081. For information on
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as a motor home, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing on
page 1081.
Driving Characteristics
and Towing Tips
{ WARNING
The driver can lose control when
pulling a trailer if the correct
equipment is not used or the
vehicle is not driven properly.
For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work
well or even at all. The driver
and passengers could be
seriously injured. The vehicle
may also be damaged; the
resulting repairs would not be
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
Pull a trailer only if all the steps in
this section have been followed.
Ask your dealer for advice and
information about towing a trailer
with the vehicle.
The vehicle can tow a trailer if it is
equipped with the proper trailer
towing equipment. To identify the
trailering capacity of the vehicle,
see Trailer Towing (Except Fuel
Economy Model) on page 948 or
Trailer Towing (Fuel Economy
Model) on page 949. Trailering
changes handling, acceleration,
braking, durability, and fuel
economy. With the added weight,
the engine, transmission, wheel
assemblies, and tires are forced to
work harder and under greater
loads. The trailer also adds wind
resistance, increasing the pulling
requirements. For safe trailering,
correctly use the proper trailering
equipment.

The following information has
important trailering tips and rules
for your safety and that of your
passengers. Read this section
carefully before pulling a trailer.
Pulling a Trailer
Here are some important points:
.
There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that apply
to trailering. Check for legal
requirements with state or
provincial police.
Do not tow a trailer at all during
the first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)
the new vehicle is driven. The
engine or other parts could be
damaged.
During the first 800 km
(500 miles) that a trailer is
towed, do not drive over 80 km/h
(50 mph) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This reduces wear
on the vehicle.
Vehicles with automatic

transmissions can tow in
D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)
is recommended. See Manual
Mode on page 927 for more
information. Use a lower gear if
the transmission shifts too often.
For vehicles with a manual
transmission, it is better not to
use the highest gear.
Use the cruise control when

towing.
Obey speed limit restrictions.

Do not drive faster than the
maximum posted speed for
trailers, or no more than 90 km/h
(55 mph), to reduce wear on the
vehicle.
Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.
Get familiar with handling and
braking with the added trailer
weight. The vehicle is now longer
and not as responsive as the
vehicle is by itself.
9-45
Check all trailer hitch parts

and attachments, safety chains,
electrical connectors, lamps, tires,
and mirror adjustments. If the trailer
has electric brakes, start the vehicle
and trailer moving and then apply
the trailer brake controller by hand
to be sure the brakes are working.
During the trip, check regularly to be
sure that the load is secure, and the
lamps and trailer brakes are working
properly.
Towing with a Stability Control

System
When towing, the sound of the
stability control system might be
heard. The system is reacting to the
vehicle movement caused by the
trailer, which mainly occurs during
cornering. This is normal when
towing heavier trailers.
9-46
Black plate (46,1)
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the

vehicle ahead as you would when
driving the vehicle without a trailer.
This can help to avoid situations
that require heavy braking and
sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns

while trailering could cause the
trailer to come in contact with the
vehicle. The vehicle could be
damaged. Avoid making very
sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When turning with a trailer, make

wider turns than normal. Do this
so the trailer won't strike soft
shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees
or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well
in advance.
More passing distance is needed

when towing a trailer. Because the
rig is longer, it is necessary to go
much farther beyond the passed
vehicle before returning to the lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering
wheel with one hand. Then, to move
the trailer to the left, move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the
right, move your hand to the right.
Always back up slowly and,
if possible, have someone
guide you.
Turn Signals When Towing a

Trailer
The arrows on the instrument panel
flash whenever signaling a turn or
lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps also flash, telling
other drivers the vehicle is turning,
changing lanes, or stopping.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on

the instrument panel flash for turns
even if the bulbs on the trailer are
burned out. For this reason you may
think other drivers are seeing the
signal when they are not. It is
important to check occasionally to
be sure the trailer bulbs are still
working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a
lower gear before starting down a
long or steep downgrade. If the
transmission is not shifted down,
the brakes might have to be used
so much that they would get hot
and no longer work well.
Vehicles with an automatic
transmission can tow in
D (Drive) but M (Manual Mode)
is recommended. Shift the
transmission to a lower gear if
the transmission shifts too often
under heavy loads and/or hilly
conditions. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, it is better
not to use the highest gear.

When towing at high altitude on
steep uphill grades, consider the
following: Engine coolant will boil at
a lower temperature than at normal
altitudes. If the engine is turned off
immediately after towing at high
altitude on steep uphill grades, the
vehicle may show signs similar to
engine overheating. To avoid this,
let the engine run while parked,
preferably on level ground, with the
automatic transmission in P (Park)
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. For vehicles with manual
transmissions, let the engine run
while parked, preferably on level
ground, with the transmission out of
gear and the parking brake applied,
for a few minutes before turning the
engine off. If the overheat warning
comes on, see Engine Overheating
on page 1020.
Parking on Hills
{ WARNING
Parking the vehicle on a hill
with the trailer attached can be
dangerous. If something goes
wrong, the rig could start to move.
People can be injured, and both
the vehicle and the trailer can be
damaged. When possible, always
park the rig on a flat surface.
If parking the rig on a hill:
1. Press the brake pedal, but do
not shift into P (Park) yet for
vehicles with an automatic
transmission, or into gear
for vehicles with a manual
transmission. Turn the wheels
into the curb if facing downhill
or into traffic if facing uphill.
2. Have someone place chocks
under the trailer wheels.
9-47
3. When the wheel chocks are in

place, release the brake pedal
until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then
apply the parking brake and shift
into P (Park) for vehicles with an
automatic transmission or into
gear for vehicles with a manual
transmission.
5. Release the brake pedal.
Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal
while you:
.
Start the engine,
Shift into a gear, and
Release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is
clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up
and store the chocks.
9-48
Maintenance When Trailer

Towing
Trailer Towing (Except

Fuel Economy Model)
The vehicle needs service more

often when pulling a trailer. See this
manual's Maintenance Schedule or
Index for more information. Things
that are especially important in
trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid, engine oil, axle
lubricant, belts, cooling system,
and brake system. It is a good idea
to inspect these before and during
the trip.
See Weight of the Trailer Tongue

later in this section for more
information.
Before pulling a trailer, there are

three important considerations that
have to do with weight:
Maximum trailer weight is

calculated assuming only the driver
is in the tow vehicle and it has all
the required trailering equipment.
The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in
the tow vehicle must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
Check periodically to see that all

hitch nuts and bolts are tight.
Engine Cooling When Trailer

Towing
The cooling system may temporarily
overheat during severe operating
conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 1020.
The weight of the trailer.
The weight of the trailer tongue.
The total weight on your

vehicle's tires.
Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It should never weigh more than
454 kg (1,000 lbs). But even that
can be too heavy.
It depends on how the rig is used.
For example, speed, altitude, road
grades, outside temperature and
how much the vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can
depend on any special equipment
on the vehicle, and the amount of
tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
Ask your dealer for trailering

information or advice, or write us at
our Customer Assistance Offices.
See Customer Assistance Offices
Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any trailer is
an important weight to measure
because it affects the total gross
weight of the vehicle. The Gross
Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the
curb weight of the vehicle, any
cargo carried in it, and the people
who will be riding in the vehicle.

If there are a lot of options,
equipment, passengers or cargo in
the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue
weight the vehicle can carry, which
will also reduce the trailer weight the
vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,
the tongue load must be added to
the GVW because the vehicle will
be carrying that weight, too. See
Vehicle Load Limits on page 911
After loading the trailer, weigh

the trailer and then the tongue,
separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, adjustments
might be made by moving some
items around in the trailer.
Towing Equipment
Total Weight on Your Vehicle's

Tires
The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches. Do
not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use
only a frame-mounted hitch that
does not attach to the bumper.
Will any holes be made in the

body of the vehicle when the
trailer hitch is installed? If there
are, seal the holes when the
hitch is removed. If the holes
are not sealed, dirt, water, and
deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
from the exhaust can get into the
vehicle. See Engine Exhaust on
page 923.
Be sure the vehicle's tires are

inflated to the upper limit for cold
tires. These numbers can be found
on the Tire-Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits on
page 911. Make sure not to go
over the GVW limit for the vehicle,
including the weight of the trailer
tongue.
Trailer Towing (Fuel

Economy Model)
The vehicle is neither designed nor
intended to tow a trailer.
The trailer tongue (A) should weigh
1015 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B).
9-49
Hitches
Use the correct hitch equipment.
See your dealer or a hitch dealer for
assistance.
9-50
Safety Chains
Always attach chains between the
vehicle and the trailer. Cross the
safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer to help prevent the
tongue from contacting the road if it
becomes separated from the hitch.
Leave enough slack so the rig can
turn. Never allow safety chains to
drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Does the trailer have its own
brakes? Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for the trailer brakes
so they are installed, adjusted, and
maintained properly.
Because the vehicle has antilock
brakes, do not tap into the vehicle's
brake system. If this is done, both
brake systems will not work well,
or at all.
Conversions and
Add-Ons
Add-On Electrical
Equipment
Notice: Do not add anything
electrical to the vehicle unless
you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can
damage the vehicle and the
damage would not be covered
by the vehicle's warranty. Some
add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from
working as they should.
Add-on equipment can drain the

vehicle's 12volt battery, even if the
vehicle is not operating.
The vehicle has an airbag system.
Before attempting to add anything
electrical to the vehicle, see
Servicing the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 337 and Adding
Equipment to the Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle on page 338.
Vehicle Care
Vehicle Care
General Information
General Information . . . . . . . . . .
California Proposition
65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements . . . .
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-2
10-3
10-3
10-3
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Engine Compartment
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Manual Transmission
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-20
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . 10-21
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-25
Automatic Transmission Shift
Lock Control Function
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Park Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27
Wiper Blade
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Windshield Replacement . . . 10-28
10-1
Headlamp Aiming
Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps, Front Turn
Signal and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Taillamps, Turn Signal,
Sidemarker, Stoplamps,
and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-30
License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-33
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Compartment Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Instrument Panel Fuse
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10-34
10-34
10-35
10-38
10-2
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-42
Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Tire Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50
Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
When It Is Time for New
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Different Size Tires and
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Uniform Tire Quality
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Wheel Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . .
Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . .
Storing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . .
10-59
10-60
10-60
10-62
10-69
10-70
10-77
Jump Starting
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Towing
Towing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Recreational Vehicle
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Appearance Care
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
General Information
For service and parts needs,
visit your dealer. You will receive
genuine GM parts and GM-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine GM parts have one of
these marks:
Vehicle Care
California Proposition
65 Warning
Accessories and
Modifications
Most motor vehicles, including this

one, contain and/or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Engine
exhaust, many parts and systems,
many fluids, and some component
wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
Adding nondealer accessories or

making modifications to the vehicle
can affect vehicle performance and
safety, including such things as
airbags, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and
electronic systems like antilock
brakes, traction control, and stability
control. These accessories or
modifications could even cause
malfunction or damage not covered
by the vehicle warranty.
California Perchlorate
Materials Requirements
Certain types of automotive
applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners,
and lithium batteries contained in
Remote Keyless Entry transmitters,
may contain perchlorate materials.
Special handling may be necessary.
For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate.
Damage to vehicle components

resulting from modifications or the
installation or use of nonGM
certified parts, including control
module or software modifications, is
not covered under the terms of the
vehicle warranty and may affect
remaining warranty coverage for
affected parts.
10-3
GM Accessories are designed to

complement and function with other
systems on the vehicle. Your GM
dealer can accessorize the vehicle
using genuine GM Accessories.
When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians
will perform the work using genuine
GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to
the Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 338.
10-4
Vehicle Care
Vehicle Checks
Doing Your Own
Service Work
{ WARNING
You can be injured and the
vehicle could be damaged if you
try to do service work on a vehicle
without knowing enough about it.
.
Be sure you have sufficient

knowledge, experience, the
proper replacement parts,
and tools before attempting
any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper
nuts, bolts, and other
fasteners. Metric and
English fasteners can be
easily confused. If the wrong
fasteners are used, parts
can later break or fall off.
You could be hurt.
If doing some of your own service

work, use the proper service
manual. It tells you much more
about how to service the vehicle
than this manual can. To order the
proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information
on page 1312.
Hood
To open the hood:
This vehicle has an airbag system.

Before attempting to do your own
service work, see Servicing the
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on
page 337.
Keep a record with all parts receipts
and list the mileage and the date of
any service work performed. See
Maintenance Records on page 119.
1. Pull up on the hood release

handle. It is located inside the
vehicle to the left of the steering
column.
Black plate (5,1)
Vehicle Care
10-5
To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be
sure all the filler caps are on
properly. Then, lift the hood to
relieve pressure on the hood
prop. Remove the hood prop
from the slot on the underside of
the hood and return the prop to
its retainer. The prop rod must
click into place when returning it
to the retainer to prevent hood
damage.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle
and push the secondary hood
release handle toward the driver
side of the vehicle.
3. Lift the hood and release the

hood prop from its retainer,
located above the radiator.
Securely place the hood prop
into the slot on the underside
of the hood.
2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)

above the vehicle and release
it so it fully latches. Check to
make sure the hood is closed
and repeat the process if
necessary.
10-6
Black plate (6,1)
Vehicle Care
Engine Compartment Overview
1.4 L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 1014.
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
Checking Engine Oil under
Engine Oil on page 109.
C. Electric Engine Cooling Fan
(Out of View). See Cooling
System on page 1016.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See
When to Add Engine Oil
under Engine Oil on page 109.
10-7
E. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.

See Jump Starting on
page 1078.
I.
Remote Positive (+) Terminal.

page 1078.
F.
J.

Block on page 1035.
Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.

See Brake Fluid under Brakes
on page 1022 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 1014.
G. Battery on page 1025

(Under Cover).
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
and Pressure Cap. See Engine
Coolant on page 1016.
K. Windshield Washer Fluid

Reservoir. See Adding Washer
Fluid under Washer Fluid on
page 1021.
10-8
Black plate (8,1)
Vehicle Care
1.8 L L4 Engine
Vehicle Care
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on
page 1014.
B. Engine Oil Dipstick. See
Checking Engine Oil under
C. Engine Cooling Fan (Out of
View). See Cooling System on
page 1016.
D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See
When to Add Engine Oil under
E. Remote Negative (-) Terminal.
page 1078.
F.
Brake/Clutch Fluid Reservoir.

See Brake Fluid under Brakes
on page 1022 and Hydraulic
Clutch on page 1014.
I.
Remote Positive (+) Terminal.

page 1078.
J.

Block on page 1035.
K. Windshield Washer Fluid

Reservoir. See Adding Washer
Fluid under Washer Fluid on
page 1021.
Engine Oil
To ensure proper engine
performance and long life, careful
attention must be paid to engine
oil. Following these simple, but
important steps will help protect
your investment:
.
G. Battery on page 1025

(Under Cover).
H. Engine Coolant Surge Tank and
Pressure Cap. See Cooling
Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification and of
the proper viscosity grade. See
Selecting the Right Engine Oil
in this section.
Check the engine oil level
regularly and maintain
the proper oil level. See
10-9
Checking Engine Oil and

When to Add Engine Oil in
this section.
.
Change the engine oil at the

appropriate time. See Engine Oil
Life System on page 1012.
Always dispose of engine oil

properly. See What to Do with
Used Oil in this section.
Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check the
engine oil level at each fuel fill. In
order to get an accurate reading,
the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle
is a yellow loop. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 106 for the location of the
engine oil dipstick.
Obtaining an accurate oil level
reading is essential:
1. If the engine has been running
recently, turn off the engine and
allow several minutes for the oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
10-10
Vehicle Care
Checking the oil level too soon

after engine shutoff will not
provide an accurate oil level
reading.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean
it with a paper towel or cloth,
then push it back in all the way.
Remove it again, keeping the tip
down, and check the level.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the cross-hatched

area at the tip of the dipstick, add
1 L (1 qt) of the recommended oil
and then recheck the level. See
Selecting the Right Engine Oil in
this section for an explanation of
what kind of oil to use. For engine
oil crankcase capacity, see
Capacities and Specifications on
page 122.
Notice: Do not add too much oil.

Oil levels above or below the
acceptable operating range
shown on the dipstick are harmful
to the engine. If you find that you
have an oil level above the
operating range, i.e., the engine
has so much oil that the oil level
gets above the cross-hatched
area that shows the proper
operating range, the engine could
be damaged. You should drain
out the excess oil or limit driving
of the vehicle and seek a service
professional to remove the
excess amount of oil.
Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oil
depends on both the proper oil
specification and viscosity grade:
Specification
Use and ask for engine oils with the
dexos certification mark. Oils
meeting the requirements of the
vehicle should have the dexos
certification mark on the container.
This certification mark indicates that
the oil has been approved to the
dexos specification.
See Engine Compartment Overview

on page 106 for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Add enough oil to put the level
somewhere in the proper operating
range. Push the dipstick all the way
back in when through.
This vehicle was filled at the factory

with dexosapproved engine oil.
Black plate (11,1)
Vehicle Care
Notice: Use only engine oil
that is approved to the dexos
specification or an equivalent
engine oil of the appropriate
viscosity grade. Engine oils
approved to the dexos
specification will show the
dexos symbol on the container.
Failure to use the recommended
engine oil or equivalent can
result in engine damage not
If you are unsure whether the
oil is approved to the dexos
specification, ask your service
provider.
Use of Substitute Engine Oils if
dexos is unavailable: In the event
that dexosapproved engine oil is
not available at an oil change or for
maintaining proper oil level, you
may use substitute engine oil
displaying the API Starburst symbol
and of SAE 5W-30 viscosity grade.
10-11
Use of oils that do not meet the

dexos specification, however, may
result in reduced performance under
certain circumstances.
Viscosity Grade
SAE 5W-30 is the best viscosity
grade for the vehicle. Do not use
other viscosity oils such as
SAE 10W30, 10W40, or 20W-50.
Cold Temperature Operation:

In an area of extreme cold, where
the temperature falls below 29C
(20F), an SAE 0W-30 oil should
be used.
10-12
Vehicle Care
An oil of this viscosity grade

will provide easier cold starting
for the engine at extremely low
temperatures. When selecting an oil
of the appropriate viscosity grade,
be sure to always select an oil that
meets the required specification,
dexos. See Specification earlier in
this section for more information.
Engine Oil Additives/Engine

Oil Flushes
Do not add anything to the oil. The
recommended oils with the dexos
specification and displaying the
dexos certification mark are all that
is needed for good performance and
engine protection.
Engine oil system flushes are not
recommended and could cause
engine damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty.
What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certain
elements that can be unhealthy for
your skin and could even cause
cancer. Do not let used oil stay on
your skin for very long. Clean your

skin and nails with soap and water,
or a good hand cleaner. Wash or
properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer's warnings about the
use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the
environment. If you change your
own oil, be sure to drain all the oil
from the filter before disposal. Never
dispose of oil by putting it in the
trash or pouring it on the ground,
into sewers, or into streams or
bodies of water. Recycle it by taking
it to a place that collects used oil.
Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil
This vehicle has a computer system
that indicates when to change the
engine oil and filter. This is based
on a combination of factors which
include engine revolutions, engine
temperature, and miles driven.
Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change is
indicated can vary considerably. For

the oil life system to work properly,
the system must be reset every time
the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated
that oil life has been diminished, it
indicates that an oil change is
necessary. A CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON DIC message or Code
82 DIC message comes on. See
Engine Oil Messages on page 529.
Change the oil as soon as possible
within the next 1 000 km (600 mi).
It is possible that, if driving under
the best conditions, the oil life
system might indicate that an oil
change is not necessary for up to a
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year
and, at this time, the system must
be reset. Your dealer has trained
service people who will perform this
work and reset the system. It is also
important to check the oil regularly
over the course of an oil drain
interval and keep it at the proper
level.
Vehicle Care
If the system is ever reset
accidentally, the oil must be
changed at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)
since the last oil change.
Remember to reset the oil life
system whenever the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil

Life System
Reset the system whenever the
engine oil is changed so that the
system can calculate the next
engine oil change. To reset the
system:
1. Using the DIC MENU button
and thumbwheel, scroll until you
reach REMAINING OIL LIFE
on the DIC (oil can symbol
with % sign for Canada).
2. Press the SET button to reset
the oil life at 100%. When
prompted, use the thumbwheel
to highlight YES or NO. Press
the SET/CLEAR button to
confirm.
Be careful not to reset the oil life

other than after the oil is changed.
It cannot be reset accurately.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
DIC message or Code 82 DIC
message comes back on when the
vehicle is started, the engine oil life
system has not reset. Repeat the
procedure.
Fluid
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check
the transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer service department and have
it repaired as soon as possible.
The vehicle is not equipped with a
transmission fluid level dipstick.
There is a special procedure for
checking and changing the
10-13
transmission fluid. Because this

procedure is difficult, this should
be done at the dealer service
department. Contact the dealer for
Change the fluid and filter at the
intervals listed in Scheduled
Maintenance on page 112, and
be sure to use the fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 116.
Manual Transmission
Fluid
How to Check Manual
Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the
manual transmission fluid level.
A transmission fluid leak is the
only reason for fluid loss. If a leak
occurs, take the vehicle to your
dealer service department and
have it repaired as soon as
possible. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 116 for the
proper fluid to use.
10-14
Vehicle Care
Hydraulic Clutch
How to Check and Add Fluid
For vehicles with a manual

transmission, it is not necessary to
regularly check brake/clutch fluid
unless there is a leak suspected.
Adding fluid will not correct a leak.
A fluid loss in this system could
indicate a problem. Have the
system inspected and repaired.
Visually check the brake/clutch fluid

reservoir to make sure the fluid level
is at the MIN (minimum) line on the
side of the reservoir. The brake/
hydraulic clutch fluid system should
be closed and sealed.
When to Check and What

to Use
Do not remove the cap to check

the fluid level or to topoff the fluid
level. Remove the cap only when
necessary to add the proper fluid
until the level reaches the MIN line.
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 106 for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter.
The brake/hydraulic clutch fluid
reservoir cap has this symbol on it.
The common brake/clutch fluid
reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake
fluid as indicated on the reservoir
cap. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 106 for reservoir
location.
When to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the
scheduled maintenance intervals
and replace it at the first oil change
after each 80 000 km (50,000 mi)
interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 112 for more
information. If you are driving in
dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air

Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter,
remove the filter from the vehicle
and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter
remains covered with dirt, a new
filter is required.
Black plate (15,1)
Vehicle Care
To inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter:
1.8 L L4 Engine
1.4 L L4 Engine
10-15
{ WARNING
Operating the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off can cause you
or others to be burned. The air
cleaner not only cleans the air; it
helps to stop flames if the engine
backfires. Use caution when
working on the engine and do not
drive with the air cleaner/filter off.
1. Remove the 6 screws that

secure the cover on.
2. Lift off the cover.
3. Inspect or replace the engine air
cleaner/filter.
4. Align the filter correctly.
5. Install the cover by lowering it
over the filter and secure with
the 6 screws.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is

off, dirt can easily get into the
engine, which could damage it.
Always have the air cleaner/filter
in place when you are driving.
10-16
Vehicle Care
Cooling System
The cooling system allows the
engine to maintain the correct
working temperature.
{ WARNING
An electric engine cooling fan
under the hood can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can cause injury. Keep
hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING
1.4 L L4 Engine Shown,

1.8 L L4 Engine Similar
A. Engine Cooling Fan
(Out of View)
B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank
and Pressure Cap
Heater and radiator hoses, and

other engine parts, can be very
hot. Do not touch them. If you do,
you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a
leak. If you run the engine, it
could lose all coolant. That could
cause an engine fire, and you
could be burned. Get any leak
fixed before you drive the vehicle.
Notice: Using coolant other than

DEX-COOL can cause premature
engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine
coolant could require changing
sooner, at 50 000 km (30,000 mi)
or 24 months, whichever occurs
first. Any repairs would not be
Always use DEX-COOL
(silicate-free) coolant in the
vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in the vehicle
is filled with DEX-COOL engine
coolant. This coolant is designed to
remain in the vehicle for 5 years or
240 000 km (150,000 mi), whichever
occurs first.
The following explains the cooling
system and how to check and add
coolant when it is low. If there is a
problem with engine overheating,
see Engine Overheating on
page 1020.
Vehicle Care
What to Use
{ WARNING
Adding only plain water or some
other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too
hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,

drinkable water and DEX-COOL
coolant. If using this mixture,
nothing else needs to be added.
This mixture:
.
Gives freezing protection down

to 37C (34F), outside
temperature.
Gives boiling protection up to

129C (265F), engine
temperature.
Protects against rust and

corrosion.
Will not damage aluminum parts.
Helps keep the proper engine

temperature.
Notice: If an improper coolant

mixture is used, the engine could
overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be
Too much water in the mixture
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core, and other
parts.
10-17
Never dispose of engine coolant

by putting it in the trash, pouring
it on the ground, or into sewers,
streams, or bodies of water.
Have the coolant changed by an
authorized service center, familiar
with legal requirements regarding
used coolant disposal. This will
help protect the environment and
your health.
Checking Coolant
The vehicle must be on a level
surface when checking the coolant
level.
Check to see if coolant is visible in
the coolant surge tank. If the coolant
inside the coolant surge tank is
boiling, do not do anything else until
it cools down. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at the
indicated mark, add a 50/50 mixture
of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL coolant at the coolant
surge tank, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before this is done.
See Engine Overheating on
10-18
Vehicle Care
The coolant surge tank is located

in the engine compartment on the
driver side of the vehicle. See
Engine Compartment Overview on
page 106 for more information on
location.
How to Add Coolant to the

Coolant Surge Tank
Notice: This vehicle has a
specific coolant fill procedure.
Failure to follow this procedure
could cause the engine to
overheat and be severely
damaged.
If no problem is found, check to
see if coolant is visible in the
coolant surge tank. If coolant is
visible but the coolant level is not
at the indicated level mark, add a
water and DEX-COOL coolant at
the coolant surge tank, but be sure
the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is
cool before you do it.
{ WARNING
{ WARNING
Steam and scalding liquids from a

hot cooling system can blow out
and burn you badly. They are
under pressure, and if you turn
the coolant surge tank pressure
cap even a little they can
come out at high speed. Never
turn the cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is hot.
Wait for the cooling system and
coolant surge tank pressure cap
to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Adding only plain water or some

other liquid to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water
and other liquids, can boil before
the proper coolant mixture will.
The coolant warning system is
set for the proper coolant mixture.
With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get
too hot but you would not get the
overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or
others could be burned. Use a
water and DEX-COOL coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water
can freeze and crack the engine,
radiator, heater core and other
parts. Use the recommended
coolant and the proper coolant
mixture.
Black plate (19,1)
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
You can be burned if you spill
coolant on hot engine parts.
Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot enough. Do not spill
coolant on a hot engine.
surge tank pressure cap and

upper radiator hose, is no
longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly
counterclockwise about
one-quarter of a turn. If you
hear a hiss, wait for that to stop.
This will allow any pressure still
left to be vented out the
discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure
cap slowly and remove it.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with
the proper DEX-COOL coolant
mixture to the indicated
level mark.
1.4 L L4 Engine Shown,

1.8 L L4 Engine Similar
1. Remove the coolant surge tank
pressure cap when the cooling
system, including the coolant
4. With the coolant surge tank

pressure cap off, start the
engine and let it run until the
upper radiator hose can be felt
getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
10-19
By this time, the coolant level

inside the coolant surge tank
may be lower. If the level is
lower, add more of the proper
DEX-COOL coolant mixture to
the coolant surge tank until the
level reaches the indicated
level mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap.
Be sure the pressure cap is
hand-tight.
Check the level in the coolant
surge tank when the cooling system
has cooled down. If the coolant is
not at the proper level, repeat
Steps 1 through 3 and reinstall the
pressure cap. If the coolant still is
not at the proper level when the
system cools down again, see your
dealer.
10-20
Vehicle Care
Engine Overheating
The vehicle has several indicators
to warn of engine overheating.
There is an engine coolant
temperature gauge on the vehicle
instrument panel cluster. See
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
on page 510.
If the decision is made not to lift the
hood when this warning appears,
get service help right away. See
Roadside Assistance Program on
page 136.
If the decision is made to lift the
hood, make sure the vehicle is
parked on a level surface.
Check to see if the engine cooling
fan is running. If the engine is
overheating, the fan should be
running. If it is not, do not continue
to run the engine and have the
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Engine damage from
running the engine without
coolant is not covered by the
warranty.
If Steam is Coming from the

Engine Compartment
{ WARNING
Steam from an overheated engine
can burn you badly, even if you
just open the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it
off and get everyone away from
the vehicle until it cools down.
Wait until there is no sign of
steam or coolant before you open
the hood.
If you keep driving when the
engine is overheated, the liquids
in it can catch fire. You or others
could be badly burned. Stop the
engine if it overheats, and get out
of the vehicle until the engine
is cool.
If No Steam is Coming from

the Engine Compartment
If an engine overheat warning is
displayed but no steam can be seen
or heard, the problem may not be
too serious. Sometimes the engine
can get a little too hot when the
vehicle:
.
Climbs a long hill on a hot day.
Stops after high-speed driving.
Idles for long periods in traffic.
Tows a trailer.
If the overheat warning is displayed

with no sign of steam:
1. Turn the air off.
2. Turn the heater on to the highest
temperature and to the highest
fan speed. Open the windows as
necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine
idle in N (Neutral) while stopped.
If it is safe to do so, pull off the
road, shift to P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and let the
engine idle.
Vehicle Care
If the temperature overheat gauge
is no longer in the overheat zone or
an overheat warning no longer
displays, the vehicle can be driven.
Continue to drive the vehicle slowly
for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe
vehicle distance from the vehicle in
front. If the warning does not come
back on, continue to drive normally.
If the warning continues, pull over,
stop, and park the vehicle
right away.
If there is no sign of steam, idle
the engine for three minutes
while parked. If the warning is still
displayed, turn off the engine until it
cools down. Also, see Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode
following.
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode
allows the vehicle to be driven
to a safe place in an emergency
situation. If an overheated engine
condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates
firing groups of cylinders helps
prevent engine damage. In this
mode, a significant loss in power
and engine performance will be
noticed. The temperature gauge
will indicate an overheat condition
exists. Driving extended km (mi)
and/or towing a trailer in the
overheat protection mode should
be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the
overheated engine protection
operating mode, to avoid engine
damage, allow the engine to cool
before attempting any repair.
10-21
The engine oil will be severely

degraded. Repair the cause of
coolant loss, change the oil and
reset the oil life system. See
Power Steering Fluid

The vehicle is equipped with an
electric power steering system.
No fluid or general maintenance
is required.
Washer Fluid
What to Use
When windshield washer fluid
is needed, be sure to read the
manufacturer's instructions before
use. If operating the vehicle in an
area where the temperature may fall
below freezing, use a fluid that has
sufficient protection against
freezing.
10-22
Vehicle Care
Adding Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the washer

symbol on it. Add washer fluid
until the tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview on
page 106 for reservoir location.
Notice
.
When using concentrated

washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer's instructions
for adding water.
Do not mix water with
ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution
to freeze and damage the
washer fluid tank and other
parts of the washer system.
Also, water does not clean as
well as washer fluid.
Fill the washer fluid tank

only three-quarters full
when it is very cold. This
allows for fluid expansion
if freezing occurs, which
could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
Do not use engine coolant
(antifreeze) in the windshield
washer. It can damage the
windshield washer system
and paint.
Brakes
This vehicle has front disc brakes
and could have rear drum brakes or
rear disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear
indicators that make a high-pitched
warning sound when the brake pads
are worn and new pads are needed.
The sound can come and go or be
heard all the time the vehicle is
moving, except when applying the
brake pedal firmly.
{ WARNING
The brake wear warning sound
means that soon the brakes will
not work well. That could lead to
a crash. When the brake wear
warning sound is heard, have the
vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with
worn-out brake pads could result
in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates
can cause a brake squeal when the
brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean
something is wrong with the brakes.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are
necessary to help prevent brake
pulsation. When tires are rotated,
inspect brake pads for wear and
evenly tighten wheel nuts in the
proper sequence to torque
specifications in Capacities and
Specifications on page 122.
Vehicle Care
If the vehicle has rear drum brakes,
they do not have wear indicators,
but if a rear brake rubbing noise is
heard, have the rear brake linings
inspected immediately. Rear brake
drums should be removed and
inspected each time the tires are
removed for rotation or changing.
Drum brakes have an inspection
hole to inspect lining wear during
scheduled maintenance. When the
front brake pads are replaced, have
the rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be
replaced as complete axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedal
does not return to normal height,
or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign
that brake service might be
required.
Brake Adjustment
10-23
Brake Fluid
Every time the brakes are applied,

with or without the vehicle moving,
the brakes adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle is
complex. Its many parts have to be
of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good
braking. The vehicle was designed
and tested with top-quality brake
parts. When parts of the braking
system are replaced, be sure to get
new, approved replacement parts.
If this is not done, the brakes might
not work properly. For example,
installing disc brake pads that are
wrong for the vehicle, can change
the balance between the front and
rear brakes for the worse. The
braking performance expected can
change in many other ways if the
wrong replacement brake parts are
installed.
The brake/clutch master cylinder

reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake
fluid as indicated on the reservoir
cap. See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 106 for the
location of the reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the
brake fluid level in the reservoir
might go down:
.
The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake lining
wear. When new linings are
installed, the fluid level goes
back up.
10-24
.
Vehicle Care
A fluid leak in the brake/clutch

hydraulic system can also cause
a low fluid level. Have the brake/
clutch hydraulic system fixed,
since a leak means that sooner
or later the brakes will not
work well.
Do not top off the brake/clutch fluid.

Adding fluid does not correct a leak.
If fluid is added when the linings are
worn, there will be too much fluid
when new brake linings are
installed. Add or remove fluid, as
necessary, only when work is done
on the brake/clutch hydraulic
system.
{ WARNING
If too much brake fluid is added, it
can spill on the engine and burn,
if the engine is hot enough. You
or others could be burned, and
the vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is
done on the brake/clutch
hydraulic system.
Checking Brake Fluid

The brake/clutch fluid can be
checked without taking off the cap
by looking at the brake/clutch fluid
reservoir.
The fluid level should be above
MIN. If it is not, have the brake/
clutch hydraulic system checked to
see if there is a leak.
After work is done on the brake/
clutch hydraulic system, make sure
the level is above MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
When the brake/clutch fluid falls to a
low level, the brake warning light
comes on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 516.
What to Add
Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid
from a sealed container. See
Lubricants on page 116.
Always clean the brake/clutch fluid

reservoir cap and the area around
the cap before removing it. This
helps keep dirt from entering the
reservoir.
{ WARNING
With the wrong kind of fluid in the
brake/clutch hydraulic system, the
brakes might not work well. This
could cause a crash. Always use
the proper brake/clutch fluid.
Notice
.
Using the wrong fluid can

badly damage brake/clutch
hydraulic system parts. For
example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as
engine oil, in the brake
hydraulic system can
damage brake hydraulic
system parts so badly that
they will have to be replaced.
Do not let someone put in
the wrong kind of fluid.
Vehicle Care
.
If brake fluid is spilled

on the vehicle's painted
surfaces, the paint finish can
be damaged. Be careful not
to spill brake fluid on the
vehicle. If you do, wash it off
immediately.
Battery
Refer to the replacement number on
the original battery label when a
new battery is needed.
{ DANGER
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain lead
and lead compounds, chemicals
known to the State of California to
cause cancer and reproductive
harm. Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
{ WARNING
Batteries have acid that can burn
you and gas that can explode.
You can be badly hurt if you are
not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 1078 for tips on working
around a battery without
getting hurt.
Infrequent Usage: Remove the
black, negative () cable from the
battery to keep the battery from
running down.
Extended Storage: Remove the
black, negative () cable from the
battery or use a battery trickle
charger.
10-25
Starter Switch Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both the parking
brake and the regular brake.
See Parking Brake on
page 931.
Do not use the accelerator
pedal, and be ready to turn off
the engine immediately if it
starts.
10-26
Vehicle Care
3. For automatic transmission

vehicles, try to start the engine
in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in P (Park) or
N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts
in any other position, contact
For manual transmission
vehicles, put the shift lever in
Neutral, push the clutch pedal
down halfway, and try to start
the engine. The vehicle should
start only when the clutch pedal
is pushed down all the way to
the floor. If the vehicle starts
when the clutch pedal is not
pushed all the way down,
contact your dealer for service.
Shift Lock Control
Function Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this
inspection, the vehicle could
move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be
injured.
1. Before starting this check, be
sure there is enough room
around the vehicle. It should be
parked on a level surface.
3. With the engine off, turn the

ignition on, but do not start the
engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the
shift lever out of P (Park) with
normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of P (Park), contact
Ignition Transmission
Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking
brake set, try to turn the ignition to
LOCK/OFF in each shift lever
position.
.
For automatic transmission

vehicles, the ignition should turn
to LOCK/OFF only when the
shift lever is in P (Park). The
ignition key should come out
only in LOCK/OFF.
For manual transmission

vehicles, the ignition key should
come out only in LOCK/OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on
page 931.
Be ready to apply the regular
brake immediately if the vehicle
begins to move.
Contact your dealer if service is

required.
Vehicle Care
Park Brake and P (Park)

Mechanism Check
{ WARNING
When you are doing this check,
the vehicle could begin to move.
You or others could be injured
and property could be damaged.
Make sure there is room in front
of the vehicle in case it begins to
roll. Be ready to apply the regular
brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the
vehicle facing downhill. Keeping
your foot on the regular brake, set
the parking brake.
.
To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the engine
running and the transmission in
N (Neutral), slowly remove foot
pressure from the regular brake
pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
To check the P (Park)

mechanism's holding ability:
With the engine running, shift
to P (Park). Then release the
parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your dealer if service is

required.
10-27
be covered by your warranty.

Do not allow the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield.
To replace the windshield wiper
blade:
1. Pull the wiper assembly away
from the windshield.
Wiper Blade Replacement

Windshield wiper blades should
be inspected for wear or cracking.
See Scheduled Maintenance on
Replacement blades come in
different types and are removed
in different ways. For proper
windshield wiper blade length
and type, see Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 118.
Notice: Allowing the wiper blade
arm to touch the windshield when
no wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
2. Lift up on the plastic latch in the

middle of the wiper blade where
the wiper arm attaches.
10-28
Vehicle Care
3. With the latch open, pull the

wiper blade down toward the
windshield far enough to release
it from the J-hooked end of the
wiper arm.
Headlamp Aiming
Bulb Replacement
Headlamp aim has been preset at

the factory and should need no
further adjustment.
For the proper type of replacement

bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on
page 1033.
4. Remove the wiper blade.
However, if the vehicle is damaged

in a crash, the headlamp aim may
be affected. Aim adjustment to the
low-beam headlamps may be
necessary if oncoming drivers flash
their high-beam headlamps at you
(for vertical aim).
For any bulbchanging procedure

not listed in this section, contact
your dealer.
Allowing the wiper blade arm to

touch the windshield when no
wiper blade is installed could
damage the windshield. Any
damage that occurs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Do not allow the wiper
blade to touch the windshield.
5. Reverse steps 1 through 3 for
wiper blade replacement.
If the headlamps need to be

re-aimed, it is recommended that
the vehicle be taken to a dealer for
service.

Signal and Parking
Lamps
Windshield Replacement
The vehicle is equipped with an
acoustic windshield. If you ever
have to have the windshield
replaced be sure to get an acoustic
windshield so you will continue to
have the benefits an acoustic
windshield can provide.
A. Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

B. HighBeam Headlamp/
LowBeam Headlamp and DRL
Vehicle Care
HighBeam Headlamp/
LowBeam Headlamp and DRL
1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 104.
3. Disconnect the wiring harness

connector from the bulb (C)
by pressing the connector
release (B) and pulling
straight back.
10-29
Parking/Turn Signal Lamp

1. Open the hood. See Hood on
page 104.
4. Remove the bulb (C) from the

headlamp assembly by turning
counterclockwise and pulling
straight back.
5. Install the new bulb in the
clockwise.
6. Install the wiring harness
connector to the bulb. Be sure
the connector release (B) locks
into place.
2. Remove the connector
retaining tab (A).
7. Install the connector

retaining tab (A).
2. Remove the parking/turn signal

lamp bulb socket from the
counterclockwise.
10-30
Black plate (30,1)
Vehicle Care

and Back-Up Lamps
3. Remove the bulb (A) from the

bulb socket.
2. Remove the trunk deck trim

cover (A).
4. Install the new bulb in the bulb

socket.
3. Remove the bulb socket (B) by

turning counterclockwise and
pulling straight out.
5. Install the bulb socket into the

clockwise.
Trunk Deck Inboard Taillamps

1. Open the trunk.
Black plate (31,1)
Vehicle Care
10-31
Stoplamp/Taillamp, Turn Signal,

Backup, and Sidemarker Lamp
1. Open the trunk.
4. Remove the bulb from the

socket (A).
A. Back-up Lamp
5. Install the new bulb in the bulb

socket.
C. Turn Signal Lamp
6. Install the bulb socket by turning

clockwise.
To replace any one of these bulbs:
7. Install the trunk deck trim cover.
B. Stop Lamp/Taillamp
D. Sidemarker Lamp
2. Open the two screw covers.
10-32
Black plate (32,1)
Vehicle Care
3. Remove the two screws, which

secure the taillamp assembly.
4. Remove the taillamp assembly

by pulling it straight back until
the two posts disengage from
the grommets.
A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Stop Lamp/Taillamp
D. Back-up Lamp
5. Remove the bulb socket from
the taillamp assembly by turning
it counterclockwise.
6. Install a new bulb into the bulb
socket.
7. Install the bulb socket into the
taillamp assembly by turning it
clockwise.
Black plate (33,1)
Vehicle Care
Replacement Bulbs
8. Install the taillamp assembly and

tighten the two screws.
Exterior Lamp
9. Close the two screw covers.
Back-Up Lamp
License Plate Lamp

To replace the license plate
lamp bulb:
2. Turn and pull the license plate

lamp assembly down.
3. Turn the bulb socket
counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
4. Push the new bulb into the
socket.
1. Remove the two screws from the
license plate lamp assembly.
10-33
5. Install the bulb socket by turning

clockwise into the license plate
lamp assembly.
6. Replace the license plate lamp
assembly by using the two
screws to secure.
Bulb
Number
921K
Front and Rear

Sidemarker Lamp
194
Front Parking/Turn
Signal Lamp
7444NA
High Beam/Low
Beam and DRL
Headlamp
Rear Turn
Signal Lamp
Stop Lamp/Taillamp
H13LL
7443NA
3057K LCP
For replacement bulbs not listed

here, contact your dealer.
10-34
Vehicle Care
Electrical System
Electrical System
Overload
The vehicle has fuses and circuit
breakers to protect against an
electrical system overload.
When the current electrical load is
too heavy, the circuit breaker opens
and closes, protecting the circuit
until the current load returns to
normal or the problem is fixed. This
greatly reduces the chance of circuit
overload and fire caused by
electrical problems.
Fuses and circuit breakers protect
power devices in the vehicle.
Replace a bad fuse with a new one
of the identical size and rating.
If there is a problem on the road
and a fuse needs to be replaced,
the same amperage fuse can be
borrowed. Choose some feature of
the vehicle that is not needed to use
and replace it as soon as possible.
Headlamp Wiring
An electrical overload may cause
the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. Have
the headlamp wiring checked right
away if the lamps go on and off or
remain off.
Windshield Wipers
If the wiper motor overheats due to
heavy snow or ice, the windshield
wipers will stop until the motor cools
and will then restart.
Although the circuit is protected
from electrical overload, overload
due to heavy snow or ice may
cause wiper linkage damage.
Always clear ice and heavy snow
from the windshield before using
the windshield wipers.
If the overload is caused by an
electrical problem and not snow or
ice, be sure to get it fixed.
Fuses and Circuit

Breakers
The wiring circuits in the vehicle are
protected from short circuits by a
combination of fuses and circuit
breakers. This greatly reduces the
chance of damage caused by
electrical problems.
To check a fuse, look at the
silver-colored band inside the fuse.
If the band is broken or melted,
replace the fuse. Be sure to replace
a bad fuse with a new one of the
identical size and rating.
Fuses of the same amperage can
be temporarily borrowed from
another fuse location, if a fuse
goes out. Replace the fuse as
soon as possible.
To identify and check fuses, circuit
breakers, and relays, see Engine
Compartment Fuse Block on
page 1035 and Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 1038.
Black plate (35,1)
Vehicle Care
10-35
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block
To remove the fuse block cover,

squeeze the clips and swing it up.
Notice: Spilling liquid on any
electrical component on the
vehicle may damage it. Always
keep the covers on any electrical
component.
Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Mini Fuses
Usage
Transmission
Control Module
Engine Control
Module
Not Used
10-36
Black plate (36,1)
Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses
Usage
Canister Vent
Solenoid
Ignition
Not Used
Fuel Injection
Fuel Injection/
Ignition System
Mini Fuses
Usage
Mini Fuses
Usage
20
Fuel Pump
46
Cooling Fan
23
Not Used
47
Lambda Sensor
29
Not Used
48
Fog Lights
30
Antilock Brake
System
49
Not Used
50
Not Used
31
Body Control
Module
51
Horn
52
Ignition
53
Automatic Dimming
Rearview Mirror
54
Light Switch/Light
Control
55
Mirror Folding
56
Windshield Washer
57
Steering
Column Lock
Engine Control
Module
32
11
Lambda Sensor
33
Front Seat Heating
13
Canister Vent
Solenoid
34
Sunroof
(If Equipped)
14
Not Used
35
15
Rear Wiper
Infotainment
System/Amplifier
Ignition/Air Quality
Sensor/AeroShutter
36
Not Used
16
37
17
Ignition/Airbag
High Beam
Right Side
58
Not Used
18
Fuel Control Module
38
High Beam Left Side
60
Heated Mirror
39
Not Used
61
Heated Mirror
40
Not Used
62
Air Conditioning
10
19
Not Used
Body Control
Module
Black plate (37,1)
Vehicle Care
Mini Fuses
Usage
63
Rear Window
Sensor
64
Air Quality Sensor
65
Rear Fog Lamp
66
Rear Washer
67
Fuel System Control

Module
68
Not Used
69
Battery Voltage
Sensor
70
Rain Sensor
71
Not Used
JCase
Fuses
Usage
JCase
Fuses
Usage
Micro
Relays
10-37
Usage
22
Not Used
A/C Clutch
24
Front Power
Windows
Starter Solenoid
Front Wiper Speed
25
Electronic
Vacuum Pump
Front Wiper On
Not Used
10
Cooling Fan K3
12
Cooling Fan K3
14
Not Used
26
Antilock Brake
System Pump
27
Electronic Key
System
28
Rear Window
Defogger
41
Not Used
42
Cooling Fan K2
Cooling Fan K7
43
Not Used
Fuel Pump
11
Not Used
Front Wipers
44
Not Used
12
Starter Solenoid
45
Cooling Fan K1
21
Rear Power
Windows
59
Not Used
UMicro
Relays
Usage
10-38
Black plate (38,1)
Vehicle Care
HC Relays
Usage
Cooling Fan K2
13
Cooling Fan K1
Mini Relays

Block
Usage
Ignition 87 Main
15
Ignition 15
16
Not Used
17
Not Used
The instrument panel fuse block is

in the driver side of instrument
panel. To access the fuses:
1. Open the fuse block cover by
pulling out at the top.
2. Remove the lower edge of the
cover.
3. Remove the cover.
To reinstall the cover, reverse the
steps above.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equipped
with all of the fuses, relays, and
features shown.
Black plate (39,1)
Vehicle Care
Fuses
1
Usage
Infotainment
System/Handsfree
Phone
Fuses
Usage
10
Body Control
Module
11
Interior Fan
Fuses
Usage
21
Instrument Cluster
22
Ignition/Electronic
Key System
23
Body Control
Module
Not Used
12
Not Used
Body Control
Module
13
Power Seat
Infotainment System
14
Diagnostic
Connector
24
Body Control
Module
Information Display/
Parking Assist
15
Airbag
25
Steering
Column Lock
Cigarette Lighter
16
Central Locking
System/Tailgate
26
Not Used
Power Outlet
17
Air Conditioning
System
Relays
Body Control
Module
Body Control
Module
18
Not Used
19
Not Used
20
Not Used
10-39
Usage
Trunk Open
Logistics Module
Power Outlet
10-40
Vehicle Care
Wheels and Tires

Tires
WARNING (Continued)
.
Every new GM vehicle has

high-quality tires made by a
leading tire manufacturer.
See the warranty manual for
information regarding the tire
warranty and where to get
service. For additional
information refer to the tire
manufacturer.
{ WARNING
.
Poorly maintained and

improperly used tires are
dangerous.
Overloading the tires can
cause overheating as a result
of too much flexing. There
could be a blowout and a
serious crash. See Vehicle
Load Limits on page 911.
(Continued)
Underinflated tires pose the

same danger as overloaded
tires. The resulting crash
could cause serious injury.
Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure
should be checked when
the tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more
likely to be cut, punctured,
or broken by a sudden
impact such as when
hitting a pothole. Keep tires at
the recommended pressure.
Worn or old tires can cause a

crash. If the tread is badly
worn, replace them.
Replace any tires that have

been damaged by impacts
with potholes, curbs, etc.
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
.
Improperly repaired tires

can cause a crash. Only the
dealer or an authorized tire
service center should repair,
replace, dismount, and mount
the tires.
Do not spin the tires in

excess of 55 km/h (35 mph)
on slippery surfaces such
as snow, mud, ice, etc.
Excessive spinning may
cause the tires to explode.
Winter Tires
Consider installing winter tires on
the vehicle if frequent driving on
snow or ice covered roads is
expected. All season tires provide
good overall performance on most
surfaces, but they may not offer
the traction or the same level of
performance as winter tires on
snow or ice covered roads.
Vehicle Care
Winter tires, in general, are
designed for increased traction on
snow and ice covered roads. With
winter tires, there may be decreased
dry road traction, increased road
noise, and shorter tread life. After
changing to winter tires, be alert for
changes in vehicle handling and
braking.
Winter tires with the same speed

rating as the original equipment tires
may not be available for H, V, W, Y,
and ZR speed rated tires. If winter
tires with a lower speed rating are
chosen, never exceed the tire's
maximum speed capability.
See your dealer for details

regarding winter tire availability and
proper tire selection. Also, see
Buying New Tires on page 1055.
If the vehicle has P225/45R18

size tires, they are classified as
lowprofile tires. These tires are
designed for very responsive
driving on wet or dry pavement,
however, may produce more
road noise and tend to wear
faster.
If using snow tires:

.
Use tires of the same brand and

tread type on all four wheel
positions.
Use only radial ply tires of the

same size, load range, and
speed rating as the original
equipment tires.
Low-Profile Tires
10-41
Notice: Lowprofile tires are

more susceptible to damage
from road hazards or curb
impact than standard profile
tires. Tire and/or wheel
assembly damage can occur
when coming into contact
with road hazards like,
potholes, or sharp edged
objects, or when sliding into
a curb. The warranty does not
cover this type of damage.
Keep tires set to the correct
inflation pressure and, when
possible, avoid contact with
curbs, potholes, and other
road hazards.
10-42
Vehicle Care
Tire Sidewall Labeling

Useful information about a tire
is molded into its sidewall.
The examples show a typical
passenger vehicle tire and a
compact spare tire sidewall.
Passenger (PMetric) Tire Example
(A) Tire Size: The tire size is

a combination of letters and
numbers used to define a
particular tire's width, height,
aspect ratio, construction type,
and service description. See the

Tire Size illustration later in this
section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of
Transportation): The
Department of Transportation
(DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number
(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code are the
Tire Identification Number

(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material : The type
of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality
Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required
to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear,
traction, and temperature
resistance. For more information
see Uniform Tire Quality
Grading on page 1057.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
Vehicle Care
and gone flat. If the vehicle
has a compact spare tire,
see Compact Spare Tire on
page 1077 and If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 1060.
Compact Spare Tire Example
(A) Tire Ply Material: The type

of cord and number of plies in
the sidewall and under the tread.
(B) Temporary Use Only:
The compact spare tire or
temporary use tire has a tread
life of approximately 5 000 km
(3,000 mi) and should not be
driven at speeds over 105 km/h
(65 mph). The compact spare
tire is for emergency use when
a regular road tire has lost air
(C) Tire Identification Number

(TIN): The letters and numbers
following the DOT (Department
of Transportation) code are
the Tire Identification Number
(TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code,
tire size, and date the tire was
manufactured. The TIN is
molded onto both sides of the
tire, although only one side may
have the date of manufacture.
(D) Maximum Cold Inflation
Load Limit: Maximum load
that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to
support that load.
10-43
(E) Tire Inflation: The

temporary use tire or compact
spare tire should be inflated
to 420 kPa (60 psi). For more
information on tire pressure and
inflation see Tire Pressure on
page 1047.
(F) Tire Size: A combination of
letters and numbers define a
tire's width, height, aspect ratio,
construction type, and service
description. The letter T as the
first character in the tire size
means the tire is for temporary
use only.
(G) TPC Spec (Tire
Performance Criteria
Specification): Original
equipment tires designed to
GM's specific tire performance
criteria have a TPC specification
code molded onto the sidewall.
GM's TPC specifications meet or
exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
10-44
Black plate (44,1)
Vehicle Care
Tire Designations
Tire Size
The following is an example
of a typical passenger vehicle
tire size.
(A) Passenger (PMetric) Tire:

The United States version of a
metric tire sizing system. The
letter P as the first character in
the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to
standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The threedigit
number indicates the tire section
width in millimeters from
sidewall to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A twodigit

number that indicates the tire
heighttowidth measurements.
For example, if the tire size
aspect ratio is 60, as shown in
item C of the illustration, it would
mean that the tire's sidewall is
60 percent as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A
letter code is used to indicate
the type of ply construction in
the tire. The letter R means
radial ply construction; the
letter D means diagonal or
bias ply construction; and the
letter B means beltedbias ply
construction.
(E) Rim Diameter : Diameter of
the wheel in inches.
(F) Service Description: These
characters represent the load
index and speed rating of the
tire. The load index represents
the load carrying capacity a tire
is certified to carry. The speed

rating is the maximum speed a
tire is certified to carry a load.
Tire Terminology and

Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount
of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square
inch of the tire. Air pressure is
expressed in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch).
Accessory Weight: The
combined weight of optional
accessories. Some examples
of optional accessories are
automatic transmission, power
steering, power brakes, power
windows, power seats, and air
conditioning.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship
of a tire's height to its width.
Vehicle Care
Belt: A rubber coated layer of
cords that is located between
the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other
reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains
steel wires wrapped by steel
cords that hold the tire onto
the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the plies are laid
at alternate angles less than
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The
amount of air pressure in a tire,
measured in kPa (kilopascal)
or psi (pounds per square inch)
before a tire has built up heat
from driving. See Tire Pressure
on page 1047.
Curb Weight: The weight of a
motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel,

oil, and coolant, but without
passengers and cargo.
DOT Markings: A code
molded into the sidewall of
a tire signifying that the tire
is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation
(DOT) Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric
designator which can also
identify the tire manufacturer,
production plant, brand, and
date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 911.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the front axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 911.
10-45
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight

Rating for the rear axle. See
Vehicle Load Limits on
page 911.
Intended Outboard Sidewall :
The side of an asymmetrical tire,
that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric
unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LTMetric) Tire: A
tire used on light duty trucks and
some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned
number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load
carrying capacity of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure:
The maximum air pressure to
which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is
molded onto the sidewall.
10-46
Vehicle Care
Maximum Load Rating: The

load rating for a tire at the
maximum permissible inflation
pressure for that tire.
model name molding that is

higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall
of the tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle

Weight: The sum of curb
weight, accessory weight,
vehicle capacity weight, and
production options weight.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:

A tire used on passenger cars
and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Normal Occupant Weight: The

number of occupants a vehicle
is designed to seat multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs). See Vehicle
Occupant Distribution :
Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire that
has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a
vehicle. The side of the tire that
contains a whitewall, bears
white lettering, or bears
manufacturer, brand, and/or
Recommended Inflation
Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer's recommended
tire inflation pressure as shown
on the tire placard. See Tire
Pressure on page 1047
andVehicle Load Limits on
page 911.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic
tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of
the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire
and upon which the tire beads
are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire

between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An
alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum
speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between
the tire and the road surface.
The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with
the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called wear
bars, that show across the tread
of a tire when only 1.6 mm
(1/16 in) of tread remains. See
When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 1054.
Vehicle Care
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards): A tire
information system that
provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction,
temperature, and treadwear.
Ratings are determined
by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures.
The ratings are molded into the
sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on
page 1057.
Vehicle Capacity Weight:
The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by
68 kg (150 lbs) plus the rated
cargo load. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 911.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire
due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and
cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label

permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle
capacity weight and the
original equipment tire size
and recommended inflation
pressure. See Tire and Loading
Information Label under Vehicle
10-47
Premature or
irregular wear.
Poor handling.
Reduced fuel economy.
Overinflated tires, or tires

that have too much air, can
result in:
.
Unusual wear.
Tire Pressure
Poor handling.
Tires need the correct amount

of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Rough ride.
Needless damage from

road hazards.
Notice: Neither tire

underinflation nor
overinflation is good.
Underinflated tires, or tires
that do not have enough air,
can result in:
.
Tire overloading and

overheating which could
lead to a blowout.

Information label on the
vehicle indicates the original
equipment tires and the correct
cold tire inflation pressures. The
recommended pressure is the
minimum air pressure needed to
support the vehicle's maximum
load carrying capacity.
10-48
Vehicle Care
For additional information

regarding how much weight
the vehicle can carry, and an
example of the Tire and Loading
Information label, see Vehicle
Load Limits on page 911. How
the vehicle is loaded affects
vehicle handling and ride
comfort. Never load the vehicle
with more weight than it was
designed to carry.
When to Check
Check the tires once a month
or more. Do not forget the
compact spare tire, if the vehicle
has one. The compact spare
should be at 420 kPa (60 psi).
For additional information
regarding the compact spare
tire, see Compact Spare Tire on
page 1077.
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type
gauge to check tire pressure.
Proper tire inflation cannot be
determined by looking at the tire.
Check the tire inflation pressure
when the tires are cold, meaning
the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours or no
more than 1.6 km (1 mi).
Remove the valve cap from the
tire valve stem. Press the tire
gauge firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement.
If the cold tire inflation pressure
matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label, no
further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low,
add air until the recommended
pressure is reached. If the
inflation pressure is high, press
on the metal stem in the center
of the tire valve to release air.
Recheck the tire pressure with

the tire gauge.
Return the valve caps on the
valve stems to prevent leaks
and keep out dirt and moisture.

System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) uses radio and sensor
technology to check tire pressure
levels. The TPMS sensors monitor
the air pressure in your tires and
transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Each tire, including the spare
(if provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or
Vehicle Care
tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a
tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them
to the proper pressure. Driving on
a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the
vehicle's handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is

not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's
responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has
not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been
equipped with a TPMS malfunction
indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated.
This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle startups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator
is illuminated, the system may
not be able to detect or signal low
tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a
10-49
variety of reasons, including the

installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. Always check
the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate
tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
See Tire Pressure Monitor
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and
Industry Canada
10-50
Vehicle Care

Operation
This vehicle may have a Tire
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS).
The TPMS is designed to warn
the driver when a low tire pressure
condition exists. TPMS sensors are
mounted onto each tire and wheel
assembly, excluding the spare tire
and wheel assembly. The TPMS
sensors monitor the air pressure
in the tires and transmit the tire
pressure readings to a receiver
located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure condition

is detected, the TPMS illuminates
the low tire pressure warning light
located on the instrument cluster.
If the warning light comes on, stop

as soon as possible and inflate the
tires to the recommended pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 911.
A message to check the pressure in
a specific tire displays in the Driver
Information Center (DIC) display.
and the DIC warning message come
on at each ignition cycle until the
tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure. Using the DIC,
tire pressure levels can be viewed.
For additional information and
details about the DIC operation and
displays see Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 523.
may come on in cool weather when
the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as the vehicle is driven. This
could be an early indicator that the
air pressure is getting low and must
be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information

label shows the size of the original
equipment tires and the correct
inflation pressure for the tires when
they are cold. See Vehicle Load
Limits on page 911, for an example
of the Tire and Loading Information
label and its location. Also see Tire
Pressure on page 1047.
The TPMS can warn about a
low tire pressure condition but
it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection
on page 1053, Tire Rotation on
page 1053 and Tires on
page 1040.
Notice: Tire sealant materials are
not all the same. A non-approved
tire sealant could damage the
TPMS sensors. TPMS sensor
damage caused by using an
incorrect tire sealant is not
covered by the vehicle
warranty. Always use only the
GM-approved tire sealant
available through your dealer
or included in the vehicle.
Vehicle Care
Factory-installed Tire Inflator Kits
use a GM-approved liquid tire
sealant. Using non-approved tire
sealants could damage the TPMS
sensors. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 1062 for
information regarding the inflator kit
materials and instructions.
TPMS Malfunction Light and

Message
The TPMS will not function properly
if one or more of the TPMS sensors
are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the
low tire warning light flashes for
about one minute and then stays on
for the remainder of the ignition
cycle. A DIC warning message also
displays. The malfunction light and
DIC warning message come on at
each ignition cycle until the problem
is corrected. Some of the conditions
that can cause these to come
on are:
.
One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.
The spare tire does not have a
TPMS sensor. The malfunction

light and DIC message should
go off after the road tire is
replaced and the sensor
matching process is performed
successfully. See "TPMS Sensor
Matching Process" later in this
section.
.
The TPMS sensor matching

process was not done or
not completed successfully
after rotating the tires. The
malfunction light and the DIC
message should go off after
successfully completing the
sensor matching process.
See "TPMS Sensor Matching
Process" later in this section.
One or more TPMS sensors are
missing or damaged. The DIC
message and the malfunction
light should go off when the
TPMS sensors are installed and
the sensor matching process is
performed successfully. See
10-51
Replacement tires or wheels do

not match the original equipment
tires or wheels. Tires and wheels
other than those recommended
could prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly. See Buying
New Tires on page 1055.
Operating electronic devices or

being near facilities using radio
wave frequencies similar to the
TPMS could cause the TPMS
sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning

properly, it cannot detect or signal
a low tire condition. See your dealer
for service if the TPMS malfunction
light and DIC message come on
and stay on.
10-52
Black plate (52,1)
Vehicle Care
TPMS Sensor Matching

Process
The TPMS sensor matching

process is:
7. Start with the driver side

front tire.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique

identification code. The identification
code needs to be matched to a new
tire/wheel position after rotating the
tires or replacing one or more of the
TPMS sensors. The TPMS sensor
matching process should also be
performed after replacing a spare
tire with a road tire containing the
TPMS sensor. The malfunction light
and the DIC message should go
off at the next ignition cycle. The
sensors are matched to the tire/
wheel positions, using a TPMS
relearn tool, in the following order:
driver side front tire, passenger side
front tire, passenger side rear tire,
and driver side rear. See your
dealer for service or to purchase a
relearn tool.
1. Set the parking brake.
3. Use the MENU button to select

the Vehicle Information menu in
the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
8. Place the relearn tool against

the tire sidewall, near the valve
stem. Then press the button
to activate the TPMS sensor.
A horn chirp confirms that the
sensor identification code has
been matched to this tire and
wheel position.
4. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to

the Tire Pressure menu item
screen.
9. Proceed to the passenger

side front tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 8.
5. Press the SET/CLR button to

begin the sensor matching
process.
10. Proceed to the passenger

side rear tire, and repeat the
procedure in Step 8.
There are two minutes to match

the first tire/wheel position, and
five minutes overall to match all
four tire/wheel positions. If it takes
longer, the matching process stops
and must be restarted.
2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with

the engine off.
A message requesting
acceptance of the process
should display.
6. Press the SET/CLR button again
to confirm the selection.
The horn sounds twice to signal
the receiver is in relearn mode
and the TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message displays on
the DIC screen.
11. Proceed to the driver side rear

tire, and repeat the procedure
in Step 8. The horn sounds two
times to indicate the sensor
identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear
tire, and the TPMS sensor
matching process is no longer
active. The TIRE LEARNING
ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
Vehicle Care
13. Set all four tires to the
recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
Tire Inspection
We recommend that the tires,
including the spare tire, if the
vehicle has one, be inspected
for signs of wear or damage at
least once a month.
Replace the tire if:
.
The indicators at three or

more places around the tire
can be seen.
There is cord or fabric

showing through the tire's
rubber.
The tread or sidewall is

cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord
or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge,

or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut,

or other damage that cannot
be repaired well because of
the size or location of the
damage.
10-53
Also check for damaged tires or

wheels. See When It Is Time for
New Tires on page 1054 and
Wheel Replacement on
page 1059.
Tire Rotation
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km (7,500 mi). See
Scheduled Maintenance on
page 112.
Tires are rotated to achieve a
uniform wear for all tires. The
first rotation is the most
important.
Any time unusual wear is
noticed, rotate the tires as
soon as possible and check
the wheel alignment. Also check
for damaged tires or wheels.
Use this rotation pattern when

rotating the tires.
Do not include the compact
spare tire in the tire rotation.
10-54
Vehicle Care
Adjust the front and rear tires

to the recommended inflation
pressure on the Tire and
Loading Information label after
the tires have been rotated See
Tire Pressure on page 1047
and Vehicle Load Limits on
page 911.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor
System. SeeTire Pressure
Monitor Operation on
page 1050.
Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly tightened.
See Wheel Nut Torque under
page 122.
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
remove all rust or dirt.
Lightly coat the center of the

wheel hub with wheel bearing
grease after a wheel change or
tire rotation to prevent corrosion
or rust build-up. Do not get
grease on the flat wheel
mounting surface or on the
wheel nuts or bolts.

Tires
Factors such as maintenance,
temperatures, driving speeds,
vehicle loading, and road conditions
affect the wear rate of the tires.
Treadwear indicators are one way to

tell when it is time for new tires.
Treadwear indicators appear when
the tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)
or less of tread remaining. See Tire
Inspection on page 1053 and Tire
Rotation on page 1053 for more
information.
Vehicle Care
The rubber in tires ages over time.
This also applies for the spare tire,
if the vehicle has one, even if it is
never used. Multiple conditions
including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure
maintenance affect how fast aging
takes place. Tires will typically need
to be replaced due to wear before
they may need to be replaced
due to age. Consult the tire
manufacturer for more information
on when tires should be replaced.
Vehicle Storage
Tires age when stored normally
mounted on a parked vehicle. Park
a vehicle that will be stored for at
least a month in a cool, dry, clean
area away from direct sunlight to
slow aging. This area should be
free of grease, gasoline, or other
substances that can deteriorate
rubber.
Parking for an extended period

can cause flat spots on the tires
that may result in vibrations while
driving. When storing a vehicle for
at least a month, remove the tires or
raise the vehicle to reduce the
weight from the tires.
Buying New Tires

GM has developed and
matched specific tires for
the vehicle. The original
equipment tires installed were
designed to meet General
Motors Tire Performance
Criteria Specification (TPC
Spec) system rating. When
replacement tires are needed,
GM strongly recommends
buying tires with the same TPC
Spec rating.
10-55
GM's exclusive TPC Spec

system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that
impact the overall performance
of the vehicle, including brake
system performance, ride and
handling, traction control,
and tire pressure monitoring
performance. GM's TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire's
sidewall near the tire size. If the
tires have an allseason tread
design, the TPC Spec number
will be followed by MS for mud
and snow. See Tire Sidewall
Labeling on page 1042 for
GM recommends replacing all
the tires at the same time.
Uniform tread depth on all
tires will help to maintain the
performance of the vehicle.
10-56
Vehicle Care
Braking and handling

performance may be adversely
affected if all the tires are not
replaced at the same time. See
Tire Inspection on page 1053
and Tire Rotation on page 1053
for information on proper tire
rotation.
{ WARNING
Tires could explode during
improper service. Attempting to
mount or dismount a tire could
cause injury or death. Only your
dealer or authorized tire service
center should mount or dismount
the tires.
{ WARNING
Mixing tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may cause
loss of control of the vehicle,
resulting in a crash or other
vehicle damage. Use the
correct size, brand, and type
of tires on all wheels.
{ WARNING
Using bias-ply tires on the
vehicle may cause the wheel
rim flanges to develop cracks
after many miles of driving.
A tire and/or wheel could fail
suddenly and cause a crash.
Use only radial-ply tires with
the wheels on the vehicle.
If the vehicle tires must be

replaced with a tire that does
not have a TPC Spec number,
make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating,
and construction (radial) as the
original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire
pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate
lowpressure warning if
nonTPC Spec rated tires are
installed. See Tire Pressure
Monitor System on page 1048.
Information label indicates the
original equipment tires on the
vehicle. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 911 for the label
location and more information
about the Tire and Loading
Information label.
Vehicle Care
Different Size Tires and

Wheels
If wheels or tires are installed that
are a different size than the original
equipment wheels and tires, vehicle
performance, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics,
stability, and resistance to rollover
may be affected. If the vehicle has
electronic systems such as antilock
brakes, rollover airbags, traction
control, and electronic stability
control, the performance of these
systems can also be affected.
{ WARNING
If different sized wheels are used,
there may not be an acceptable
level of performance and safety
if tires not recommended for
those wheels are selected. This
increases the chance of a crash
and serious injury. Only use GM
specific wheel and tire systems
(Continued)
WARNING (Continued)
developed for the vehicle, and
have them properly installed by
a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on
page 1055 and Accessories and
Modifications on page 103 for

Grading
Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates
to the system developed by the
United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
10-57
(NHTSA), which grades tires

by treadwear, traction, and
temperature performance. This
applies only to vehicles sold in
the United States. The grades
are molded on the sidewalls of
most passenger car tires. The
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
(UTQG) system does not apply
to deep tread, winter-type snow
tires, space-saver, or temporary
use spare tires, tires with
nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm),
or to some limited-production
tires.
While the tires available on
General Motors passenger cars
and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they
must also conform to federal
safety requirements and
additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
10-58
Black plate (58,1)
Vehicle Care
All Passenger Car Tires Must

Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements In Addition To
These Grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test
course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1) times as well on the
government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices and
differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from
highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. Those grades represent
the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on
specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades
are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled

conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life,
and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and
A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The
temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Vehicle Care

Balance
Your dealer will know the kind of

wheel that is needed.
The tires and wheels were aligned

and balanced at the factory to
provide the longest tire life and best
overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing
will not be necessary on a regular
basis. However, check the
alignment if there is unusual tire
wear or if the vehicle is pulling to
one side or the other. If the vehicle
vibrates when driving on a smooth
road, the tires and wheels might
need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Replace wheels, wheel bolts,

wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) sensors with new
GM original equipment parts.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent,
cracked, or badly rusted or
corroded. If wheel nuts keep
coming loose, the wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air,
replace it. Some aluminum wheels
can be repaired. See your dealer
if any of these conditions exist.
Each new wheel should have the

same load-carrying capacity,
diameter, width, offset, and be
mounted the same way as the
one it replaces.
{ WARNING
Using the wrong replacement
wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel
nuts can be dangerous. It could
affect the braking and handling of
the vehicle. Tires can lose air,
and cause loss of control, causing
a crash. Always use the correct
wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel
nuts for replacement.
10-59
Notice: The wrong wheel can

also cause problems with
bearing life, brake cooling,
speedometer or odometer
calibration, headlamp aim,
bumper height, vehicle ground
clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and
chassis.
See If a Tire Goes Flat on
Used Replacement Wheels
{ WARNING
Replacing a wheel with a used
one is dangerous. How it has
been used or how far it has been
driven may be unknown. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash.
When replacing wheels, use a
new GM original equipment
wheel.
10-60
Black plate (60,1)
Vehicle Care
Tire Chains
{ WARNING
Do not use tire chains. There is
not enough clearance. Tire chains
used on a vehicle without the
proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes,
suspension, or other vehicle
parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause loss of
control and a crash. Use another
type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for
the vehicle's tire size combination
and road conditions. Follow that
manufacturer's instructions. To
avoid vehicle damage, drive
slowly and readjust or remove the
traction device if it contacts the
vehicle. Do not spin the wheels.
If traction devices are used, install
them on the rear tires.
If a Tire Goes Flat

It is unusual for a tire to blowout
while driving, especially if the tires
are maintained properly. If air goes
out of a tire, it is much more likely to
leak out slowly. But if there ever is a
blowout, here are a few tips about
what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire
creates a drag that pulls the vehicle
toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the
steering wheel firmly. Steer to
maintain lane position, and then
gently brake to a stop, well off the
road, if possible.
A rear blowout, particularly on a
curve, acts much like a skid and
may require the same correction
as used in a skid. Stop pressing
the accelerator pedal and steer to
straighten the vehicle. It may be
very bumpy and noisy. Gently brake
to a stop, well off the road,
if possible.
{ WARNING
Driving on a flat tire will cause
permanent damage to the tire.
Re-inflating a tire after it has
been driven on while severely
underinflated or flat may cause a
blowout and a serious crash.
Never attempt to re-inflate a tire
that has been driven on while
severely underinflated or flat.
Have your dealer or an authorized
tire service center repair or
replace the flat tire as soon as
possible.
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire
and wheel damage by driving slowly
to a level place, well off the road,
if possible. Turn on the hazard
warning flashers. See Hazard
Warning Flashers on page 64.
{ WARNING
Changing a tire can be
dangerous. The vehicle can
slip off the jack and roll over or
fall causing injury or death. Find
a level place to change the tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from
moving:
10-61
This vehicle may come with a jack,

spare tire, and wheel block(s) or a
tire sealant and compressor kit. To
use the jacking equipment to
change a spare tire safely, follow
the instructions below. Then see
Tire Changing on page 1070. To
use the tire sealant and compressor
kit, see Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 1062.
1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatic
transmission in P (Park) or a
manual transmission in
1 (First) or R (Reverse).
3. Turn off the engine and do
not restart while the vehicle
is raised.
4. Do not allow passengers to
remain in the vehicle.
5. Place wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the
opposite corner of the tire
being changed.
To use the wheel blocks, lift the

wheel block and lock it into place.
10-62
Vehicle Care
When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),

use the following example as a
guide to assist in the placement of
the wheel blocks (A).
A. Wheel Block
B. Flat Tire
The following information explains
how to repair or change a tire.
Tire Sealant and

Compressor Kit
WARNING
Idling a vehicle in an enclosed

area with poor ventilation is
dangerous. Engine exhaust may
enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust
contains carbon monoxide (CO)
which cannot be seen or smelled.
It can cause unconsciousness
and even death. Never run the
engine in an enclosed area that
has no fresh air ventilation. For
more information, see Engine
{ WARNING
Overinflating a tire could
cause the tire to rupture and
you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read and follow the
tire sealant and compressor kit
instructions and inflate the tire to
its recommended pressure. Do
not exceed the recommended
pressure.
{ WARNING
Storing the tire sealant and
compressor kit or other
equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle
could cause injury. In a sudden
stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the
tire sealant and compressor kit in
its original location.
Vehicle Care
If this vehicle has a tire sealant and
compressor kit, there may not be a
spare tire, tire changing equipment,
and on some vehicles there may not
be a place to store a tire.
The kit includes:
Read and follow all of the tire

sealant and compressor kit
instructions.
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling
instructions on the label adhered to
the sealant canister.
Check the tire sealant expiration
date on the sealant canister.
The sealant canister should be
replaced before its expiration date.
Replacement sealant canisters are
available at your local dealer. See
Removal and Installation of the
Sealant Canister following.
The tire sealant and compressor

can be used to temporarily seal
punctures up to 6 mm ( inch) in
the tread area of the tire. It can also
be used to inflate an under
inflated tire.
If the tire has been separated from
the wheel, has damaged sidewalls,
or has a large puncture, the tire is
too severely damaged for the tire
sealant and compressor kit to be
effective. See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 136.
10-63
A. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant Canister
C. Power Plug
D. On/Off Button
E. Pressure Gauge
F.
Air Only Hose (Black)
G. Sealant/Air Hose (Clear)
There is only enough sealant to

seal one tire. After usage, the
sealant canister and sealant/air
hose assembly must be replaced.
See Removal and Installation
of the Sealant Canister following.
10-64
Vehicle Care
Using the Tire Sealant

and Compressor Kit to
Temporarily Seal and Inflate
a Punctured Tire

to a level place. Turn on the hazard
page 1060 for other important
safety warnings.
Do not remove any objects that
have penetrated the tire.
1. Remove the tire sealant and
compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 1069.
When using the tire sealant

and compressor kit during cold
temperatures, warm the kit in a
heated environment for five minutes.
This will help to inflate the tire
faster.
Make sure the on/off button (D)

is in the off (O) position.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)
and the power plug (C).
3. Place the kit on the ground.
Make sure the tire valve stem is
positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
4. Remove the valve stem cap

from the flat tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G)
onto the tire valve stem. Turn it
clockwise until it is tight.
6. Plug the power plug (C) into the
accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
If the vehicle has an accessory
power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
If the vehicle only has a cigarette
lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
Do not pinch the power plug
cord in the door or window.
7. Start the vehicle. The vehicle
must be running while using the
air compressor.
Vehicle Care
8. Press the on/off (D) button to
turn the tire sealant and
compressor kit on.
The compressor will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
The pressure gauge (E) will
initially show a high pressure
while the compressor pushes the
sealant into the tire. Once the
sealant is completely dispersed
into the tire, the pressure will
quickly drop and start to rise
again as the tire inflates with
air only.
9. Inflate the tire to the
recommended inflation pressure
using the pressure gauge (E).
The recommended inflation
pressure can be found on the
Tire and Loading Information
label. See Tire Pressure on
page 1047.
The pressure gauge (E) may

read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor
off to get an accurate pressure
reading. The compressor may
be turned on/off until the correct
pressure is reached.
Notice: If the recommended
pressure cannot be reached after
approximately 25 minutes, the
vehicle should not be driven
farther. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and
compressor kit cannot inflate the
tire. Remove the power plug from
the accessory power outlet and
unscrew the inflating hose from
the tire valve. See Roadside
Assistance Program on
page 136.
10. Press the on/off button (D) to
compressor kit off.
10-65
The tire is not sealed and

will continue to leak air until
the vehicle is driven and the
sealant is distributed in the tire.
Therefore, Steps 11 through
17 must be done immediately
after Step 10.
Be careful while handling the
as it could be warm after
usage.
11. Unplug the power plug (C) from
the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
12. Turn the sealant/air hose (G)
counterclockwise to remove it
from the tire valve stem.
13. Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
14. Replace the sealant/air hose
(G), and the power plug (C)
back in their original location.
10-66
Vehicle Care
15. If the flat tire was able to

inflate to the recommended
inflation pressure, remove the
maximum speed label from the
sealant canister (B) and place
it in a highly visible location.
Do not exceed the speed on
this label until the damaged tire
is repaired or replaced.
16. Return the equipment to its
original storage location in the
vehicle.
17. Immediately drive the vehicle
8 km (5 miles) to distribute the
sealant in the tire.
18. Stop at a safe location and

check the tire pressure. Refer
to Steps 1 through 11 under
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured).
If the tire pressure has fallen
more than 68 kPa (10 psi)
below the recommended
inflation pressure, stop driving
the vehicle. The tire is too
severely damaged and the tire
sealant cannot seal the tire.
See Roadside Assistance
Program on page 136.
If the tire pressure has not
dropped more than 68 kPa
(10 psi) from the recommended
inflation pressure, inflate the
tire to the recommended
inflation pressure.
19. Wipe off any sealant from the

wheel, tire or vehicle.
20. Dispose of the used sealant
canister (B) and sealant/air
hose (G) assembly at a local
dealer or in accordance with
local state codes and practices.
21. Replace it with a new canister
available from your dealer.
22. After temporarily sealing a
tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take the
vehicle to an authorized dealer
within 161 km (100 miles) of
driving to have the tire repaired
or replaced.
Vehicle Care
Using the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit without
Sealant to Inflate a Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate
a tire with air only and not sealant:

page 1060 for other important
safety warnings.
7. Attach the air only hose (F) onto

the tire valve stem and press the
lever down to secure it.
1. Remove the tire sealant and

compressor kit from its storage
location. See Storing the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit on
page 1069.
8. Plug the power plug (C) into the

accessory power outlet in the
vehicle. Unplug all items from
other accessory power outlets.
2. Unlock the air only hose (F)

from the sealant canister (B) by
pulling up on the lever.
If the vehicle has an accessory

power outlet, do not use the
cigarette lighter.
3. Pull the air only hose (F) from

the sealant canister (B).
If the vehicle only has a cigarette

lighter, use the cigarette lighter.
4. Remove the power plug (C) from

the air compressor (A).
Do not pinch the power plug

cord in the door or window.
5. Place the kit on the ground.

to a level place. Turn on the hazard
10-67
Make sure the tire valve stem is

positioned close to the ground
so the hose will reach it.
6. Remove the tire valve stem cap
by turning it counterclockwise.
9. Start the vehicle. The vehicle

must be running while using the
air compressor.
10. Press the on/off (D) button to
turn the compressor on.
The compressor will inflate the
tire with air only.
10-68
Vehicle Care
11. Inflate the tire to the

recommended inflation
pressure using the pressure
gauge (E). The recommended
inflation pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See Tire
13. Unplug the power plug (C) from

the accessory power outlet in
the vehicle.
The pressure gauge (E) may

read higher than the actual tire
pressure while the compressor
is on. Turn the compressor off
to get an accurate reading.
The compressor may be turned
on/off until the correct pressure
is reached.
15. Replace the air only hose (F)

and the power plug (C) back in
its original location.
12. Press the on/off button (D) to

compressor kit off.
Be careful while handling the
as it could be warm after
usage.
14. Disconnect the air only

hose (F) from the tire valve
stem by lifting the lever.
Replace the tire valve
stem cap.
16. Place the equipment in the

original storage location in the
vehicle.
The tire sealant and compressor kit
has an accessory adapter located in
a compartment on the bottom of its
housing that may be used to inflate
air mattresses, balls, etc.
Removal and Installation of the

Sealant Canister
To remove the sealant canister:
1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from

the sealant canister (B) by
pulling up on the lever.
2. Pull the air only hose (F) from
the sealant canister (B).
3. Unwrap the sealant/air hose (G)
from the compressor (A).
Vehicle Care
10-69
To install a new sealant canister:
To remove the kit:
1. Align the sealant/air hose (G)

with the slot in the air
compressor.
1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on

page 28.
2. Push the sealant canister (B)

down and turn it clockwise.
3. Wrap the sealant/air hose (G)
around the air compressor
channel to stow it in its original
location.
4. Turn the sealant canister (B) so
the inflator filling hose is aligned
with the slot in the compressor.
5. Lift the sealant canister (B) from
the compressor and replace with
a new sealant canister. See your
dealer for more information.
4. Push the air only hose (F) onto

the sealant canister inlet and
push the lever down.
Storing the Tire Sealant

and Compressor Kit
The tire sealant and compressor kit
is located in the trunk, under the
load floor, behind an access panel.
2. Turn the left knob

counterclockwise and the right
knob clockwise, 90 degrees, at
the same time. Then pull the
access panel rearward and up
to remove it.
10-70
Vehicle Care
Tire Changing
Removing the Spare Tire and
Tools
the tool bag containing the

wheel wrench and wheel
blocks (C), and the spare
tire (D).
To access the spare tire and tools:

1. Open the trunk. See Trunk on
page 28.
2. Lift the load floor.
3. Pull the inflator kit rearward.

Squeeze the two tabs of the
quick release buckle to remove
the tire sealant and
compressor kit.
4. Remove the jack handle

extension (B) and jack (A).
To store the inflator kit, reverse the

steps.
3. Turn the retainer nut (A)

counterclockwise to remove it.
Then remove the tool bag
tether (B) from the stow rod,
Vehicle Care
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
This vehicle may have aluminum
wheels with exposed wheel nuts.
Use the wheel wrench to loosen all
the wheel nuts. Do not remove
them yet.
Or, this vehicle may have steel
wheels with plastic covers.
This vehicle will have either a

coin/pierce jack (D) and a jack
handle extension (C) or a hex
head jack (B) and a jack lift
assist tool (A).
10-71
If needed, finish loosening them

with your fingers. The plastic nut
caps will not come off.
If needed, use the flat end of the
wheel wrench and pry along the
edge of the cover until it comes off.
The edge of the wheel cover could
be sharp, so do not try to remove it
with your bare hands. Do not drop
the cover or lay it face down, as
it could become scratched or
damaged. Store the wheel cover in
the trunk until the flat tire is repaired
or replaced.
Once you have removed the wheel
cover, use the following procedure
to remove the flat tire and install the
spare tire.
Place the tools next to the tire

being changed.
1. Do a safety check before

proceeding. See If a Tire Goes
Flat on page 1060 for more
information.
5. Place the spare tire next to the

tire being changed.
To remove the plastic covers and
wheel nut caps, loosen the plastic
nut caps with the wheel wrench in a
counterclockwise direction.
10-72
Vehicle Care
6. Place the jack under the vehicle.
7. If you have a coin/pierce jack,
attach the jack handle extension
to the jack by sliding the hook
through the end of the jack.
If you have a hex-head jack,
attach the jack lift-assist tool by
placing the hex of the jack
lift-assist tool over the hex head
of the jack.
2. Turn the wheel wrench

counterclockwise once on each
wheel nut to loosen it. Do not
remove them yet.
3. Place the jack near the flat tire.
4. Place the wheel blocks on both
sides of the tire at the opposite
corner of the tire being changed.
page 1060 for proper wheel
block placement.
5. If this vehicle is the RS model,

locate the front or rear jack
cover on the rocker molding
near the tire being changed.
Place your hand behind the
edge of the cover on the rocker
molding. Pull down and out to
remove the cover.
The cover will remain attached
to the molding by a tether.
Notice: Make sure that the jack

lift head is in the correct position
or you may damage your vehicle.
The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty.
Black plate (73,1)
Vehicle Care
10-73
{ WARNING
Raising the vehicle with the
jack improperly positioned can
damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help
avoid personal injury and vehicle
damage, be sure to fit the jack lift
head into the proper location
before raising the vehicle.
8. Position the jack lift head at the
jack location nearest the flat tire.
The location is indicated by a
notch in the flange. The jack
must not be used in any other
position.
{ WARNING
Getting under a vehicle when it is
jacked up is dangerous. If the
vehicle slips off the jack, you
could be badly injured or killed.
Never get under a vehicle when
it is supported only by a jack.
{ WARNING
Lifting a vehicle and getting
under it to do maintenance or
repairs is dangerous without the
appropriate safety equipment and
training. If a jack is provided with
the vehicle, it is designed only for
changing a flat tire. If it is used for
anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the
vehicle slips off the jack. If a jack
is provided with the vehicle, only
use it for changing a flat tire.
Coin Pierce Jack Shown, Hex

Head Jack Similar
9. Raise the jack by turning the
handle clockwise until it comes
in contact with the notch in the
flange.
10-74
Black plate (74,1)
Vehicle Care
WARNING (Continued)
an emergency, a cloth or a paper
towel can be used; however, use
a scraper or wire brush later to
remove all rust or dirt.
Make sure the jack lift head

notch is placed in the flange
notch.
Raise the vehicle far enough off
the ground so there is enough
room for the road tire to clear the
ground.
10. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

11. Remove the flat tire.
{ WARNING
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the
parts to which it is fastened, can
make wheel nuts become loose
after time. The wheel could come
off and cause an accident. When
changing a wheel, remove any
rust or dirt from places where the
wheel attaches to the vehicle. In
(Continued)
12. Remove any rust or dirt from

the wheel bolts, mounting
surfaces, and spare wheel.
13. Place the compact spare tire
on the wheel-mounting surface.
Vehicle Care
{ WARNING
Never use oil or grease on bolts
or nuts because the nuts might
come loose. The vehicle's wheel
could fall off, causing a crash.
14. Reinstall the wheel nuts.
Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against
the hub.
15. Lower the vehicle by turning
the jack handle
counterclockwise.
{ WARNING
Wheel nuts that are improperly or
incorrectly tightened can cause
the wheels to become loose or
come off. The wheel nuts should
be tightened with a torque wrench
to the proper torque specification
(Continued)
10-75
WARNING (Continued)
after replacing. Follow the torque
specification supplied by the
aftermarket manufacturer when
using accessory locking wheel
nuts. See Capacities and
Specifications on page 122 for
original equipment wheel nut
torque specifications.
Notice: Improperly tightened
wheel nuts can lead to brake
pulsation and rotor damage. To
avoid expensive brake repairs,
evenly tighten the wheel nuts in
the proper sequence and to the
proper torque specification. See
page 122 for the wheel nut
torque specification.
16. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly in

a crisscross sequence, as
shown.
17. Lower the jack all the way and
remove the jack from under the
vehicle.
18. Tighten the wheel nuts firmly
with the wheel wrench.
10-76
Black plate (76,1)
Vehicle Care
Notice: Wheel covers will not fit
on the vehicle's compact spare.
If you try to put a wheel cover on
the compact spare, the cover or
the spare could be damaged.
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire

and Tools
{ WARNING
Front Jack Cover Shown, Rear
Jack Cover Similar
19. If this vehicle is the RS model,
snap the jack cover back into
place.
20. Remove the wheel blocks and
return them to their proper
storage location.
When reinstalling the wheel cover
or center cap on the full-size tire,
tighten all five plastic caps hand
snug with the aid of the wheel
wrench and tighten them with
the wheel wrench an additional
onequarter of a turn.
Storing a jack, a tire, or other

equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could
strike someone. Store all these in
the proper place.
Storing the Flat Tire and Tools
1. Replace the wheel wrench and
wheel blocks in the tool bag.
2. Remove the foam container from
the rear storage compartment.
3. Place the flat tire in the storage

compartment with the valve
stem down.
4. Place the jack and jack handle
extension in the foam container.
5. Place the foam container inside
the flat tire. Align the hole with
the stow rod.
6. Place the tool bag tether over
the stow rod.
Black plate (77,1)
Vehicle Care
7. Turn the retainer nut clockwise
until tight.
8. Replace the load floor.
The load floor may not lay flat.
The compact spare is for temporary
use only. Replace the compact
spare tire with a full-size tire as
soon as you can.
Storing the Compact Spare Tire
and Tools
Reverse the instructions for
removing the spare tire and tools
to store the compact spare tire.
Compact Spare Tire
{ WARNING
Driving with more than one
compact spare tire at a time
could result in loss of braking and
handling. This could lead to a
crash and you or others could be
injured. Use only one compact
spare tire at a time.
If this vehicle has a compact spare

tire, it was fully inflated when the
vehicle was new; however, it can
lose air after a time. Check the
inflation pressure regularly. It
should be 420 kPa (60 psi).
After installing the compact spare
on the vehicle, stop as soon as
possible and make sure the spare
tire is correctly inflated. The
compact spare is made to perform
well at speeds up to 105 km/h
(65 mph) for distances up to
5 000 km (3,000 mi), so you can
finish your trip and have the full-size
tire repaired or replaced at your
convenience. Of course, it is best to
replace the spare with a full-size tire
as soon as possible. The spare tire
will last longer and be in good
shape in case it is needed again.
10-77
Notice: When the compact

spare is installed, do not take
the vehicle through an automatic
car wash with guide rails. The
compact spare can get caught on
the rails which can damage the
tire, wheel and other parts of the
vehicle.
Do not use the compact spare on
other vehicles.
Do not mix the compact spare tire
or wheel with other wheels or tires.
They will not fit. Keep the spare tire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains will not fit the
compact spare. Using them can
damage the vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Do not
use tire chains on the compact
spare.
10-78
Vehicle Care
Jump Starting
For more information about the
vehicle battery, see Battery on
page 1025.
If the battery has run down, try to
use another vehicle and some
jumper cables to start your vehicle.
Be sure to use the following steps to
do it safely.
Notice: Ignoring these steps

could result in costly damage to
the vehicle that would not be
covered by the warranty.
Trying to start the vehicle by
pushing or pulling it will not
work, and it could damage the
vehicle.
They contain gas that can

explode or ignite.
They contain enough

electricity to burn you.
If you do not follow these steps

exactly, some or all of these
things can hurt you.
The positive jump start connection

is under a trim cover. Open the
cover door to expose the terminal.
Notice: Only use a vehicle

that has a 12-volt system
with a negative ground for jump
starting. If the other vehicle does
not have a 12-volt system with a
negative ground, both vehicles
can be damaged.
Batteries can hurt you. They can

be dangerous because:
They contain acid that can
burn you.
These locations are used instead of

a direct connection to the battery.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must

have a 12-volt battery with a
negative ground system.
{ WARNING
.
Connect to a spot as far away

from the discharged battery as
possible.
2. Position the two vehicles so that

they are not touching.
The jump start positive post (B) is
located in the engine compartment
on the driver side of the vehicle.
The jump start negative grounding
point (D) is the engine block
or an engine mounting bolt.
3. Set the parking brake firmly and

put the shift lever in P (Park)
with an automatic transmission,
or neutral with a manual
transmission. See Shifting Into
Park (Automatic Transmission)
Vehicle Care
on page 920 with an automatic
transmission, or Parking on
page 923 with a manual
transmission.
Notice: If the radio or other
accessories are left on during the
jump starting procedure, they
could be damaged. The repairs
warranty. Always turn off the
radio and other accessories when
jump starting the vehicle.
Turn off all lights and
accessories in both vehicles,
except the hazard warning
flashers if needed.
{ WARNING
An electric fan can start up even
when the engine is not running
and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.
{ WARNING
Using a match near a battery can
cause battery gas to explode.
People have been hurt doing this,
and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more
light.
10-79
{ WARNING
Fans or other moving engine
parts can injure you badly. Keep
your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough

water. You do not need to add
water to the battery installed in
your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right
amount of fluid is there. If it is low,
add water to take care of that
first. If you don't, explosive gas
could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that
can burn you. Do not get it on
you. If you accidentally get it in
your eyes or on your skin, flush
the place with water and get
medical help immediately.
5. Connect one end of the red

positive (+) cable to the jump
start positive (+) post (B).
6. Connect the other end of
the red positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal of the good
battery (A).
10-80
Black plate (80,1)
Vehicle Care
7. Connect one end of the black

negative () cable to the
negative () terminal of the
good battery (C).
To disconnect the jumper cables

from both vehicles:
1. Disconnect the black
negative () cable from the
vehicle that had the dead
battery.
8. Connect the other end of the

black negative () cable to the
negative () grounding point (D).
2. Disconnect the black

negative () cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
9. Start the engine in the vehicle

with the good battery and run
the engine at idle speed for at
least four minutes.
10. Try to start the vehicle that
had the dead battery. If it will
not start after a few tries, it
probably needs service.
Notice: If the jumper cables are
connected or removed in the
wrong order, electrical shorting
may occur and damage the
vehicle. The repairs would not be
Always connect and remove the
jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the
cables do not touch each other
or other metal.
Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine
Part or Remote Negative ()
Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote
Positive (+) and Remote
Negative () Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote
Positive (+) Terminal
3. Disconnect the red positive (+)

cable from the vehicle with the
good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+)
cable from the other vehicle.
5. Return the covers over the
positive (+) and negative ()
terminals to their original
positions.
Vehicle Care
Towing
Towing the Vehicle
Notice: To avoid damage, the
disabled vehicle should be
towed with all four wheels off the
ground. Care must be taken with
vehicles that have low ground
clearance and/or special
equipment. Always flatbed
on a car carrier.
Consult your dealer or a
professional towing service if the
disabled vehicle must be towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 136.
To tow the vehicle behind another
vehicle for recreational purposes,
such as behind a motorhome, see
Recreational Vehicle Towing in this
section.
Towing
Recreational vehicle towing refers to
towing the vehicle behind another
vehicle such as behind a motor
home. The two most common types
of recreational vehicle towing are
known as dinghy towing and dolly
towing. Dinghy towing is towing the
vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground. Dolly towing is towing the
vehicle with two wheels on the
ground and two wheels up on a
device known as a dolly.
Here are some important things to
consider before recreational vehicle
towing:
.
The towing capacity of the

towing vehicle. Be sure to read
the tow vehicle manufacturer's
recommendations.
How far will the vehicle be

towed. Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how
long they can tow.
10-81
Does the vehicle have the

proper towing equipment.
See your dealer or trailering
professional for additional
advice and equipment
recommendations.
Is the vehicle ready to be towed.

Just as preparing the vehicle
for a long trip, make sure the
vehicle is prepared to be towed.
Dinghy Towing
When dinghy towing a vehicle
with an automatic transmission,
the vehicle should be run at the
beginning of each day and at each
RV fuel stop for about five minutes.
This will ensure proper lubrication
of transmission components.
10-82
Vehicle Care
4. To prevent the battery from
draining while the vehicle is
being towed, remove fuse 22
from the instrument panel fuse
block. See Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 1038 for
more information.
5. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.
6. Shift the automatic transmission
to N (Neutral) or a manual
transmission to neutral.
To dinghy tow the vehicle from the

front with all four wheels on the
ground:
7. Turn the ignition to ACC/

ACCESSORY.
1. Position the vehicle to tow and

then secure it to the towing
vehicle.
Remember to reinstall the fuse once

the destination has been reached.

to P (Park) or a manual
transmission into first gear and
turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.
8. Release the parking brake.
Notice: If 105 km/h (65 mph) is

exceeded while towing the
vehicle, it could be damaged.
Never exceed 105 km/h (65 mph)
while towing the vehicle.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from

the rear could damage it. Also,
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
Black plate (83,1)
Vehicle Care
Dolly Towing
10-83
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a

straight-ahead position with a
clamping device designed for
towing.
Appearance Care
5. Remove the key from the

ignition.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/

Lenses
6. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a

soft cloth, and a car washing soap
to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing
the Vehicle later in this section.
7. Release the parking brake.
Exterior Care
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing
of the vehicle by hand may be
necessary to remove residue from
the paint finish. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer.
Tow the vehicle with the two rear

wheels on the ground and the front
wheels on a dolly:
To tow the vehicle with two wheels
on the ground and a dolly:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
into P (Park) or a manual
transmission into first gear.
Notice: Towing the vehicle from

the rear could damage it. Also,
the vehicle warranty. Never have
the vehicle towed from the rear.
If the vehicle has a basecoat/

clearcoat paint finish, the
clearcoat gives more depth and
gloss to the colored basecoat.
10-84
Black plate (84,1)
Vehicle Care
Always use waxes and polishes that

are non-abrasive and made for a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.
To keep the paint finish looking

new, keep the vehicle garaged or
covered whenever possible.
Notice: Machine compounding

or aggressive polishing on a
basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only
non-abrasive waxes and polishes
that are made for a basecoat/
clearcoat paint finish on the
vehicle.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal

Parts
Foreign materials such as calcium

chloride and other salts, ice melting
agents, road oil and tar, tree sap,
bird droppings, chemicals from
industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage the vehicle's finish if they
remain on painted surfaces. Wash
the vehicle as soon as possible.
If necessary, use non-abrasive
cleaners that are marked safe for
painted surfaces to remove foreign
matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are
subject to aging, weather, and
chemical fallout that can take their
toll over a period of years.
Bright metal parts should be

cleaned regularly to keep their
luster. Wash with water or use
chrome polish on chrome or
stainless steel trim, if necessary.
Use special care with aluminum
trim. To avoid damaging protective
trim, never use auto or chrome
polish, steam, or caustic soap to
clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is
recommended for all bright metal
parts.
Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,
keep it clean by washing it often.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct
sunlight and use a car
washing soap.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain

chemicals that can damage the
emblems or nameplates on the
vehicle. Check the cleaning
product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic
parts, do not use it on the vehicle
or damage may occur and it
warranty.
Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain
acid or abrasives, as they can
damage the paint, metal, or plastic
on the vehicle. Approved cleaning
products can be obtained from your
dealer. Follow all manufacturer
directions regarding correct product
usage, necessary safety
precautions, and appropriate
disposal of any vehicle care
product.
Vehicle Care
Rinse the vehicle well, before
washing and after, to remove all
cleaning agents completely. If they
are allowed to dry on the surface,
they could stain.
Shutter System
Notice: Conveyor systems on

some automatic car washes could
damage the vehicle. There may
not be enough clearance for the
undercarriage. Check with the car
wash manager before using the
automatic car wash.
Wheels and Trim Aluminum

or Chrome
The vehicle may have either
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft,
clean cloth with mild soap and
water. Rinse with clean water. After
rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft,
clean towel. A wax may then be
applied.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean

chamois or an all-cotton towel to
avoid surface scratches and water
spotting.
High pressure car washes could
cause water to enter the vehicle.
Avoid using high pressure washes
closer than 30 cm (12 in) to the
surface of the vehicle. Use of power
washers exceeding 8,274 kPa
(1,200 psi) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
10-85
The vehicle may have a shutter

system designed to help increase
fuel economy. Keep the shutter
system clean for proper operation.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will
make them last longer, seal better,
and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth.
During very cold, damp weather
frequent application may be
required. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 116.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other

chrome trim may be damaged if
the vehicle is not washed after
driving on roads that have been
sprayed with magnesium, calcium
or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for
conditions such as ice and dust.
Always wash the vehicle's
chrome with soap and water after
exposure.
10-86
Black plate (86,1)
Vehicle Care
Notice: Using strong soaps,

chemicals, abrasive polishes,
cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels, could
damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not
be covered by the vehicle
warranty. Use only approved
cleaners on aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is
similar to the painted surface of the
vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes,
abrasive cleaners, cleaners with
acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could
be damaged. Do not use chrome
polish on aluminum wheels.
Notice: Using chrome polish on
aluminum wheels could damage
the wheels. The repairs would
warranty. Use chrome polish on
chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on

chrome-plated wheels, but avoid
any painted surface of the wheel,
and buff off immediately after
application.
Notice: Driving the vehicle
through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, could damage
the aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels. The repairs would not be
Never drive a vehicle that has
aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels through an automatic car
wash that uses silicone carbide
tire cleaning brushes.
Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshield
with glass cleaner.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint
free cloth or paper towel soaked
with windshield washer fluid or a
mild detergent. Wash the windshield
thoroughly when cleaning the
blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and
a buildup of vehicle wash/wax
treatments may cause wiper
streaking. Replace the wiper blades
if they are worn or damaged.
Wipers can be damaged by:
.
Extreme dusty conditions
Sand and salt
Heat and sun
Snow and ice, without proper

removal
Black plate (87,1)
Vehicle Care
10-87
Tires
Finish Damage
Lubricate Body Components
Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner to

clean the tires.
Any stone chips, fractures, or deep

scratches in the finish should be
repaired right away. Bare metal will
corrode quickly and may develop
into major repair expense.
Lubricate all key lock cylinders,

hood hinges, liftgate hinges, and
steel fuel door hinge unless the
components are plastic. Applying
silicone grease on weatherstrips
with a clean cloth will make them
last longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
Notice: Using petroleum-based

tire dressing products on the
vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying
a tire dressing, always wipe off
any overspray from all painted
surfaces on the vehicle.
Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged and
requires sheet metal repair or
replacement, make sure the body
repair shop applies anti-corrosion
material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion
protection.
Original manufacturer replacement
parts will provide the corrosion
protection while maintaining the
vehicle warranty.
Minor chips and scratches can be

repaired with touch-up materials
available from your dealer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be
corrected in your dealer's body
and paint shop.
Steering, Suspension, and

Chassis Components
Visually inspect front and rear
suspension and steering system
for damaged, loose, or missing parts
or signs of wear. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and
axle seals for leaks.
Underbody Maintenance
Chemicals used for ice and snow
removal and dust control can collect
on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can
develop on the underbody parts
such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though
they have corrosion protection.
Flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean
any areas where mud and debris
can collect. Dirt packed in close
areas of the frame should be
loosened before being flushed. Your
dealer or an underbody car washing
system can do this.
10-88
Black plate (88,1)
Vehicle Care
Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weather and atmospheric
conditions can create a chemical
fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall
upon and attack painted surfaces on
the vehicle. This damage can take
two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped
discolorations, and small, irregular
dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Interior Care
The interior will continue to look
its best if it is cleaned often. Dust
and dirt can accumulate on the
upholstery and cause damage to
the carpet, fabric, leather, and
plastic surfaces. Stains should be
removed quickly as extreme heat
could cause them to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require
more frequent cleaning.
Newspapers and garments that can
transfer color to home furnishings
can also transfer color to the
interior.
Remove dust from small buttons

and knobs with a small brush with
soft bristles.
Your dealer has products for
cleaning the interior. When cleaning
the interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the
surfaces that are being cleaned.
Permanent damage can result from
using cleaners on surfaces for
which they were not intended. Apply
the cleaner directly to the cleaning
cloth to prevent over-spray. Remove
any accidental over-spray from
other surfaces immediately.
Notice: Using abrasive cleaners
when cleaning glass surfaces on
the vehicle, could scratch the
glass and/or cause damage to the
rear window defogger. When
cleaning the glass on the vehicle,
use only a soft cloth and glass
cleaner.
Cleaners can contain solvents that
can become concentrated in the
interior. Before using cleaners, read
and adhere to all safety instructions
on the label. While cleaning the

interior, maintain adequate
ventilation by opening the doors
and windows.
Do not clean the interior using the
following cleaners or techniques:
.
Never use a knife or any other

sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
Never use a stiff brush. It can

cause damage.
Never apply heavy pressure or

rub aggressively with a cleaning
cloth. Use of heavy pressure can
damage the interior and does
not improve the effectiveness of
soil removal.
Avoid laundry detergents or

dishwashing soaps with
degreasers. Using too much
soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt.
For liquid cleaners, about
20 drops per 3.78 L (1 gal) of
water is a good guide. Use only
mild, neutral-pH soaps.
Black plate (89,1)
Vehicle Care
.
Do not heavily saturate the

upholstery while cleaning.
Cleaners that contain solvents

can damage the interior.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft
brush attachment to remove dust
and loose dirt. A canister vacuum
with rotating brushes in the nozzle
may only be used on floor carpet
and carpeted floor mats. For soils,
always try to remove them first with
plain water or club soda. Before
cleaning, gently remove as much of
the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
.
For liquids: gently blot the

remaining soil with a paper
towel. Allow the soil to absorb
into the paper towel until no
more can be removed.
For solid dry soils: remove as

much as possible and then
vacuum.
10-89
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white

cloth with water or club soda.
A paper towel can be used to blot

excess moisture from the fabric or
carpet after the cleaning process.
2. Remove excess moisture.
Leather
3. Start on the outside edge of the

soil and gently rub toward the
center. Continue cleaning, using
a clean area of the cloth each
time it becomes soiled.
Leather, and lighter colored leather

in particular, will need more frequent
cleaning to prevent the buildup of
dust, dirt, and colors transferred
from other items so that these do
not become permanent stains.
To clean:
4. Continue to gently rub the

soiled area.
5. If the soil is not completely
removed, use a mild soap
solution and repeat the cleaning
process with plain water.
If any of the soil remains, a
commercial fabric cleaner or spot
lifter may be necessary. Test a small
hidden area for colorfastness before
using a commercial upholstery
cleaner or spot lifter. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression
that a ring formation may result,
clean the entire surface.
To remove dust, a soft cloth

dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a soft cloth dampened
with a mild soap solution can
be used. Your dealer has a GM
approved leather cleaner available
that provides superior cleaning
performance when used regularly
on finished automotive leathers.
Allow the leather to dry naturally.
Do not use heat, steam, spot lifters
or spot removers, or shoe polish on
leather. Many commercial leather
cleaners and coatings that are sold
10-90
Black plate (90,1)
Vehicle Care
to preserve and protect leather

may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the leather
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,
or those containing organic solvents
to clean the interior because they
can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and

Other Plastic Surfaces
To remove dust, a soft cloth
dampened with water can be used.
If a more thorough cleaning is
necessary, a clean soft cloth
dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust
and dirt. Never use spot lifters or
removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and
coatings that are sold to preserve
and protect soft plastic surfaces
may permanently change the
appearance and feel of the interior
and are not recommended. Do not
use silicone or wax-based products,

or those containing organic solvents
to clean the interior because they
can alter the appearance by
increasing the gloss in a
non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may
increase gloss on the instrument
panel. The increase in gloss may
cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult
to see through the windshield under
certain conditions.
Notice: Air fresheners contain
solvents that may cause damage
to plastics and painted surfaces.
Follow the manufacturers
instructions when using air
fresheners in the vehicle. If air
freshener comes in contact with
paint or a plastic surface, blot
immediately with a soft cloth.
Damage caused by using air
fresheners would not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
Care of Safety Belts

Keep belts clean and dry.
{ WARNING
Do not bleach or dye safety belts.
It may severely weaken them. In
a crash, they might not be able to
provide adequate protection.
Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Black plate (91,1)
Vehicle Care
Floor Mats
{ WARNING
If a floor mat is the wrong size or
is not properly installed, it can
interfere with the accelerator
pedal and/or brake pedal.
Interference with the pedals can
cause unintended acceleration
and/or increased stopping
distance which can cause a crash
and injury. Make sure the floor
mat does not interfere with the
accelerator or brake pedal.
Use the following guidelines for

proper floor mat usage:
.
The original equipment floor

mats were designed for your
vehicle. If the floor mats need
replacing, it is recommended
that GM certified floor mats be
purchased. Non-GM floor mats
may not fit properly and may
interfere with the accelerator or
brake pedal. Always check that
the floor mats do not interfere
with the pedals.
Use the floor mat with the

correct side up. Do not turn
it over.
Do not place anything on top of

the driver side floor mat.
Use only a single floor mat on

the driver side.
Do not place one floor mat on

top of another.
10-91
Removing and Replacing the

Floor Mats
Pull up on the rear of the floor mat
to unlock each retainer and remove.
Reinstall by lining up the floor mat

retainer openings over the carpet
retainers and snap into position.
Make sure the floor mat is properly
secured in place.
Verify the floor mat does not
interfere with the accelerator,
clutch, or the brake pedal.
10-92
Black plate (92,1)
Vehicle Care
2 NOTES
Service and Maintenance
Service and
Maintenance
General Information
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . 11-2
Recommended Fluids,
Lubricants, and Parts
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Maintenance Replacement
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Maintenance Records
General Information
Notice: Maintenance
intervals, checks, inspections,
recommended fluids, and
lubricants are necessary to keep
this vehicle in good working
condition. Damage caused by
failure to follow scheduled
maintenance might not be
As the vehicle owner, you are
responsible for the scheduled
maintenance in this section. We
recommend having your dealer
perform these services. Proper
vehicle maintenance helps to
keep the vehicle in good working
condition, improves fuel economy,
and reduces vehicle emissions for
better air quality.
11-1
Because of all the different ways

people use vehicles, maintenance
needs vary. The vehicle might need
more frequent checks and services.
Please read the information under
Scheduled Maintenance. To keep
the vehicle in good condition, see
your dealer.
The maintenance schedule is for
vehicles that:
.
Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits on
the Tire and Loading Information
label. See Vehicle Load Limits
on page 911.
Are driven on reasonable road

surfaces within legal driving
limits.
11-2
.
Use the recommended fuel.

See Recommended Fuel on
page 939.
{ WARNING
Performing maintenance work can
be dangerous. Some jobs can
cause serious injury. Perform
maintenance work only if you
have the required know-how and
the proper tools and equipment.
If in doubt, see your dealer to
have a qualified technician do the
work. See Doing Your Own
Service Work on page 104.
At your dealer, you can be certain
that you will receive the highest
level of service available. Your
dealer has specially trained
service technicians, uses genuine
replacement parts, as well as,
uptodate tools and equipment
to ensure fast and accurate
diagnostics.
The proper replacement parts,

fluids, and lubricants to use are
listed in Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 116 and
Maintenance Replacement Parts on
page 118. We recommend the use
of genuine parts from your dealer.
Rotation of New Tires
To maintain ride, handling, and
performance of the vehicle, it is
important that the first rotation
service for new tires be performed.
Tires should be rotated every
12 000 km/7,500 mi. See Tire
Rotation on page 1053.
Scheduled
Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil
Soon Message Displays
Change engine oil and filter. See
Engine Oil on page 109. An
Emission Control Service.
When the CHANGE ENGINE
OIL SOON DIC message or
Code 82 DIC message displays,
service is required for the vehicle as
soon as possible, within the next
1 000 km/600 mi. If driving under the
best conditions, the engine oil life
system might not indicate the need
for vehicle service for more than a
year. The engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year
and the oil life system must be
reset. Your dealer has trained
service technicians who will perform
this work and reset the system.
If the engine oil life system is reset
accidentally, service the vehicle
within 5 000 km/3,000 mi since the
last service. Reset the oil life

system whenever the oil is
changed. See Engine Oil Life
Every Engine Oil Change

.
Change engine oil and filter.

Reset oil life system. See
Engine Oil on page 109 and
Engine Oil Life System on
page 1012. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 1016.
Engine cooling system

inspection. Visual inspection of
hoses, pipes, fittings, and
clamps and replacement,
if needed.
Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid on
page 1021.
Windshield wiper blade
inspection for wear, cracking,
or contamination and
windshield and wiper blade
cleaning, if contaminated. See
Exterior Care on page 1083.
Worn or damaged wiper blade

replacement. See Wiper Blade
Replacement on page 1027.
.
Tire inflation pressures check.

See Tire Pressure on
page 1047.
Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 1053.
Rotate tires if necessary. See

Tire Rotation on page 1053.
Fluids visual leak check (or

every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). A leak in any
system must be repaired
and the fluid level checked.
Engine air cleaner filter

inspection. See Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter on page 1014.
Brake system inspection

(or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first).
Steering and suspension

inspection. Visual inspection for
damaged, loose, or missing
parts or signs of wear.
11-3
Body hinges and latches,

key lock cylinders, and folding
seat hardware lubrication. See
Lubricants on page 116. More
frequent lubrication may be
required when the vehicle
is exposed to a corrosive
environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a
clean cloth makes them last
longer, seal better, and not stick
or squeak.
Restraint system component

check. See Safety System
Check on page 324.
Fuel system inspection for

damage or leaks.
Exhaust system and nearby heat

shields inspection for loose or
damaged components.
11-4
Additional Required Services
Once a Month
Every 12 000 km/7,500 Mi
Tire inflation check. See Tire

Tire wear inspection. See Tire

Inspection on page 1053.
Sunroof track and seal

inspection, if equipped. See
Sunroof on page 217.
Rotate tires. Tires should be

rotated every 12 000 km/
7,500 mi. See Tire Rotation on
page 1053.
At Each Fuel Stop

.
Engine oil level check. See

Once a Year
See Starter Switch Check on
page 1025.
Engine coolant level check. See

Engine Coolant on page 1016.
Windshield washer fluid level

check. See Washer Fluid on
page 1021.
See Automatic Transmission

Shift Lock Control Function
Check on page 1026.
See Ignition Transmission Lock

Check on page 1026.
See Park Brake and P (Park)

Mechanism Check on
page 1027.
Accelerator pedal check for

damage, high effort, or binding.
Replace if needed.
If the vehicle has a Tire Sealant

and Compressor Kit, check the
sealant expiration date printed
on the instruction label of
the kit. See Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit on page 1062.
Underbody flushing service.
Hood/Decklid/Liftgate/Liftglass
Support Gas Strut Service:
Visually inspect gas strut,
if equipped, for signs of wear,
cracks, or other damage. Check
the hold open ability of the gas
strut. Contact your dealer if
service is required.

for taxi, police, or delivery
service. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid on
page 1013.
First Engine Oil Change After

Every 40 000 km/25,000 Mi
.
Passenger compartment
air filter replacement (or every
24 months, whichever occurs
first). More frequent replacement
may be needed if you drive in
areas with heavy traffic, areas
with poor air quality, or areas
with high dust levels.
Replacement may also be
needed if you notice reduced
air flow, windows fogging up,
or odors. Your dealer can help
you determine when it is the
right time to replace the filter.

Every 80 000 km/50,000 Mi
.
Engine air cleaner filter

replacement.
Automatic transmission fluid

change (severe service) for
vehicles mainly driven in heavy
city traffic in hot weather, in hilly
or mountainous terrain, or used
Evaporative control system

inspection. Check all fuel and
vapor lines and hoses for proper
hookup, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve,
if the vehicle has one, works
properly. Replace as needed. An
Emission Control Service. The
U.S. Environmental Protection
Agency or the California Air
Resources Board has
determined that the failure to
perform this maintenance item
will not nullify the emission
warranty or limit recall liability
prior to the completion of the
vehicle's useful life. We,
however, urge that all
recommended maintenance
services be performed at the
indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
11-5

Every 160 000 km/100,000 Mi
.
Automatic transmission fluid

change (normal service). See
Automatic Transmission Fluid on
page 1013.
Spark plug replacement and

spark plug wires inspection. An
Emission Control Service.
1.8L L4 engine only: Timing belt

replacement.

Every 240 000 km/150,000 Mi
.
Engine cooling system drain,

flush, and refill (or every five
years, whichever occurs first).
See Cooling System on
page 1016. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine drive belts inspection for

fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage (or every
10 years, whichever occurs
first). Replace, if needed.
11-6
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
Usage
Engine Oil
Engine Coolant
Hydraulic Brake/Clutch System
Windshield Washer
Manual Transmission
Key Lock Cylinders
Fluid/Lubricant
The engine requires engine oil approved to the dexos specification. Oils
meeting this specification can be identified with the dexos certification
mark. Look for and use only an engine oil that displays the dexos
certification mark of the proper viscosity grade. See Engine Oil on
page 109.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.
See Engine Coolant on page 1016.
DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88863461, in
Canada 88863462).
Optikleen Washer Solvent.
DEXRON-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Castrol BOT 0402 Transmission Fluid (GM Part No. 88862472, in
Canada 88862473).
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Black plate (7,1)

Usage
Hood Latch Assembly, Secondary
Latch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and
Release Pawl
Hood, Door, and Folding Seat Hinges
Weatherstrip Conditioning
11-7
Fluid/Lubricant
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)
or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) or
Dielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).
11-8
Black plate (8,1)
Maintenance Replacement Parts

Replacement parts identified here by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.
Part
GM Part Number
ACDelco Part Number
1.4L L4 Engine
13272719
AC3144C
1.8L L4 Engine
13272720
AC3145C
1.4L L4 Engine
93185674
PF2257G
1.8L L4 Engine
93185674
PF2257G
13271191
CF176
1.4L L4 Engine
55576026
41117
1.8L L4 Engine
55576026
41117
Driver 60.0 cm (23.6 in)
96910777
Passenger 45.0 cm (17.7 in)
96910780
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element

Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades
Black plate (9,1)
11-9
Maintenance Records
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
11-10
Date
Black plate (10,1)

Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Black plate (11,1)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
11-11
11-12
Date
Black plate (12,1)

Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Services Performed
Technical Data
Technical Data
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN)
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Vehicle Data
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4
12-1
Engine Identification
The eighth character in the VIN
is the engine code. This code
identifies the vehicle's engine,
specifications, and replacement
parts. See Engine Specifications
under Capacities and Specifications
on page 122 for the vehicle's
engine code.
Service Parts
Identification Label
This label, on the inside of the glove
box, has the following information:
This legal identifier is in the front

corner of the instrument panel, on
the left side of the vehicle. It can be
seen through the windshield from
outside. The VIN also appears on
the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and certificates of title
and registration.
Number (VIN).
Model designation.
Paint information.
Production options and special

equipment.
Do not remove this label from the

vehicle.
12-2
Technical Data
Vehicle Data
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. Please refer to Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 116 for more information.
Application
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Capacities
Metric
English
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge

amount, see the refrigerant label located under the
hood. See your dealer for more information.
Cooling System
1.4L L4 Engine
5.5 L
5.8 qt
1.8L L4 Engine
6.5 L
6.9 qt
1.4L L4 Engine
4.0 L
4.25 qt
1.8L L4 Engine
4.5 L
4.76 qt
Engine Oil with Filter
Black plate (3,1)
Technical Data
Capacities
Application
Metric
English
Fuel Economy Model with (MH8) Automatic Transmission
59.0 L
15.6 gal
Fuel Economy Model with (MF3) Manual Transmission
48.0 L
12.6 gal
Except Fuel Economy Model
59.0 L
15.6 gal
4.0 L
4.2 qt
140 Y
100 lb ft
Fuel Tank
Transmission Fluid
Automatic 6 Speed
Wheel Nut Torque
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
1.4L L4 Engine
Automatic
Manual
0.70 mm (0.028 in)
1.8L L4 Engine
Automatic
Manual
0.70 mm (0.028 in)
12-3
12-4
Black plate (4,1)
Technical Data
Engine Drive Belt Routing
1.4L L4 Engine
1.8L L4 Engine (with Air

Conditioning)
1.8L L4 Engine (without Air

Conditioning)
Customer Information
Customer
Information
Customer Satisfaction
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
Customer Assistance
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users . . . . . 13-4
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Scheduling Service
Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Courtesy Transportation
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Collision Damage Repair . . . 13-10
Service Publications
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12
Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to
the United States
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
the Canadian
Government . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Privacy
Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-15
OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16
Radio Frequency
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
13-1
Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are
important to your dealer and to
Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the
operation of the vehicle will be
resolved by your dealer's sales or
service departments. Sometimes,
however, despite the best intentions
of all concerned, misunderstandings
can occur. If your concern has not
been resolved to your satisfaction,
the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern
with a member of dealership
management. Normally, concerns
can be quickly resolved at that level.
If the matter has already been
reviewed with the sales, service,
or parts manager, contact the owner
of your dealership or the general
manager.
13-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a

member of dealership management,
it appears your concern cannot be
resolved by your dealership without
further help, in the U.S., call the
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-222-1020. In
Canada, call General Motors of
Canada Customer Communication
Centre at 1-800-263-3777 (English),
or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage you to call the
toll-free number in order to give your
inquiry prompt attention. Have the
following information available to
give the Customer Assistance
representative:
.
Black plate (2,1)
Number (VIN). This is available
from the vehicle registration or
title, or the plate at the top left of
the instrument panel and visible
through the windshield.
Dealership name and location.
Vehicle delivery date and

present mileage.
When contacting Chevrolet,

remember that your concern will
likely be resolved at a dealer's
facility. That is why we suggest
following Step One first.
STEP THREE U.S. Owners:
Both General Motors and your
dealer are committed to making
sure you are completely satisfied
with the new vehicle. However,
if you continue to remain unsatisfied
after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you
can file with the Better Business
Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program
to enforce your rights.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an
out-of-court program administered
by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive
disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may
be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to
filing a court action, use of the
program is free of charge and your
case will generally be heard within

40 days. If you do not agree with the
decision given in your case, you
may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available
to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line
Program using the toll-free
telephone number or write them at
the following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business
Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
www.dr.bbb.org/goauto
This program is available in all
50 states and the District of
Columbia. Eligibility is limited by
vehicle age, mileage, and other
factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility
limitations and/or discontinue its
participation in this program.
Black plate (3,1)
STEP THREE Canadian
Owners: In the event that you do
not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One
and Two, General Motors of Canada
Limited wants you to be aware of its
participation in a no-charge
Mediation/Arbitration Program.
General Motors of Canada Limited
has committed to binding arbitration
of owner disputes involving
factory-related vehicle service
claims. The program provides for
the review of the facts involved by
an impartial third party arbiter, and
may include an informal hearing
before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute
settlement process, from the time
you file your complaint to the final
decision, should be completed in
about 70 days. We believe our
impartial program offers advantages
over courts in most jurisdictions
because it is informal, quick, and
free of charge.
For further information concerning

eligibility in the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),
call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or call
the General Motors Customer
Communication Centre,
1-800-263-3777 (English),
1-800-263-7854 (French),
or write to:
The Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication
Centre
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
The inquiry should be accompanied
by the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN).
13-3
Customer Assistance
Offices
Chevrolet encourages customers
to call the toll-free number for
assistance. However, if a customer
wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet,
the letter should be addressed to:
United States
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer Assistance
Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
www.Chevrolet.com
1-800-222-1020
1-800-833-2438 (For Text
Telephone Devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-243-8872
13-4
Black plate (4,1)
From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
From U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Canada
Customer Communication Centre,
www.gm.ca
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text
Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance:
1-800-268-6800
Overseas
Please contact the local General
Motors Business Unit.
Mexico, Central America, and

Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands)
Online Owner Center
General Motors de Mexico, S. de

R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Av. Ejercito Nacional #843
Col. Granada
C.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.
Information and services

customized for your specific
vehicle all in one convenient
place.
01-800-466-0800
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0800
Customer Assistance for

Text Telephone (TTY)
Users
To assist customers who are deaf,
hard of hearing, or speech-impaired
and who use Text Telephones
(TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY
equipment available at its Customer
Assistance Center. Any TTY user in
the U.S. can communicate with
Chevrolet by dialing:
1-800-833-2438. TTY users in
Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.
Chevrolet Owner Center (U.S.)

www.chevyownercenter.com
Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.
Storage for online service and

maintenance records.
Chevrolet dealer locator for

service nationwide.
Exclusive privileges and offers.
Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.
OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.
Black plate (5,1)
Other Helpful Links
Chevrolet www.chevrolet.com
Chevrolet Merchandise
www.chevymall.com
Help Center www.chevrolet.com/
pages/mds/helpcenter/faq.do
.
FAQ
Contact Us
My GM Canada www.gm.ca
My GM Canada is a
password-protected section
of www.gm.ca where you can
save information on GM vehicles,
get personalized offers, and use
handy tools and forms with
greater ease.
Here are a few of the valuable

tools and services you will have
access to:
.
My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles and
current offers in your area.
My Dealers: Save details such

as address and phone number
for each of your preferred GM
dealers.
My Driveway: Access quick

links to parts and service
estimates, check trade-in
values, or schedule a service
appointment by adding the
vehicles you own to your
driveway profile.
My Preferences: Manage your
profile and use tools and forms
with greater ease.
To sign up, visit the My GM.ca

section within www.gm.ca.
13-5
GM Mobility
Reimbursement Program
This program is available to

qualified applicants for cost
reimbursement of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment
required for the vehicle, such as
hand controls or a wheelchair/
scooter lift for the vehicle.
For more information on the limited
offer, visit www.gmmobility.com or
call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text
Telephone (TTY) users, call
1-800-833-9935.
General Motors of Canada also
has a Mobility Program. Call
1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for
details. TTY users call
1-800-263-3830.
13-6
Black plate (6,1)
Roadside Assistance
Program
For U.S.purchased vehicles, call
18002438872; (Text Telephone
(TTY): 18888892438).
For Canadianpurchased vehicles,
call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,
have the following information
ready:
.
Your name, home address, and

home telephone number.
Telephone number of your

location.
Location of the vehicle.
Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle.
Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN), and
delivery date of the vehicle.
Description of the problem.
Coverage
Chevrolet and General Motors of

Canada Limited reserve the right to
limit services or payment to an
owner or driver if they decide the
claims are made too often, or the
same type of claim is made many
times.
Services Provided
.
Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest
service station.
LockOut Service: Service to

unlock the vehicle if you are
locked out. A remote unlock may
be available if you have OnStar.
For security reasons, the driver
must present identification
before this service is given.
Emergency Tow from a Public

Road or Highway: Tow to the
nearest Chevrolet dealer for
warranty service, or if the vehicle
was in a crash and cannot be
driven. Assistance is also given
when the vehicle is stuck in the
sand, mud, or snow.
Services are provided up to

5 years/160 000 km (100,000 mi),
whichever comes first.
In the U.S., anyone driving the
vehicle is covered. In Canada, a
person driving the vehicle without
permission from the owner is not
covered.
Roadside Assistance is not a part of
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Chevrolet and General Motors of
Canada Limited reserve the right to
make any changes or discontinue
the Roadside Assistance program at
any time without notification.
Black plate (7,1)
.
Flat Tire Change: Service to

change a flat tire with the spare
tire. The spare tire, if equipped,
must be in good condition and
properly inflated. It is the owner's
responsibility for the repair or
replacement of the tire if it is not
covered by the warranty.
Battery Jump Start: Service to
jump start a dead battery.
Services Not Included in

Roadside Assistance
.
Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.
Legal fines.
Mounting, dismounting,
or changing of snow tires,
chains, or other traction devices.
Towing or services for vehicles

driven on a non-public road or
highway.
Services Specific to
Canadian-Purchased Vehicles
.
Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.
Diesel fuel delivery may be
restricted. Propane and other
fuels are not provided through
this service.
Lock-Out Service: Vehicle

registration is required.
Trip Routing Service: Detailed

maps of North America are
provided when requested either
with the most direct route or the
most scenic route. There is a
limit of six requests per year.
Additional travel information is
also available. Allow three
weeks for delivery.
13-7
Trip Interruption Benefits

and Assistance: Must be
over 250 kilometers from
where your trip was started to
qualify. General Motors of
Canada Limited requires
pre-authorization, original
detailed receipts, and a copy
of the repair orders. Once
authorization has been received,
the Roadside Assistance advisor
will help to make arrangements
and explain how to receive
payment.
Alternative Service: If
assistance cannot be provided
right away, the Roadside
Assistance advisor may
give permission to get local
emergency road service. You will
receive payment, up to $100,
after sending the original receipt
to Roadside Assistance.
Mechanical failures may be
covered, however any cost for
parts and labor for repairs not
covered by the warranty are the
owner responsibility.
13-8
Black plate (8,1)
Scheduling Service
Appointments
Program
When the vehicle requires warranty

service, contact your dealer and
request an appointment. By
scheduling a service appointment
and advising the service consultant
of your transportation needs, your
dealer can help minimize your
inconvenience.
To enhance your ownership

experience, we and our participating
dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support
program for vehicles with the
Bumper-to-Bumper (Base Warranty
Coverage period in Canada),
extended powertrain, and/or
hybridspecific warranties in both
the U.S. and Canada.
If the vehicle cannot be scheduled

into the service department
immediately, keep driving it until it
can be scheduled for service,
unless, of course, the problem is
safety related. If it is, please call
your dealership, let them know this,
and ask for instructions.
If your dealer requests you to bring
the vehicle for service, you are
urged to do so as early in the work
day as possible to allow for the
same-day repair.
Several Courtesy Transportation

options are available to assist in
reducing inconvenience when
warranty repairs are required.
Courtesy Transportation is not a
part of the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. A separate booklet
entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished
with each new vehicle provides
detailed warranty coverage
information.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be
completed while you wait. However,
if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize inconvenience by
providing several transportation
options. Depending on the
circumstances, your dealer can
offer one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred
means of offering Courtesy
Transportation. Dealers may provide
shuttle service to get you to your
destination with minimal interruption
of your daily schedule. This includes
oneway or roundtrip shuttle service
within reasonable time and distance
parameters of your dealer's area.
Black plate (9,1)
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If the vehicle requires overnight
warranty repairs, and public
transportation is used instead of
your dealer's shuttle service, the
expense must be supported by
original receipts and can only be up
to the maximum amount allowed by
GM for shuttle service. In addition,
for U.S. customers, should you
arrange transportation through
a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable
fuel expenses may be available.
Claim amounts should reflect
actual costs and be supported by
original receipts. See your dealer for
information regarding the allowance
amounts for reimbursement of fuel
or other transportation costs.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or
reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if the vehicle is kept
for an overnight warranty repair.
Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original
receipts. This requires that you sign
and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and
rental vehicle provider requirements.
Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements,
insurance coverage, credit card,
etc. You are responsible for fuel
usage charges and may also be
responsible for taxes, levies, usage
fees, excessive mileage, or rental
usage beyond the completion of the
repair.
It may not be possible to provide a
like vehicle as a courtesy rental.
13-9
Additional Program
Information
All program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at
every dealer. Please contact your
dealer for specific information
about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be
administered by appropriate dealer
personnel.
General Motors reserves the
right to unilaterally modify,
change, or discontinue Courtesy
Transportation at any time and to
resolve all questions of claim
eligibility pursuant to the terms and
conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
13-10
Black plate (10,1)
Collision Damage Repair

If the vehicle is involved in a
collision and it is damaged, have
the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper
equipment and quality replacement
parts. Poorly performed collision
repairs diminish the vehicle resale
value, and safety performance can
be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new
parts made with the same materials
and construction methods as the
parts with which the vehicle was
originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are the best choice to
ensure that the vehicle's designed
appearance, durability, and safety
are preserved. The use of Genuine
GM parts can help maintain the GM
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts

may also be used for repair. These
parts are typically removed from
vehicles that were total losses in
prior crashes. In most cases, the
parts being recycled are from
undamaged sections of the vehicle.
A recycled original equipment GM
part may be an acceptable choice to
maintain the vehicle's originally
designed appearance and safety
performance; however, the history of
these parts is not known. Such parts
are not covered by the GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any
related failures are not covered by
that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also
available. These are made by
companies other than GM and may
not have been tested for the vehicle.
As a result, these parts may fit
poorly, exhibit premature durability/
corrosion problems, and may not
perform properly in subsequent

collisions. Aftermarket parts are not
covered by the GM New Vehicle
Limited Warranty, and any vehicle
failure related to such parts is not
covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you
choose a collision repair facility that
meets your needs before you ever
need collision repairs. Your dealer
may have a collision repair center
with GM-trained technicians and
stateoftheart equipment, or be
able to recommend a collision repair
center that has GM-trained
technicians and comparable
equipment.
Insuring the Vehicle
Protect your investment in the GM
vehicle with comprehensive and
collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the
quality of coverage afforded by
various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide
reduced protection to the GM
vehicle by limiting compensation
for damage repairs by using
aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not
specify aftermarket collision parts.
When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you ensure that the
vehicle will be repaired with GM
original equipment collision parts.
If such insurance coverage is not
available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching
to another insurance carrier.
If the vehicle is leased, the leasing

company may require you to have
insurance that ensures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment
Manufacturer (OEM) parts or
Genuine Manufacturer replacement
parts. Read the lease carefully, as
you may be charged at the end of
the lease for poor quality repairs.
If a Crash Occurs
If there has been an injury, call
emergency services for help. Do not
leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of.
Move the vehicle only if its position
puts you in danger, or you are
instructed to move it by a police
officer.
13-11
Gather the following information:

.
Driver name, address, and

telephone number.
Driver license number.
Owner name, address, and

telephone number.
Vehicle license plate number.
Vehicle make, model, and

model year.
Number (VIN).
Insurance company and policy

number.
General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.
Give only the necessary information

to police and other parties involved
in the crash.
Choose a reputable repair facility

that uses quality replacement parts.
See Collision Parts earlier in this
section.
For emergency towing see

Roadside Assistance Program on
page 136.
If the airbag has inflated, see What

Will You See after an Airbag
Inflates? on page 332.
13-12
Black plate (12,1)
Managing the Vehicle Damage

Repair Process
In the event that the vehicle requires
damage repairs, GM recommends
that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined
repair facility of choice, take the
vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any
required replacement collision parts
be original equipment parts, either
new Genuine GM parts or recycled
original GM parts. Remember,
recycled parts will not be covered by
the GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair,
but you must live with the repair.
Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may
initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with
the repair professional, and insist on
Genuine GM parts. Remember,
if the vehicle is leased, you may be
obligated to have the vehicle
repaired with Genuine GM parts,
even if your insurance coverage
does not pay the full cost.
If another party's insurance

company is paying for the repairs,
you are not obligated to accept a
repair valuation based on that
insurance company's collision
policy repair limits, as you have no
contractual limits with that company.
In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as
long as the cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Ordering Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis
and repair information on the
engines, transmission, axle,
suspension, brakes, electrical,
steering, body, etc.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give additional
technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service
General Motors cars and trucks.
Each bulletin contains instructions

to assist in the diagnosis and
service of the vehicle.
Owner Information
Owner publications are written
specifically for owners and intended
to provide basic operational
information about the vehicle.
The Owner Manual includes the
Maintenance Schedule for all
models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,
Owner Manual, and Warranty
Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
Without Portfolio: Owner
Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE:
$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling and
shipping fees.
Black plate (13,1)
Current and Past Models
Technical Service Bulletins and
Manuals are available for current
and past model GM vehicles.
ORDER TOLL FREE:
1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday
8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit
Helm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.
Or write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring
obligation. Allow ample time for
delivery.
All listed prices are quoted in U.S.
funds. Make checks payable in U.S.
funds.
Reporting Safety
Defects
to the United States
Government
If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause
a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
General Motors.
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign.
13-13
However, NHTSA cannot

become involved in individual
problems between you, your
dealer, or General Motors.
To contact NHTSA, you may
call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or
write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor
vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
13-14
Black plate (14,1)

to the Canadian
Government
If you live in Canada, and you
believe that the vehicle has a safety
defect, notify Transport Canada
immediately, and notify General
Motors of Canada Limited. Call
them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

to General Motors
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or
Transport Canada) in a situation like
this, notify General Motors.
Call 1-800-222-1020, or write:
Chevrolet Motor Division
Chevrolet Customer
Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33170
Detroit, MI 48232-5170
In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854
(French), or write:
Customer Communication Centre,
Vehicle Data
Recording and
Privacy
This GM vehicle has a number of
sophisticated computers that record
information about the vehicles
performance and how it is driven.
For example, the vehicle uses
computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission
performance, to monitor the
conditions for airbag deployment
and deploy airbags in a crash, and,
if so equipped, to provide antilock
braking to help the driver control the
vehicle. These modules may store
data to help your dealer technician
service the vehicle. Some modules
may also store data about how you
operate the vehicle, such as rate of
fuel consumption or average speed.
These modules may also retain the
owners personal preferences, such
as radio pre-sets, seat positions,
and temperature settings.
Black plate (15,1)
Event Data Recorders

This vehicle has an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose
of an EDR is to record, in certain
crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an airbag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a
vehicle's systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and
safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed
to record such data as:
.
How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.
Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened.
How far, if at all, the driver was

pressing the accelerator and/or
brake pedal.
How fast the vehicle was

traveling.
This data can help provide a better

understanding of the circumstances
in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded
by the vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal
driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded.
However, other parties, such as
law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
13-15
GM will not access this data or

share it with others except: with the
consent of the vehicle owner or,
if the vehicle is leased, with the
consent of the lessee; in response
to an official request by police or
similar government office; as part of
GM's defense of litigation through
the discovery process; or, as
required by law. Data that GM
collects or receives may also be
used for GM research needs or may
be made available to others for
research purposes, where a need is
shown and the data is not tied to a
specific vehicle or vehicle owner.
13-16
Black plate (16,1)
OnStar
If the vehicle is equipped with an
active OnStar system, that system
may also record data in crash or
near crashlike situations. The
OnStar Terms and Conditions
provides information on data
collection and use and is available
in the OnStar glove box kit, at
www.onstar.com (U.S.) or
www.onstar.ca (Canada), or by
pressing the Q button and
speaking to an advisor.
Navigation System
If the vehicle has a navigation
system, use of the system may
result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and
other trip information. Refer to the
navigation system operating manual
for information on stored data and
for deletion instructions.
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID)
Radio Frequency
Statement
RFID technology is used in some

vehicles for functions such as tire
pressure monitoring and ignition
system security, as well as in
connection with conveniences such
as key fobs for remote door locking/
unlocking and starting, and
in-vehicle transmitters for garage
door openers. RFID technology in
GM vehicles does not use or record
personal information or link with any
other GM system containing
personal information.
This vehicle has systems that

operate on a radio frequency that
comply with Part 15 of the Federal
rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. The device may not cause
interference.
2. The device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause
undesired operation of the
device.
Changes or modifications to any of
these systems by other than an
authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
INDEX
A
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Add-On Electrical
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Air Filter, Passenger
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Airbag
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38
Airbag System
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
How Does an Airbag
Restrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Passenger Sensing
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-31
Airbag System (cont.)

What Will You See after an
Airbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-32
Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29
Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-28
Airbags
Passenger Status Indicator . . .5-12
Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Servicing Airbag-Equipped
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-37
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Alarm
Vehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Antenna
Multi-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Antilock Brake
System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
i-1
Appearance Care
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Assistance Program,
Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
Audio System
Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-1
Automatic
Climate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-3
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-25
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-27
Shift Lock Control
Function Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
i-2
INDEX
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
Power Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Voltage and Charging
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Blade Replacement,
Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-22, 7-24, 7-28
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Signal, and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-33
and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-30
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
C
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
California
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iii
Capacities and
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Carbon Monoxide
Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Cargo
Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cautions, Danger, and
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-2
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13
Check
Engine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Ignition
Transmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-26
Child Restraints
Infants and Young
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-42
Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-47
Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-40
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-57
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-44
INDEX
Cigarette Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Cleaning
Exterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83
Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-88
Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Clutch, Hydraulic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-10
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Compressor Kit, Tire
Sealant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Coolant
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Courtesy Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-3
Text Telephone (TTY)
Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-4
Ordering Information . . . . . . 13-12
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
i-3
D
Damage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-10
Danger, Warnings, and
Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-15
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Door
Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4
Driver Information
Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
i-4
INDEX
Driving
Characteristics and
Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-21
Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-8
If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
E
Electrical Equipment,
Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-50
Electrical System
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
Overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Check and Service Engine
Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Coolant Temperature
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
Cooling System
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-23
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Overheated Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Reduced Power Light . . . . . . . . .5-21
Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-24
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18
Engine Oil
Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-49

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-15
Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1
F
Filter,
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-4
Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91
Fluid
Automatic Transmission . . . . 10-13
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Fog Lamps
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Front Fog Lamp
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
INDEX
Front Seats
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-39
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-43
Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-42
Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-40
Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-40
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-20
Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Requirements, California . . . . .9-40
System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Fuel Economy
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21
Fuses
Engine Compartment
Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35
Fuses and Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38
i-5
Gasoline
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-40
Gauges
Engine Coolant
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Warning Lights and
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
General Information
Service and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5
Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-4

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Headlamps
Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
(DRL) Indicator Light . . . . . . . .5-22
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-21
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-22
Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Heater
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
Heating and Air
Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1, 8-3
i-6
INDEX
High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21

Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . . 9-8
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Hydraulic Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
I
Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
Ignition Transmission Lock
Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Infants and Young Children,
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Instrument Panel
Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel Overview . . . . . 1-2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
J
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-78
K
Key and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-29
Keyless Entry
Remote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-42
Lamp Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Lamps
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Daytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2
Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Front Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Signal, and Parking
Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13
On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
LATCH System
Replacing Parts after a
Crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-54
LATCH, Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
Light
StabiliTrak OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Lighter, Cigarette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Lighting
Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Lights
Airbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Antilock Brake System
(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16
Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
INDEX
Lights (cont.)
High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2
Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Reduced Engine Power . . . . . .5-21
Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . .5-10
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Service Vehicle Soon . . . . . . . . .5-16
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
(TCS)/StabiliTrak . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Up-Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Warning, Power Steering . . . . .5-18
Locks
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-20
Low-Profile Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Lower Anchors and Tethers
for Children (LATCH
System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47
M
Maintenance
Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Maintenance Schedule
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . 11-2
Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13
Manual Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Messages
Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Battery Voltage and
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-28
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Object Detection System . . . . .5-30
i-7
Messages (cont.)
Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Starting the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26, 5-27
Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Monitor System, Tire
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48
Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
i-8
INDEX
N
Navigation
Vehicle Data Recording
and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
O
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Off-Road
Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Oil
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9
Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-12
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20
Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-40
Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-4
OnStar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Operation, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Ordering
Service Publications . . . . . . . . 13-12
Outlets
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Overheated Engine
Protection
Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
Overview, Infotainment
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2, 7-4
P
Park
Shifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Assist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-31
Brake and P (Park)
Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-27
Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-23
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Passenger Compartment Air
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-33
Perchlorate Materials
Requirements, California . . . . . 10-3
Personalization
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Phone
Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-22, 7-24, 7-28
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Protection, Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Reduced Engine Light . . . . . . . .5-21
Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-20
Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Pregnancy, Using Safety
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Privacy
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-16
Program
Courtesy Transportation . . . . . .13-8
Proposition 65 Warning,
California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
INDEX
R
Radio Frequency
Identification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-16
Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16
Radios
AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Recommended
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39
Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Records
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Reimbursement Program,
GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
Replacement Parts
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-39
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-39
Parts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-54
Replacing Safety Belt
System Parts after a Crash . . . 3-25
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Restraints
Where to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-46
Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30
Roads
Driving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Roadside Assistance
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6
i-9
Roof
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4
Running the Vehicle While
Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
S
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-25
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10
Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-25
Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-24
Safety Defects Reporting
Canadian Government . . . . . . 13-14
General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13
Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . 11-2
Scheduling Appointments . . . . . . 13-8
i-10
INDEX
Sealant Kit, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62

Seats
Adjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Securing Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55, 3-57
Security
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Vehicle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Service
Accessories and
Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4
Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13
Maintenance, General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1
Service (cont.)
Publications Ordering
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12
Scheduling Appointments . . . . .13-8
Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Vehicle Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Shift Lock Control Function
Check, Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
Shifting
Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-20
Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-21
Sidemarker
Signals, Turn and
Lane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Spare Tire
Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Specifications and
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
StabiliTrak
OFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33
Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5

Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-25
Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Messsages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Power, Warning Lights . . . . . . . .5-18
Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Stoplamps and Back-Up Lamps
Storage Areas
Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
System
Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
INDEX
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Taillamps
Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-4
Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-10
Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Tires
Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77
Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-60
Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-50
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Low Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31
Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-48
Tires (cont.)
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53
Sealant and
Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . 10-62
Sealant and Compressor
Kit, Storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-69
Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42
Terminology and
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Towing
Driving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-44
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-49
General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-44
Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-81
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48, 9-49
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
i-11
Traction
Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-32
Control System (TCS)/
StabiliTrak Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48, 9-49
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-25
Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Fluid, Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Transportation Program,
Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Turn Signal
i-12
INDEX
U
Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-37
Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Up-Shift Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
V
Vehicle
Alarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Identification
Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26, 5-27
Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33
Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-32
Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
Service Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81
Vehicle Care
and Compressor Kit . . . . . . . 10-69
Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47
Service Parts Identification
Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
W
Warning
Brake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv
Cautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .iv
Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
Wheels
Alignment and Tire
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54
Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-46
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14
Windshield
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Winter
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Winter Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-27

Manual de Cruze 2011

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Cruze 2011

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual de Cruze 2011

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2011 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1

2011 Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2011

Black plate (3,1)

The names, logos, emblems,

This manual describes features that

Canadian Vehicle Owners

2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2011

Black plate (4,1)

Using this Manual

Danger, Warnings, and

The vehicle has components and

M : This symbol is shown when

Danger indicates a hazard with a

A circle with a slash through it is a

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2011

Black plate (5,1)

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

j : LATCH System Child

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2011

Black plate (6,1)

Initial Drive Information

Performance and Maintenance

Chevrolet Cruze Owner Manual - 2011

Black plate (2,1)

Front Fog Lamps on page 64

Q. Cruise Control on page 935.

Instrument Panel Illumination

A. Exterior Lamp Controls on

B. Air Vents on page 86.

Driver Information Center (DIC)

Infotainment on page 71.

R. Steering Wheel Adjustment on

Satellite Radio on page 713 (If

S. Driver Airbag. See Where Are

Infotainment Display Screen.

K. Instrument Panel Storage on

Instrument Panel Fuse Block on

Light Sensor. See Automatic

Ignition Switch. See Ignition

U. Driver Knee Airbag. See Where

Power Door Locks on page 27.

M. Passenger Airbag. See Where

W. Hazard Warning Flashers on

N. Hood Release. See Hood on

X. Shift Lever. See Automatic

O. Data Link Connector (DLC) (Out

Climate Control Systems on

AA. Passenger Airbag Status

Remote Keyless Entry

RKE Transmitter with Remote

Q to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can